Home

Installation Manual - ServiceNet - T

Contents

1. 0 NORMAL OK Note Successfully executed 4 KEY VALUE NO DDNAME DEFAULT USED Note DDNAME for key dataset wasn t found The default value KEYIN is used 8 WRONG PARAMETER Note At least 1 parameter is wrong 12 ERROR DURING READ INPUT PARAMETER 16 ERROR DURING WRITE NEW KEY INTO KEY DATASET 20 ERROR DURING WRITE NEW KEY INTO KEY DATASET DUPLICATE KEY Note Key ld already exists 24 ERROR DURING DELETE A KEY FROM KEY DATASET 28 ERROR DURING READ KEY DIRECT FOR DELETE Note Can t read key from key management Deletion isn t possible 32 ERROR DURING READ KEY DIRECT Note Can t read key from key management Key doesn t exist 33 ERROR DURING READ A BEST KEY FUN S Note Can t get key for encryption best key 34 ERROR DURING READ A BEST KEY FUN R Note Can t get key for restoring best key 36 ERROR DURING UPDATE AN EXISTING KEY Note key doesn t exist 40 ERROR DURING KEYDS PROCESSING NO FLAG 41 ERROR DURING READ BEST KEY PROCESSING NO FLAG d FUN S ERROR DURING READ BEST
2. 227 A 1 Authorization Exit 001 2 1 227 A 2 SWIN Exit DFUXOQ2 iere terti te root laore Lade ene Cea cuve dan cel Da 233 A 3 Accounting User Exit 2 1 coiere eee eter idit rus 235 A 4 Job Submit Exit 003 2 2 iiieeec esee zac ran tpa snas anna PR 236 A 5 Identification User 239 A 6 ODETTE FTP User EXits erreur ener n ceto rubr nu nan in inn onda ia e sa paca 243 B Description of the rvs controldataset record KDRECORD 246 C Description of accounting information nennen 249 D TVS rji 251 D 1 General Information 1 cete culter rue rera 251 D 2 Prerequisites cere ette e Ep En 251 rvsMVS Installation Manual Contents mo umum D 3 Job to gain the basic data for the statistics 2 251 D 4 Station Activity Program 252 D 5 Line Activity Program 255 D 6 Legend of rvs statistics
3. 256 Example for an extended rvs Start Procedure esses 259 Reference Utility program 76 261 Using the Remote Operating nnmnnn 279 DL SEEERIIDM N 283 H 1 rvsMVS Program Profile Table only used for the BSC component 283 Key Data Utility Program DFO54K 287 1 1 Introd uction 287 1 2 rvs Key Data 287 1 3 Maintenance of the key enne nnne nnn 287 1 3 1 teaches Monee ra ges Eo aua ea 287 1 3 2 Creation of rvs Key Data 287 1 3 3 Initialize Key Datasets 288 1 3 4 Generate key pair of your own 288 1 3 5 Import your own key pair the key 288 1 3 6 Import a public key of your partner 289 1 3 7 List all keys of the key 289 1 3 8 Export all keys from the key management to a seque
4. enne nennen nnne nnne nennen 30 3 8 Definitions for remote operating function 30 4 TVS System 6 4 REC UE 32 4 1 VS Load te tenente micis tii 32 4 2 rvs Controldat selt uideo diens ree laete 32 4 3 Eogdat set ddeciccd EARNE Enrika 33 4 4 rvs Tables Dataset neue 33 4 5 rvs Key Data data nnmnnn nnmnnn ennum nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nn nn 33 4 6 Datasets for USP feature nnmnnn 34 4 7 tys Jobs Dataset 2 eno 34 4 8 m 4 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS nnmnnn 35 5 1 Installation Guide from the Compact Disk sees 35 5 2 Content Of Compact Disk 36 5 3 Creation of module DF067A Macro rvsDYN 37 5 4 Change
5. 45 263 SOL WATE iio toties 11 KEY DAT AS oii et eR ette 142 RMOPAPPL eite ete bete 58 KEYDBEBT iere 263 tait eie RR iet 58 KEYEXPR iiie tbe emite ero 263 RPW icu ie e ptt ets 86 90 94 KEYIMPA T e ete ettet ee 263 RTAPBJC see Tape Dataset JCL for Copy Job KEYIMPDBU etie emite eis 263 RVSDUMPBD eet ttem Ute ERES 141 KEYIMPRT tite Ute 263 RV SLOG ERO 143 8 263 SCC Bee 58 5 263 E PE 86 5 nats 263 SECURITY CNTD tte eR 58 263 SECURITY Station 79 82 LBLKSIZE 85 90 97 101 105 114 Security Library dataset L icencekey zi eoe Er nr 12 Installation 1 toD 45 nere 115 SENDPW 86 90 94 LINETY PE secet 86 115 SESPROEF cera rr T RE Re 91 Logdataset SESSIONS see Tables Dataset Sessions Table Creation icio aed 40 SESSNUM ien pre pr rre 102 General 2 node RP ORG 32 SEIDEXTR nOD 94 eus MERERI 86 SEIDEXTS eee eC 95 sns 85 90 97 101 105 114 Nip 81
6. rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features 10 4 3 Lanquage environment option file CEEOPTS The content of the CEEOPTS member of TABLES must be changed from MSGFILE RVSCMSG 121 0 ENQ POSIX OFF to MSGFILE RVSCMSG 121 0 ENQ RPTOPTS OFF RPTSTG OFF TERMTHDACT UAIMM TRAP ON NOSPIE LH The Values RPTOPTS and RPTSTG are reporting options If there is a problem they may be switched to ON to gather more information Important is that the option POSIX OFF is removed rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features 10 5 Configuration of the rvsMVS start procedure In order to use OFTP2 Features it is necessary to adapt the rvsMVS start procedure ICERTS DD DSN RVS CERTS DISP SHR This DD statement points to the certificate store IKEYSTORE DD DSN RVS KEYSTORE DISP SHR This DD statement points to the keystore CEEOPTS DD DSN RVS TABLES CEEOPTS DISP SHR This DD statement points to the language environment option file required by the security implementation RVSCMSG DD SYSOUT This DD statement is required for language environment messages EXTCONF DD DSN RVS TABLES EXTCONF DISP SHR This DD statement points to an external configuration used for special configuration of security tasks for internal use only 10 6 System messages and error codes Refer rvsMVS messages and codes
7. 123 eoe 63 Sessions 125 142 WV WAC Cres e it o enter bib iret e MITES 63 STAR eiie ete eet HERR e Huse 137 141 cett eter eO Os 63 Start Parameter sess 47 141 WSIZE tie Ee 63 100 stations table 404042400 0 71 X CUD 98 stationstable 00 142 25 te bites 99 SYSOUTJIG ER 130 142 X25 GROUP etes eee PERMET 64 TRNTADBEE ctt 153 X23NUM 35i ite Hx b APER BEES 99 Tape Dataset been 99 JCL for Copy 129 142 MZISESS 100 OT 105 MZ OVS seiner 64 TCPLOCAD esee 60 65 66 MISUSE aS 64 66 TCPM AX tti RHOD 60 X25WSIZE 100 60 NIRE 64 TCPPORT 61 65 66 106 XBESIZE annie 64 TCPPROD ss Br URBE QA 61 en rnnt nis 65 TCPSBSS tienen Rn NIS 106 XNUMBER oan ERES 65 TCPSTKID 45 nri ORIS 61 66 eeta enne 65 98 lt 61 Y 142
8. 2 100 6 2 5 Subset 5 valid for LU 6 2 stations eene 104 6 2 6 Subset 6 valid for TCP IP Direct 108 6 2 7 Subset 7 valid for FTP stations 110 6 2 8 Subset 8 valid for Indirect Stations VIA 114 6 2 9 Subset 9 valid for BSC Line Entries 2 116 6 2 10 Examples of a Stations Table sse 121 6 3 Special Transmission Protocols rvs Program Profile 125 6 4 Definition of rvs Sessions Table e eeeeseesseeeseeeeeen eene nnnm nennen nnn 127 6 5 JCL Member for Copy Jobs eeeesesseeseseeeeeen nenne sienne natn tnnt nnns inna sisi n natn nasa as 131 6 6 Control of rvs Messages eene 135 6 6 1 Control of Messages for Console and remote Operating 135 6 6 2 Additional SYSOUT protocols 137 6 6 3 Definition of non deletable messages sse 138 6 7 Automatically executed rvs commands eee eene 139 6 8 2 2 2 141 6 9 rvs Procedures and 143 6 9 1 rys Start oneri eee feci en orit ire net deed
9. rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features LR R2 R3 SET LEN TO REMAINING ROOM COPYDATA DS L R4 BUFADR LOAD ADR OF CALLER S BUF LR R5 R2 LOAD LEN OF DATA LA R6 WBUF LOAD ADR OF DATA LR R7 R5 LOAD LEN OF DATA MVCL R4 R6 ST R4 BUFADR SAVE OFFSET INTO BUF L R3 BUFLEN LOAD REMAINING LEN OF BUF SR R3 R2 CALC NEW REMAINING LEN ST R3 BUFLEN SAVE NEW REMAINING LEN END OF BUF NO CONTINUE LTR R3 R3 BH ENLOOP B EXITOO EXIT eee ce eee eee eee e ee eee eee eee ce ee ce ee ce ee ce eee eee ce ee ce ee ce e he ce e ce ce ec e e e kv e kv RETURN TO CALLER kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkkxkxk EXITO1 DS R15 1 B EXIT EXITO2 DS R15 2 B EXIT EXITOO DS R15 0 EXIT DS CEETERM RC R15 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk CONSTANTS c oe e e e e e e e e e e e e e de e de de e e e oe de e e de de de de de de de de e de oe ode ce ode oe oe oe de ce oe e e e e e e eee eee e e e e e e A x x xx PPA CEEPPA WAITTIME QNAME RNAME SATTACH ATTACH GOSCAN GQSCAN DEQ SSTIMERM DC F 2 DC C CRYPTLIB DC C RANDOM ATTACH EP IEFBR14 255 SF L EQU GOSCAN SCOPE ALL XSYS YES MF L EQU 5 05 ENQ QNAME RNAME S SYSTEMS MF L EQU
10. IF amp SYSISPF ACTIVE THEN ISPEXEC SELECT PANEL DF000PO00 ELSE WRITE PLEASE CALL rvs ONLY UNDER ISPF UNALLOCATE LIBRARIES ISPEXEC LIBDEF ISPPLIB ISPEXEC LIBDEF ISPMLIB rvsMVS Installation Manual 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS Note e f you have allocated the clists panels and msgs to the ISPF DD names SYSPROC ISPPLIB and ISPMLIB you can erase the lines marked with an Be sure to define the RVS LOADLIB for variable amp ZDFLOAD e f you substitute names smaller than the underlined fields you must replace the underline by space e station id list may be the STATIONS TABLE see chapter 6 2 of your installation It is not supplied by the rvs software distributors The list is displayed in the panels only as an information to the user when he insert a question mark in the field STATION ID e The variables amp DFAKI amp DFALI and amp DFUSMAN refer to data sets that contain further information for the rvs users The data sets are not supplied by the rvs software distributers The rvs system programmer may supply these data sets or erase option from the initial panel DFOOOPOO You may want to change any panel in your own way just by altering the panel members in the appropriate manner In most cases you do not have to change the clists too So it is quite easy to adjust the layout and the functional restrictions of rvs to your requirements E g an
11. TYPE D e e Synonyme of this keyword is ST TYPE type Type of the record 2 characters optional The record type of the control dataset records to be queried The value is one two characters long code according to the list below Also a list of max twelve codes enclosed in parentheses and separated with commas may be given This parameter must be given if STATUS is not defined but is is exclusive with STATUS AS Active still due to be sent AR Active still due to be received AN Active end to end response in relais station A AS AR BS Terminated send transmission BR Terminated receive transmission B BS BR CS Successfully completed send transmission CR Successfully completed receive transmission CS CR DS Active not yet started send transmission DR Active not yet started receive transmission D DS DR RS Resident send transmission RR Resident receive transmission R RS RR JA Job active JC Job completed J JA JC S AS CS R AR CR yu Any record type Examples TYPE B All abended transmissions TYPE AR AS C active receive send transmissions and all completed transmissions Synonyme of this keyword is TYP rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Reference Utility program DF076A SID sid Station identification 1 3 characters optional The station identification of the remote station sid If the searched sid is exactly one or two characters long the val
12. e e ke ke KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEKE KEKE KEKE XAPPLID 1 AVARVSG1 XLUNAME 12XVWAOTR1 XNUMBER 1 0536112345 PSIZE 1 128 WSIZE 1 7 5 1 1 XNUMCHCK 1 NO BAAR e ke ke ke ke KKK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ke ke ke 2 Definition for CTCP 2 ISDN 2 2 e e e ke ke ke ke ke KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEKE ke e ke e KEKE XAPPLID 2 AVARVSG2 XLUNAME 22XVWAOTR1 XNUMBER 2 0536123456 PSIZE 2 128 WSIZE 2 7 2 1 2 NO 2 2 e e e ke ke ke ke KKK KKK KKK KK e he e he e he e he e he e he e ke e he e he ke he e he ke he he e ke e ke e ke e ke e ke ek 3 Definition for CTCP 10 25 ehe e ke e he ke he khe ke he khe khe khe khe khe khe ke he KKK he Fe Fe e he e he e he ke Fe e he e he He He e he ke he he e e e ke e ke e ke e ke XAPPLID 10 AVARVSG4 XLUNAME 10 XVWGOTR1 XNUMBER 10 45536120002 PSIZE 10 256 WSIZE 10 2 10 15 XNUMCHCK 10 YES Re e e e e e e ke ke khe khe khe ke khe khe khe khe khe khe KKK he e he e he e he e he e he e he e he ke he ke he ke e ke e ke e ke e KEKE 4 Definition for CTCP 11 XOT Ek e e ke ke ehe ke he khe khe khe khe khe khe khe khe khe Fe Fe Fe he Fe KK he e he e he Fe Fe Fe He ke he ke he e he ke he e he e ke e ke e ke e ke e XOTUSE 11 YES XOTLOCAD 11 192 168 0 1 XOTLPORT 11 199
13. 86 115 SLAVE cei a 115 DIU eek He Hel ie 90 102 Medien Se ee Ai AN 59 ee ek 56 SMSDATCL EI UR RD 59 IJJ62MUA X ioo Hee eb eis ei 56 SMSMNGUCL ee DIA OO 59 LIUJ62MODE RIRs 56 102 SMSSIOCE ieu RE DRIN OO 59 LUG2USE ze eee 56 SNAUSE neeeeE es 59 90 102 SPCLOGIC ee 95 MAXSV Se ei ee 57 86 115 Messages SPROE eee i EE 91 e ea BE 134 141 SPW 3 eI as 86 91 94 22 2 133 SSIDEXTR 95 MONITOR etre eet te eere eerte rete es 159 SSIDEXTS eie ttes 95 rvsMVS Installation Manual Index 5 see Tape Dataset JCL for Copy Job enne oe 62 START see Tables Dataset START 102 Start Procedure eene Ee 141 sce RERO T RHEIN 163 exaimple 237 eaten eee Soe E ee REP 166 STATION eee eR ERE EHE 59 BEN 174 STATIONS see Tables Dataset stations table v Ir EFE 170 statistics SNA ctr eR eer IEEE 168 ge
14. RIED 94 How to use EXTERNAL SECURITY 179 180 181 tail oleae conte Sogn pte 98 IER 85 PADD Lie ne REED 98 55 cetera 159 Installation Tests 202244 401 159 PDF0002A rele b Cine REIR 143 Interhnk 61 66 PDF0009A 146 INT RDR uen 142 PDEQ0T4A nie t eer nes 147 ISPF Panels PDFO0015A 5 eie tete este 148 Authorization esee 43 PDS Transfer essere 178 Installation 4 eere coe 41 PFKEYS see Remote Operating PFKEYS jd 55 PHONE onte eee 79 115 JOBCARD see Tables Dataset Jobcard PPROF ELE 86 JOBCARDF itin 142 PROGPROF see Tables Dataset Program Profile JOBCARDS see Tables Dataset JOBCARDS Table JSSNAME nee eee denti 55 tet ee tees 57 100 JSSSYSID iet edet 56 RECVPW 5 oues 86 90 94 KD esee ettet menie ei edente 143 Remote Operating qnt 142 PE Keys osten imt ede ete 139 Key Data data set PEREYS eerte te 142 generalis tite nite E tetti e 32 EN 255 Key Data data set REPBEY 58 General 5 ettet eite ettet Rs 263 Requirements Key Data dataset Hard Water toti tees 11
15. 167 8 2 5 Formation LUG 2 Trace tene ROBAR eS 169 8 2 6 Format of TCP IP 171 8 2 7 Format of FUP Trace eec cerent igo rer been eii ik cia 173 rvsMVS Installation Manual Contents 9 ilg AS i 176 9 1 Feature Architecture 176 9 2 Partioned Data Set PDS Transfer 22222222 1 177 9 3 External Compression nci rLe cera nnmnnn annon re Ec nnmnnn nnmnnn nna 178 9 3 1 2 Steps to Prepare the Use of External Compress Feature 178 9 4 External Security 5 uico eine Lee aeneo uo Ge oot ue 179 9 4 1 7 Steps to Prepare the Use of External Security Feature 179 9 5 User Separation USP step by step instructions eee 179 9 5 1 Introduction se p ES 179 9 5 2 Installation nce et eoi ere heo 180 9 5 3 Configurations pro ecelesia ters 180 9 5 4 Work with USP Panels nennen nnne 181 10 OFTP 2 FANUC TERI 190 10 1 LI CTU ON mer C 190 10 2 Steps to configure required data
16. D 4 Station Activity Program Prerequisites for a group related evaluation If a certain selection of stations is needed you can define your own groups a dataset This dataset is called RVS GROUPS hereafter and should have following attributes PHYSICAL SEQUENTIAL 80 BYTES RECORD LENGTH FIXED BLOCKED RVS GROUPS must have the following layout title line column 1 2 group title short form column 6 18 group title long form column 19 80 comment station line column 1 must be blank column 2 4 Station identification column 6 27 station address column 28 80 comment kt comment line column 1 column 2 80 comment Example of RVS GROUPS Coke ke ke e ke e ke e ke e KKK TOP OF DATA Kk ee ee e he ee ehe che ce ce c ke e ke e e e e e e e e e e ek I ILIVIELEITIELTLIVILII2EIELELIVILELISEELEIVIELEIAI LELIVILTISITEIVILITODI L 101081 1 IBK BANKS B15 DEUTSCHE BANK B16 CITI BANK B17 BANKS OF THE OHIO IM IMPORTERS USA UNITED STATES MIAMI CAN CANADA TORONTO DAN DANMARK KOPENHAGEN RR eee RIK BOTTOM OF DATA dd de de III III II III III e e He H rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix D rvs statistics A group of stations will be selected only by its short title two characters long the long form will be written into the headline of the outputlist The logical end of a group is reached at the next short title beginning at the first column Station a
17. 1 last call of exit reserved address of the accounting information record the layout of this area is described in appendix C of this manual This address is valid only if the first byte of this parameter list indicates next call of exit Rules for coding The exit must be coded reusable rvs loads the module after start and keeps it until the monitor is stopped The exit must restore the contents of registers 2 13 when returning control to the calling rvs program register 15 should be set to zero The address of the accounting information record may change every time when the exit is given control Coding example for accounting user exit An example of accounting exit is found on the rvsMVS installation tape in the rvs source library 2 file member ACEXIT Please refer to this example in case of need of adaption to your environment A 4 Job Submit Exit DFUX003 The exit DFUX003 may be used to check modify or suppress job submission executed by the rvs monitor after receiption of a dataset Exit DFUX003 is executed in following cases e the received dataset contains JCL which is to be submitted by rvs and the remote station where the dataset comes from is authorized for this function for this authorization see description of rvs Stations Table parameter OPTIONS e a dataset has been received and automatic jobstart is defined for this dataset see rvs User s Manual section Creation of Resid
18. ACLNBYTE ACRSTBLK ACBLOCKS ACDTYPE ACSCC ACUCC ACUSREXT ACXDSBTE ACXLNBTE ACXRSTBL ACXBLCKS ACEND DS X RECORD FORMAT OF DATASET SAME FORMAT AS FIELD DCBRECFM OF DCB1 DS X RESERVED DS H BLOCKSIZE OF DATASET DS H RECORD LENGTH OF DATASET DS H NUMBER OF RESTARTS BINARY PERFORMED TO TRANSMIT RECEIVE THIS DATASET 01 NORMAL START OF TRANSMISSION 02 FIRST RESTART AFTER TRANSMISSION ABEND THE FOLLOWING FOUR FIELDS CONTAIN DIFFERENT COUNTS FOR FILES BIGGER THAN 2 1 GB THESE VALUES MAY BE INCORRECT BECAUSE A FULLWORD IS LIMITED TO 2 1 GB FIELDS ACXDSBTE ACXLNBTE ACXRSTBL ACXBLCKS BELOW REPRESENT THE CORRECT VALUES BUT FOR REASONS OF COMPATIBILITY THE FOLLOWING FOUR FIELDS WILL ALSO BE PROVIDED WITH DATA FURTHER ON DS F NUMBER OF READ WRITTEN DATASET BYTES SINCE START LAST RESTART OF TRANSMISSION BINARY DS NUMBER OF BYTES TRANSMITTED COMPRESSED DATA BYTES BYTES OF rvs CONTROL RECORDS SINCE START LAST RESTART OF TRANSMISSION BINARY 5 F BLOCK OR RECORD NUMBER WITHIN DATASET FROM WHICH THE LAST RESTART HAS STARTED BINARY VALUE DS F NUMBER OF TRANSMITTED BLOCKS OR RECORDS OF DATASET INCLUDING THE NUMBER OF TRANS MITTED BLOCKS RECORDS OF ALL PREVIOUS RESTARTS BINARY VALUE DS OF UNITS OF FIELDS ACRSTBLK ACBLOCKS COUNT OF DATASET BLOCKS R COUNT OF DATASET RECORDS DS x RESERVED DS CL3 SYSTEM COMPLET
19. ll 11 PASSWORD gt USERID ll 11 rvsMVS Installation Manual 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS The term USERID means that a TSO userid is to be specified The required password has an initial value of rvs It may be changed after installation of rvs Note This password is also used within the logon procedure of the remote operating function see Appendix G With option 1 you may change this password If option 2 is selected the following screen will be displayed The valid rvs password and a USERID must be supplied for this function kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk DEA20POO e e ke e e e e e ke e e ke e ke e e e RVS ADD OR CHANGE AUTHORIZATIONS OF RVS USERS KKK KK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK kk e He eek ke ke He He eek ke ke He e e e He e He eek kk kk ec kk ke He ke ke e e ke ke e ke ke INSERT TO ADD TO DELETE FOLLOWING AUTHORIZATIONS FOR USER XXXXXXX DELETING SEND REQUESTS DELETING OR UPDATING RESIDENT ENTRIES Specify the character A if authorization for this function is to be defined for a new or existing USERID A new profile will be created only if at least one of the input fields contains the character A If an existing profile is to be deleted both input fields must be changed to blank characters rvsMVS Installation Manual 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS If opt
20. rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features 10 7 AT TLS 10 7 1 General Transport Layer Security TLS is recommended as session level encryption for OFTP2 Since version z OS 1 7 IBM supports Application Transparent Transport Layer Security AT TLS It supports TLS for existing no encryption socket applications without requiring any application changes For detailed information refer IBM z OS V1R12 Communications Server TCP IP Implementation Volume 4 Security and Policy Based Networking Chapter 12 10 7 2 Sample Confiquartion Step by Ste The next steps show as an example what we did to use TLS connection between rvsMVS and rvsEVO We configured the first part in 2 05 and the second part in USS We used IBM documentation mentioned above and the IBM Configuration Assistant GUI for Communication Server running on Windows 2 05 Configure TCPIP stack and prepare PAGENT started task e In stack configuration enable TCPIP stack TLS hlq TCPPARMS PROFILE gt TCPCONFIG TTLS e configure PAGENT as started task refer hlq PROCLIB PAGENT USS Configure PAGENT environment e configure pagent env e g etc pagent env LIBPATH lib usr lib usr lpp ldapclient lib PAGENT CONFIG FILE etc pagent conf PAGENT_LOG_FILE etc pagent log PAGENT_LOG_FILE_CONTROL 300 3 _BPXK_SETIBMOPT_TRANSPORT TCPIP TZ EST5EDT e configure pagent conf e g etc pagent conf Loglevel 256 Tcpimage TCPIP etc tcpip_image conf
21. 26 01 0 27 01 0 28 01 0 29 01 0 30 01 0 31 01 0 D 6 Legend of rvs statistics TOTAL NUMBER OF RECORDS dd mm yy NUMBER OF VALID RECORDS NUMBER OF IGNORED RECORDS number of records of the chosen time interval number of valid records number of implausible or comment records Records will be ignored within the statistics for the following reasons implausible records TIME End time of transmission is less than start time of transmission COMPRESSED Number of linebytes is less than 1 of number of databytes Linebytes transmitted bytes compressed 7 Databytes origin number of bytes uncompressed rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix D rvs statistics OVERHEAD Number of linebytes is greater than 125 of the number of databytes too much overhead Exception Small datasets databytes lt 1000 Every dataset to transmit will be expanded by adding the control records of transmission protocol So it is possible that a very small dataset could become greater than 125 of its origin size SPEED Transmission speed is lower than 25 bits per second EMPTY FILES Number of databytes or number of linebytes is equal zero POOR FILES Number of linebytes is less than 300 Exception Excepted are small datasets databytes 1000 Comment records Only comment
22. AD J Automatic dial Optional parameter Automatic dial will be initiated if e dataset is queued for sending see DIALOPTS acertain time of day is reached see DIALOPT2 e a specified polling interval is reached see e the operator sets up a command to call the station see rvsMVS Operation Manual A sid command BACKUP 1 t sid sid1 sid2 sid 3 characters BCKP J Backup station identification s Optional parameter In addition to a direct connection it could be necessary to have an alternative way to the final station e g for backup With BACKUP one can define one or more relais stations for indirect transmission Note rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset The transmission via backup station is blocked until one of them is switched on by a special operator command see F sid VIA command rvsMVS Operation Manual COMPRESS OFTP NO GZIP new COMPRESS OFTP YES NO RVS GZIP EXT old The GZIP compression can be enabled diabled by 1 License key 2 rvs Stationstabellen Parameter COMPRESS OFTP YES NO RVS GZIP EXT 3 during call of DFO80A00 create send request GZIP YES NO At first the GZIP compression is controlled by the rvsMVS license key A rvs Startparameter that this function switches on off is not necessary Because of compatibility the rvs Startparameter COMPRESS is accepted but ignore
23. UCBNAME FE3 SID VC2 ADDR LOCAL VIRTUAL STATION VC2 ODETID 00013000001VW 2VHOST TYPE VIRT ACME T RECVPW AAA SENDPW AAA SECURITY EXT COMPRESS EXT SID VL1 ADDR REMOTE VIRTUAL STATION ON LNX USER1 ODETID 00013003210GEDASLUM4UB1 VIA LNX SECURITY EXT OMPRESS EXT E e e e e e e e e e e e de e III BOTTOM OF DATA dd 0 0 de e III He e de Fe e de He II Direct Station Entry BSC Station BST is directly connected In addition to the explicitly coded parameters following default values are valid in this entry ACCESMET BTAM ACTMODE NORMAL AUTODIAL NO LBLKSIZE 2000 LINETYPE S OPTIONS NO PWMOD NO SPEED HIGH Direct Station Entry SNA Station SST is directly connected In addition to the explicitly coded parameters following default values are valid ACTMODE NORMAL AUTOACT NO LBLKSIZE 2000 OPTIONS NO PWMOD NO SPEED HIGH No default value for DIALOPTS because AUTOACT is not requested Direct Station Entry X25 Station XST is directly connected In addition to the explicitly coded parameters following default values are valid ACTMODE NORMAL CREDIT 999 DIRECTN B LSIZE 2000 5 PWMOD YES SPCLOGIC NO Direct Station Entry X 25 if you support more X 25 multi channel links Station XIS is directly connected and you support more than one X 25 multi channel links When dialing out rvsMVS looks for a not busy line among the specified X 25 group ISDN See a
24. or DF5503A A 111 111 READY TO TRANSMIT is displayed The status indicated by this message is necessary for any transmission If none of the above messages is displayed something does not work ok In most cases additional error messages will be written to console Depending on the kind of error error message the following things should be checked e definition of the line subchannel within the rvs stations table e generation for this subchannel parameter UNIT BSC2 e EP generation of the control unit e physical path between CPU control unit and modem hardware The line may be stopped again by entering the command P III Test of leased BSC line s Leased BSC lines should be activated within the monitor by entering the command A sid where sid denotes the station identification of the remote station For leased BSC lines there is a one to rvsMVS Installation Manual 7 Running Installation Tests one relationship between station identification and subchannel address for the assosiated line After activation the command DS should be used to obtain the status of the line If activation is ok one of the following messages will be displayed DF3019I A sid LINE 111 IS WAITING FOR WORK or DF3020I A sid 111 REMOTE STATION IS NOT READY If none of the above messages is displayed something does not work ok In most cases additional error messages will be written to console Dependin
25. LA 15 0 set returncode to zero BR 14 return to calling program The exit is executed in different environments 1 Outside the address space of the rvs Monitor for example if a send request is created by executing the program DF080A00 2 In the address space of the rvs Monitor to check authorization during start of a transmission Depending on the results returncode and the environment of the exit e updates of the rvs Control Dataset may be rejected e transmissions of datasets to be sent may be rejected e specfications which have been made to control receiption of a dataset may be suppressed e reception of a file may be rejected Interface description of exit DFUX001 If the exit is entered register 13 points to a 72 byte savearea register 14 contains the return address and register 1 points to a fullword which contains the address of a parameter list with the following fields offset dec characterstring RVSEXT01 eye catcher caller flags bitstring request for update of Control Dataset by operator rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits for example rvs command l sid request for update of Control Dataset by user batchjob or tso user 1 request for update of Control Dataset by rvs Monitor should never be rejected by the exit type of update flags bitstring 1 request for insert a new record 1 request for update of a record l request to delete a record e
26. Required parameter Optional parameter INDEX DD names KEYSTORE the keystore dataset CERT a new dataset for writing the certificate The certificate export can be done using the example job RVS JOBS EXPCERT The result is a dataset in format U It contains the certificate DER coded JOB EXPCERT EXEC PGM DF053K REGION 4M STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR KEYSTORE DD DSN RVS KEYSTORE DISP SHR CERT DD DSN RVS CERTREQ DISP CATLG UNIT SYSDA 1 SPACE CYL 1 1 RLSE DCB RECFM U LRECL 0 BLKSIZE 6144 SYSIN DD COMMAND EXPORTCERT INDEX 1 COMMAND LIST This command lists details for a certificate located in the keystore Required parameter Optional parameter INDEX DD names KEYSTORE the keystore dataset The list of a single certificate can be done using the example job RVS JOBS LISTKEY A JOB LIST EXEC PGM DF053K REGION 4M STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR KEYSTORE DD DSN RVS KEYSTORE DISP SHR SYSIN DD COMMAND LIST INDEX 1 COMMAND LIST ALL This command LIST lists details for all certificates located in the keystore Required parameter Optional parameter DD names KEYSTORE the keystore dataset rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features The list of all certificates can be done using the example job RVS JOBS LISTAKEY A JOB LIST EXEC PGM DF053K REGION 4M STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR KEYSTOR
27. denotes the amount of storage in units of 1K which is to be treated as the maximum size for the bufferpool Default value BFPOOLSZ 2000 BSCUSE YES Specification whether the BSC component is to be used or not If BSCUSE NO is specified all commands related to the BSC component for example commands for activation of BSC lines or BSC stations will be rejected CHAPSDS N N N value between 0 and 9 Change the SDS Task Priority Higher numbers increase the priority CHAPRDS N N N value between 0 and 9 Change the RDS Task Priority Higher numbers increase the priority COMPRESS rvskey NO It specifies how the Compression Feature is used Parameter COMPRESS EXT YES is not longer necessary The External Compression module is active if it is allowed by licence key Y Use COMPRESSzNO to switch off compression although it is allowed by licence key If COMPRESSxzNCO is specified the External Compression will be rejected for all send requests of this installation DDEVTYP TAPE DISK Default devicetype used for receiving This default will always be used if a dataset is received and there are no further specifications for reception of this dataset resident receive entry see User s Manual DISK means that the dataset will be received and kept on disk TAPE means that the dataset is received on disk and will be copied to tape after reception rvs generates and starts a batch job to copy th
28. oe file name of public suffix PU with Pr fix TSO USERID lt keyname gt Example KNAME KEY KNAME KN rvsMVS Installation anual Appendix I Key Data Utility Program DF054K Result P390A KEY PR P390A KEY PU Without Pr fix lt gt Example KNAME KEY Result KEY PR KEY PU KFROM KF Begin of validity TT MM JJJJ YYYY MM DD End of validity TT MM JJJJ YYYY MM DD KPERIOD Period of validity d D t T Tag m M month i J y Y year KP examples 5m 5 month or 1Y 1 year KTUSEIKE Begin of validity is current date YES NO Key size in Bits max 2048 it has to be divisible by 8 KSIZE KS Example KS 768 or KSIZE 1024 KCREATOR Creator of key Text max 50 characters KC KOWNERIKO Owner of key Text max 50 characters 1 4 2 Function KEYS Add key s to the key management DD Statements KEYDATA 000 KEYPUOO0 SYSPRINT KEYPARM Examples Import your own JOB KEYSIMPT EXE STEPLIB DD KEYDATA DD KEYPROOO DD KEYPUOO0 DD SYSPRINT DD KEYPARAM DD UID LOC UID LOC key management dataset VSAM Dataset file name of private key file name of public key program Logfile parameters e f you import a local key pair you have to set the parameters UID and DDNAME twice e f you import a public key of your partner you have to set the parameters PID u
29. sid sid2 Identification s of the own local station Normally only one station identification must be specified sid 3 alohanumeric characters This is the station identification by rvs conventions One additional identification sid2 max 10 alphanumeric characters is necessary if communication with the DAKS system Daimler Benz is done This is the station identification by DAKS conventions Note In order to avoid duplicate rvs station id s the Volkswagen AG has taken the responsibility to administer a central definition table Please refer to the following address for receiving a new station id when you install rvs for the first time Volkswagen AG rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Abt K DOI 33 Brieffach 1398 0 D 38436 Wolfsburg Phone 49 5631 9 27118 Mr Strohmeyer 49 5361 9 76484 Mr Sekulla Fax 49 5361 9 25500 The STATION parameter is mandatory STORAC 0 nn nn value between 0 and 99 Specification of a time interval in minutes after which the virtual storage currently used by the rvs monitor is listed message DF2000P If STORAC 0 is specified this display will be suppressed The value of this parameter may be displayed changed with the rvs command STORAC see Operation Manual TCPLOCAD xx ipaddress Own ip address of the local TCP IP stack This address will be used as source address when rvs acts as an initiator of connections Specification
30. stop rvs trace display start stop active sessions LUO LU6 2 BSC control of message processing ij OL enuen uonejeisu SANSA UI9 SAS SA OU JO eunjonJjs OY Sous N uononponu 71 rvsMVS Installation Manual 1 Introduction A central control and information file control dataset contains among others information on pending running and terminated transmissions This file is the interface between the rvs monitor one side and rvs users batch jobs TSO sessions using the rvs ISPF panels on the other side Support of transmission protocols rvsMVS supports different transmission protocols rvs internal protocols are used as well as common file transfer protocols e rvs internal transmission protocols rvs internal protocols are used if the remote side uses one of the following rvs products Product line procedure functions of transmission protocol rvsMVS BSC SDLC restart vertical code compression rvs DOS BSC restart blank compression rvs VSE SNA SDLC restart vertical code compression rvs RPG BSC no restart lineblocking no compression e rvs file transfer protocols VDA4914 1 rvs supports the file transfer protocol as described in VDA recommendation 4914 1 The use of this protocol is restricted to BSC lines VDA4914 2 The ODETTE File Transfer Protocol is a new protocol of the VDA recommendation 4914 and will be named VDA4914 2 1988 rvsMVS
31. CERTAUTH DSN 01 cert rdzca Import partner certificates racdcert add RO2 TLS EVO TEP ID START2 TRUST WITHLABEL TEPTLSEVO racdcert connect ID START2 LABEL TEPTLSEVO RING ATTLS_keyring2 ID START2 SETROPTS RACLIST DIGTCERT DIGTNMAP REFRESH USAGE CERTAUTH rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features 10 8 Annex User exit DF053R for implementation of randomizing The generation of random numbers is an important and complex task of OFTP2 security We suggest using a hardware random number generator available for mainframes The generation of random numbers is realized using user exit DFO53R The default implementation uses a hardware random number generator For details see the example below and refer to 2 05 ICSF Application Programmers Guide An example of a software random number generator can be found at the end of this chapter You can adopt the random number generation by changing the user exit and compile and link it as module DFO53R The entry point of the user exit is DF053R The first parameter is an integer fullword containing the length of requested random number in byte The second parameter points to a buffer for the random number The buffer is already allocated by the caller with the requested length return 0 in case of success Examples of the user exit can be found in RVS SOURCE Member DFO53RH contains the hardware version Member DF053RS contains the software version DFO53
32. DEQ QNAME RNAME SYSTEMS MF L EQU STIMERM SET MF L 2 26 MICROSECONDS ENQ QNAME ENQ RNAME rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features STIMERM EQU 55 LTORG YREGS c e e e e de de de de de de de de de ode ode ode de oe oe oe e e e oe oe e e ce e e dece eee ce ee e e e A x STIMERM ASYNC EXIT kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxkxk DROP TIMEEXIT DS USING TIMEEXIT R15 L R2 4 R1 LOAD ADR OF ECB POST R2 POST ECB BR R14 RETURN TO CALLER DROP R15 c oe e e e e e e e e e e oe e e de e e de de e e de de e e e de de e de de e e e e ode oe oe oe oe oe oe de ce e oe e e e e eee ee eee ee e e e e A x x xx DYNAMIC STORAGE AREA e e e e e e e e oe e e de e de de de e e de de dee de de de de de de de e de de oe de oe oe ce e oe e ce e oe e e e e eee eee eee e e e e e A x x xx LDS DSECT DS XL CEEDSASZ DSA STORAGE BUFADR DS A CALLER S BUFFER ADR BUFLEN DS H CALLER S BUFFER LEN TOD DS OD TIME OF DAY VALUE TODB1 DS B TODB2 DS B TODB3 DS B TODB4 DS B TODB5 DS B TODB6 DS B TODB7 DS B TODB8 DS B STECB DS SUBTASK ECB STTCB DS A SUBTASK ADR TIMERID DS STIMERM TIMER ID TIMEECB DS STIMERM ECB TIMEECB DS A ADR OF STIMERM ECB PLIST DS XL256 GENERAL PARM LIST WBUF DS CL100 WORKING BUFFER DS OD END LDS ON DOUBLE WORD LDSSZ EQU LDS kkkkkkkk
33. KEYKEYL EQU KEYTYPE KEYCNTL DS CL1 CONTROL BYTE EQU X 80 1 KEY DATA ARE COMPRESSED EQU X OOT Qi UNCOMPRESSED KEYAREA EQU gt DS CL4018 FOR A COMPRESSED KEY RECORD THE FIRST 5 BYTES OF THIS AREA ARE DS H LENGTH OF UNCOMPRESSED KEY RECORD DS H NUMBER OF COMPRESSED SEGMENTS 5 DATA FOLLOWS WORKAREAL EQU KEYTYPE DATAAREAL EQU KEYAREA KEYREND EQU END OF RECORD rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix I Key Data Utility Program DF054K This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual Index Index amp DAY uu ees ates evga RN 151 DF072A00 in rae 147 amp DSN i enata HURTS 151 DF073AJO00 rte ree es 148 5 ER 151 Geen eek awe 239 SIOBDSN 151 DROP SA 143 151 9 079 00 5 Dee 146 SERO TES 151 5 114 151 IBIES DINA ENY EEEE E EEE es 84 TIME EEE E E A 151 DIAL OR AE a ed ies 77 151 DIALOPT32 tette ene Eee boue este iege TT ACCESMET 83 89 97 101 105 107 1
34. OLD ENTRIES FROM CONTROLDATASET SET amp DFLIST SET amp DFAKI SET amp DFALI STATION ID LIST CURRENT INFORMATIONS OPT I GENERAL INFORMATIONS OPT I SET amp DFUSMAN USER S MANUAL OPT I LEAVE THE FOLLOWING VARIABLES BLANK USE THEM ONLY FOR TESTING VARIABLES ARE TAKEN FROM MODULE RVS LOAD DF067A SET amp DFKD rvs CONTROL DATASET SET amp DFLOG SET amp DFSTATN rvs LOG DATASET rvs STATIONS TABLE DEFINITION OF PANEL VARIABLES PLEASE INSERT YOUR OWN VARIABLES ISPEXEC VGET DFACCT1 DFACCT2 DFACCT4 DFUNIT4 IF amp DFACCT1 amp Z THEN SET amp DFACCT1 LOCAL ACCOUNT NUMBER OPT 1 IF amp DFACCT2 amp Z THEN SET amp DFACCT2 REMOTE ACCT NUMBER OPT 1 IF amp DFUNIT4 62 THEN SET amp DFUNIT4 SYMBOLIC UNIT GROUP OPT 4 IF amp DFACCT4 amp Z THEN SET amp DFACCT4 ACCT NR FOR RR ENTRY OPT 4 ISPEXEC VPUT DFLOAD DFLIST DFACCT1 DFACCT2 DFACCT4 DFUNIT1 DFUNIT4 DFAKI DFALI DFUSMAN DFKD DFLOG DFSTATN DFDAYKE ESTABLISH ALLOCATIONS ISPEXEC LIBDEF ISPPLIB DATASET ID amp DFPANEL ISPEXEC LIBDEF ISPMLIB DATASET ID amp DFMSGS ALTLIB ACTIVATE APPLICATION CLIST DATASET amp DFCLIST SELECT rvs ENTRY PANEL
35. Off 7 CACt3 OFTP2_Server2 Server cipher1 AT TLS__Gold cAdv3 OFTP2_Server2 off 7 CACt4 OFTP2_Client2 Client cipher1 AT TLS__Gold cAdv4 OFTP2_Client2 off 7 cAdv1 OFTP2_Server ROL off cAdv2 OFTP2_Client ROL off cAdv3 OFTP2_Server2 02 off cAdv4 OFTP2_Client2 02 off ATTLS_keyring2 rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features v3CipherSuites v3CipherSuites Port PortRange Port PortRange Port cipher1 AT TLS__Gold TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA portR1 6639 6649 portR2 1024 65535 portR3 6619 6620 rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features Security configuration Define the PAGENT started task to RACF PAGENT started task to RACF SETROPTS CLASSACT STARTED SETROPTS RACLIST STARTED SETROPTS GENERIC STARTED RDEFINE STARTED PAGENT SETROPTS RACLIST STARTED REFRESH SETROPTS GENERIC STARTED REFRESH Define a user ID for the PAGENT started task ADDUSER PAGENT DFLTGRP TCPGRP OMVS UID 0 SHARED HOME Associate this user ID with the PAGENT started task RALTER STARTED PAGENT STDATA USER PAGENT GROUP TCPGRP Give authorized users access to start and stop PAGENT SETROPTS CLASSACT OPERCMDS SETROPTS RACLIST OPERCMDS RDEFINE OPERCMDS MVS SERVMGR PAGENT UACC NONE PERMIT MVS SERVMGR PAGENT CLASS OPERCMDS ACCESS CONTROL ID PAGENT START2 SETROPTS RACLIST OPERCMDS REFRESH Restrict acc
36. PU macro within the switched major node definition must_always be greater than the value for the rvs start parameter XBFSIZE XLUNAME xx name This parameter is used only for the X25 component It specifies the name of the logical unit which is used to establish a controlsession between rvs application as specified within the XAPPLID parameter and the NPSI name must be the same name as specified for parameter LUNAME of macro X25MCH during NPSI generation To support more than one X 25 multi channel links you have to define this parameter for each X 25 multi channel CTCP XNUMBER xx number This parameter is used only for the X25 component It specifies the calling number of the local X 25 multichannel link This number is used when outgoing calls are initiated by rvs To support more than one X 25 multi channel links you have to define this parameter for each X 25 multi channel CTCP XNUMCHCK xx YES NO This parameter is used only for the X25 component It indicates whether a received X25 number is to be checked with the number specified within the stations table parameter X25NUM in case of an incoming call from a certain station CNUMCHCK YES or not If XNUMCHCK YES is specified and the x25 number received from a certain station by an incoming call does not match the number which is specified for this station within the rvs stations table activation of the session will be rejected this means the received ODET
37. RLSE DCB RECFM U LRECL 0 BLKSIZE 6144 SYSIN DD COMMAND GENCERTREQ INDEX 1 KEYSIZE 1024 COUNTRY DE ORGNAME TSI COMMONNAME RVS1 OU RVS rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features SP BERLIN L BERLIN COMMAND IMPORTCERT This command imports the reply of a certificate authority the signed certificate Required parameter Optional parameter INDEX DD names KEYSTORE the keystore dataset CERT dataset containing the signed certificate in PKCS 7 format dataset format U DER BER coded The import can be done using the example job RVS JOBS IMPREPLY A JOB IMPREP EXEC PGM DF053K REGION 4M STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR KEYSTORE DD DSN RVS KEYSTORE DISP SHR CERT DD DSN RVS SIGNED CERT DISP SHR SYSIN DD COMMAND IMPORTCERT INDEX 1 COMMAND DELETE This command deletes a private key and its corresponding certificate Required parameter Optional parameter INDEX DD names KEYSTORE the keystore dataset Deleting a keypair can be done using the example job RVS JOBS DELKEY A JOB DELKEY EXEC PGM DF053K REGION 4M STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR KEYSTORE DD DSN RVS KEYSTORE DISP SHR CERT DD DSN RVS SIGNED CERT DISP SHR SYSIN DD COMMAND DELETE INDEX 0 rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features COMMAND EXPORTCERT This command writes a certificate from keystore to a dataset
38. rvs User Exits Remarks 1 If the exit returns control to rvs with a nonzero returncode the send request a record of type AS within the rvs Control Dataset will be placed in HOLD state This means the send request will not be accessed by rvs until the rvs command S sid has been entered for this request 2 Specifications for receiption include such things as automatic jobstart rename function or the use of a special disk volume unit group to store the received dataset If the exit returns control to rvs with returncode 4 or 8 all such specifications done during creation of a resident receive entry in the receiving station or done during creation of the send request by specifying remote options in the sending station will be ignored by RVS Receiving of the dataset will be performed as if e no resident receive entry exists for this dataset and e no remote options have been specified when the dataset was queued for sending in the sending station Instead of these specifications installation dependent default values will be taken If the received dataset contains job control which is to be submitted RJE function rvs will perform this function independent of the exit returncode rvs will suppress this only if the definition of the remote station within the rvs stations table excludes the RJE function see Installation Manual definition of the station table If the exit returns control to rvs with returncode 12 with
39. the final station 5 bytes Reserved 3 bytes Station Identification of the Final Station 5 bytes Reserved 1 byte High Level Response Y High Level Response received from the remote station N High Level Response requested but not received 44 bytes Origin Datasetname New Datasetname Note This field is only filled if the rename function has been used Dataset has been received AR BR CR New Name Dataset has been sent AS BS CS gt Origin Name 132 139 Origin Membername New Membername Note This field is only filled if the rename function has been used Dataset has been received AR BR CR New Name Dataset has been sent AS BS CS Origin Name 140 153 14 bytes Queuing Date and Time Format YYYYDDDHHMMSST YYYY year DDD day HH daytime hours MM daytime minutes SS daytime seconds T 1 10 seconds 154 167 14 bytes Transmission Start Date and Time Format YYYYDDDHHMMSST see Queuing Time 168 181 14 bytes Transmission End Date and Time Format YYYYDDDHHMMSST see Queuing Time 182 1 byte Status H Queued dataset is in hold status C Transmission has been cancelled by operator D 5 has been deleted by operator user 183 1 byte Dimension R Number of transmitted data is counted in records B Number of transmitted data is counted in blocks 184 193 10 bytes Number of Tranmsitted Data blocks records 194 1 byte Reserved 195 204 10 bytes Number of Tran
40. 1 1 RLSE SORT EXEC PGM SORT SORTIN DD DSN RVS ZW1 DISP OLD DELETE SORTOUT DD DSN RVS ZW2 DISP NEW CATLG DELETE UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 1 1 RLSE SYSIN DD SORT FIELDS 1 5 CH A SORTWKO1 DD UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 1 SORTWKO2 DD UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 1 SORTWKO3 DD UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 1 SYSOUT DD SYSOUT STATJOBB EXEC PGM DF551A STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSUT1 DD DSN RVS ZW2 DISP OLD DELETE SYSUT2 DD SYSOUT SXSOUT DD SYSOUT rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix D rvs statistics TSO Clist You will find an example of this CLIST on rvsMVS installation tape file RVS TABLES STATCL Clist layout RVS SATZA ay ae ae ab eS AX SS LAS Le IN Ye See UE SELECT STATION STATION GROUP ALL OR BLANK gt ALL STATIONS c all SELECT DAY MONTH YEAR DAY 00 MONTHLY STATISTICS DAY gt 00 MONTH gt 01 YEAR gt 87 CALCULATION OF STATION ACTIVITY STARTS Output List Station Activity IU Ry Ry we ae ae ey a an es OCTOBER 86 gt ALL STATIONS CREATED 27 11 86 SID VIA ADDRESS DIRECTION TRANSM BRKS TIME H M S LINEBYTES DATABYTES COMPRESSN SPEED BPS STA STATION A RECEIVED 18 0 0 01 16 22 609 71 120 31 2 364 SENT 99 2 4 29 48 4 524 933 12 407 166 36 2 236 SID identification of the remote station VIA identification of t
41. 15 yy register 0 22 feedback code For the meaning of these codes see the IBM manual SC27 0449 ACF VTAM Programming Name of the VTAM macro issued For SEND and RECEIVE macros the contents of the buffer pointed to is printed in dump format SID R11 SESSION 52 DSN DDF RV1R11 TEST11 VOL ELW104 DATE 87 139 TIME 11 21 3852 RPLADDR 00016928 RPLDATA 00202370 500406D4 00016918 00000000 0001000 00800000 0003 9 0 0380 000 00016260 03000084 29800000 00000000 000000 8 0000010C 10309450 00000000 RC 00 00 00 80800001 40000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 000349DC 80008010 00000000 00000000 00000000 RECEIVE C1C4C4C6 4BD9E5F1 D9F1F14B E3C5E2E3 1 14040 40404040 40404040 40404040 ADDF RVIRII TEST11 40404040 40404040 40404040 40F8F7F1 F3F9F1F1 FIF9FOFO F8D9ESF1 40404040 871391119008RV1 40D9F1F1 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 R11 4040 0 0 FOFOFOFO F0404040 40404040 4040D6F3 F2F1F8F7 F4FOFOFO FOFOF040 0000000 0321874000000 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 00000000 SID R11 SESSION 52 DSN DDF RV1R11 TEST11 VOL ELW104 DATE 87 139 TIME 11 21 3963 RPLADDR 00016928 RPLDATA 00202270 500405CE 000
42. 16 00 17 00 1 DOPTS MI 08 00 09 00 1 16 00 17 00 1 23 00 24 00 1 is equivalent to DIALOPTS 11 15 12 00 5 DOPTS TU 08 00 09 00 1 16 00 17 00 1 DOPTS WE 08 00 09 00 1 16 00 17 00 1 23 00 24 00 1 is equivalent to DOPTS 11 15 12 00 5 2 08 00 09 00 1 16 00 17 00 1 D32 08 00 09 00 1 16 00 17 00 1 23 00 24 00 1 EERPAD YES This parameter is only used if EERPAD YES CNTL In this case it is possible to switch the EERP autodial off for specific stations by setting EERPAD NO STATIONS In case of EERP autodial switched on EERPAD YES in CNTL and EERPAD YES or omitted in STATIONS rvs will actively open a session to transmit an EERP observing DIALOPTS otherwise the EERP may be delayed until the next file transmission occurs EERPIN NEVER NORMAL If this option is set to NEVER a transmission gets status END after sending a file successfully No end to end response EERP is expected If this option is set to NORMAL an EERP is expected for a sent file rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset EERPOUT NEVER NORMAL If this option is set to NEVER no end to end response EERP will be send after receiving a file successfully If this option is set to NORMAL an EERP will be sent after receiving a file successfully ISTATUS A CTIVE I NACTIVE Initial status of the station Optional parameter Inactive stations are not able to establ
43. 2 Features NOTFND LR R4 R1 TOD 0 1 R2 TODB7 LA R2 1 R2 MVC PLIST GQSCAN GQSCAN STCK TOD MVC 0 1 R2 TODB7 LA R2 1 R2 FREEMAIN RU LV 50000 A R4 STCK TOD 0 1 R2 TODB7 LA R2 1 R2 LOAD EP AQ Z ERRET NOTFND DS STCK TOD 0 1 R2 TODB7 LA R2 1 R2 MVC PLIST ENQ SENO MF E PLIST MVC PLIST DEQ DEQ DEQ MF E PLIST STCK TOD MVC 0 1 R2 TODB7 LA R2 1 R2 MVC LA R4 TIMERID LA R1 TIMEECB ST R1 TIMEECB STIMERM SET WAIT NO EXIT TIMEEXIT PARM TIMEECB TUINTVL WAITTIME ID R4 MF E PLIST LTR R15 R15 BNZ 2 LA R4 TIMEECB WAIT ECB R4 STCK TOD MVC 0 1 R2 TODB7 LA R2 1 R2 OBTAIN TOD VALUE SAVE BYTE 7 INCR ADR INIT PARM LIST OBTAIN TOD VALUE SAVE BYTE 7 INCR ADR OBTAIN TOD VALUE SAVE BYTE 7 INCR ADR OBTAIN TOD VALUE SAVE BYTE 7 INCR ADR INIT PARM LIST INIT PARM LIST OBTAIN TOD VALUE SAVE BYTE 7 INCR ADR PLIST STIMERM STIMERM INIT PARM LIST LOAD ADR OF TIME ID FIELD CLEAR ECB SAVE ADR ECB PARM SUCCESSFUL NO EXIT LOAD ADR OF ECB WAIT FOR TIMER TO COMPLETE OBTAIN TOD VALUE SAVE BYTE 7 INCR ADR COPY THE DATA TO THE USER BUFFER LA R1 WBUF SR R2 R1 L R3 BUFLEN CR R2 R3 BL COPYDATA LOAD ADR OF BUFFER CALC LEN OF DATA LOAD REMAINING BUF LEN HOW MUCH ROOM LEFT ITS ENOUGH ROOM
44. 6000 variable blocked VB RVS LOGSAVE 1000 6000 fixed blocked FB Another control parameter may be specified for program DF072A00 LOGSAVE ASY If this parameter is specified no copy of the logdataset will be created Only the currently used data area of the logdataset will be marked in this file Specification of this parameter may be useful to reduce the time used for the backup copy of the controldataset No other access to the controldataset may be done within this time RESERVE The default behavior of DF072A00 is exclusive control RESERVE It can be changed to NORESERVE by parameter PARM Z NORESERVE in the exec statement of PDF0014A A backup copy of the logdataset for example used for statistics may be obtained after execution of program DF072A00 This copy does not require exclusive control RESERVE this means updates of the controldataset may be done even if the backup copy of the logdataset is created For this copy the following jobstep may be used LOGSAVE EXEC PGM DF084A00 SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT RVSLOG DD DSN RVS LOG DISP SHR LOGSAVE DD DSN RVS LOGSAVE TEMP DISP NEW Note1 If a copy of the logdataset is not used execution of this jobstep may be skipped The copy of the logfile is not used for the recovery of the controldataset Note2 If a copy of the logdataset shall be used for statistics make sure that the execution of this job is not delayed too much Depending on the siz
45. DATRATE HIGH DIAL NO DUPLEX FULL INTPRI 2 LNCTL BSC NEWSYNC NO PAD NO SPEED 9600 CLOCKNG EXT TYPE EP LINE ADDRESS yyy xx TERM 2780 Remark e yyy denotes the address of the control unit xx denotes the last two characters of the MVS address as specified in the IODEVICE macro 3 1 2 BSC lines with autodial function Interface V 25 Two things must be done to define a BSC line with autodial function which is to be used by rvs e definition of the line within the IODEVICE generation MVS and e generation of the line within the control unit EP generation IODEVICE generation of BSC lines with autodial function The following parameters should be used for a BSC line with autodial function IODEVICE ADDRESS xxx FEATURE AUTOCALL ADAPTER BSCA TCU 2703 UNIT BSC2 xxx denotes the 3 byte subchannel address of the line rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit EP generation for BSC lines with autodial function The following figure shows the physical connections between control unit modem and automatic calling unit ACU V 24 data d network modem control unit V 25 dial ACU Remarks The physical connection between control unit and modem should be a connection as described in recommendation CCITT for V 24 or X 21bis interface For IBM 3705 a lineset 1D is used for this interface for IBM 37
46. FLUSH 600 e configure tcpip_image conf etc tcpip_image conf rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features TTLSConfig etc ttls conf FLUSH PURGE e configure tls conf use IBM Configuration Assistant GUI e g etc tls conf AT TLS Policy Agent Configuration file for Image OFTP2 Stack TCPIP Created by the IBM Configuration Assistant for z OS Communications Server Version 1 Release 11 Backing Store C Program Files IBM zCSConfigAssist V1R11 fi les rvsMvs FTP History End of Configuration Assistant information TTLSRule t LocalAddr RemoteAddr Jobname Userid Direction Priority TTLSGroupActionRef TTLSEnvi ronmentActionRef TTLSConnectionActionRef LocalAddr RemoteAddr Jobname Userid Direction Priority TTLSGroupActionRef TTLSEnvi ronmentActionRef TTLSConnectionActionRef LocalAddr RemoteAddr Local PortRangeRef RemotePortRangeRef Jobname Userid Direction Priority TTLSGroupActionRef TTLSEnvi ronmentActionRef TTLSConnectionActionRef i TTLSRule LocalAddr RemoteAddr RemotePortRangeRef Jobname Userid Direction Priority TTLSGroupActionRef TTLSEnvi ronmentActionRef TTLSConnectionActionRef TTLSGroupAction 2 1 ALL ALL RVSITL1 START2 Inbound 255 gActl eActi CACt1 OFTP2 Server OFTP2 2 ALL ALL RVSITL1 START2 Outbound 254 1 eAct2 CACt2 OFTP2_Clie
47. FTP Station FPC PC station is directly connected In addition to the explicitely coded parameters the following default values are valid FTPPORT 21 FTPSESS 1 FTPRESP NO FTPERESP NO FTPHFILE NO FTPREFN NO ISTATUS ACTIVE AUTODIAL YES DIALOPTS 00 00 24 00 60 Indirect Station Entry Station IST is indirectly connected Relais station is BST Files to IST will be transmitted via BST The chosen relais station must also be specified see entry 1 BST Line Entry Entry for line OE2 In addition to the explicitly coded parameters following default values are valid ACCESSMET BTAM ACTMODE NORMAL ADDEVICE NO LBLKSIZE 2000 LINETYPE S OPTIONS NO PWMOD NO SPEED HIGH UCBNAME 0E2 Line Entry Entry for line 001 The BTAM subchannel address will be In addition to the explicitly coded parameters following default values are valid ACCESSMET BTAM ACTMODE NORMAL ADDEVICE NO LBLKSIZE 2000 LINETYPE S OPTIONS NO PWMOD NO SPEED HIGH Virtual Station Entry local Virtual Station local Station VC2 is local virtual station More info see chapter 9 5 Virtual Station Entry remote rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Virtual Station remote Station VL1 is indirectly connected Relais station is LNX Files to VL1 will be transmitted via LNX The chosen relais station must also be specified This station enty is equal to VIA entry More ifo see chapter 9 5 2 Ex
48. Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 8 RMOP PF Keys The member PFKEYS of the rvs Tables Dataset may be used to specify default settings of RMOP PF keys Format PFxxbv command xx 02 11 13 24 PF key number b blank v character or S indirect command S direct command command rvs command Example 02 SDS PF14 Dv PF23 x rx2 all rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 9 rvs Procedures and JOBS This chapter contains a description of all procedures or jobs which are necessary or helpful for operation use and maintanance of rvs 6 9 1 rvs Start Procedure The following example of a rvs Start Procedure is contained in member MONITOR of the rvs Tables Dataset on the installation tape PDF0001A PROC PAPER DUMP EXEC PGM DF130B00 MONITOR STEPLIB RVSDUMP MSGID SYSWTO CNTLMSG CNTL START INTRDR STATIONS PROGPROF SESSIONS JOBCARD JOBCARDF STAPEJC RTAPEJC SYSOUTJC FTPRVSJC KEY PFKEYS KEYDATA TRNTABLE X PTABLES USERDATA USERLOG LOGDATA LOGLOG EXTCONF DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSOUT
49. KENN 42 STAT 00 IND1 00 9 57 376 BLKS 00482 BYTES 0040158 OAF PGMADDR 002568 002512 OPT F600F080 0000 FEAT 00 RETRY 03 TOTRET 01 0 005 BITS 60 DECB P 7F 03 5 00 L 0800 R O07AC 02 FLAG 00 RESP 0000 TPCD 91 ERRST 00 CSWST 0C00 BUFFADDR 115FBE CCW 01112168 60080002 WRITE 1070 262 CCW 02115FBE 20910800 READ 1002D9C4E5E54BD9 FIFIE2E7E74BC1F3 1 4 6 640404040 404040FO0FO0F4F8F2 RDVV R11SXX A3146W 00482 FOFOFOF3F8F5F6F0 FOFOF8FOFOFOF8FO FO40D9FIFIE2ZE7E7 4040404040404040 00038560008000800 R11SXX 4040404040404040 4040404040404040 40404003 jenuejy uonejeisu SAIWSA 3S8 2 JO 10 eroeds 8 rvsMVS Installation Manual 8 Special Functions Procedures 8 2 4 Format of VTAM Trace SNA sessions For each executed VTAM macro a trace entry consisting of several rows is written The individual entries are separated by a dashed line An example is printed on the next page Explanation of trace fields 1st row SID SESSION DSN VOL DATE TIME 2nd 5th row RPLADDR RPLDATA RC2ocyy zz eth row Name of remote station Denomination of the session Name of transmitted dataset Volume number of transmitted dataset Date in the form yy ddd Time of day Address of used RPL Used RPL in hexadecimal A short explanation of this VTAM control block is given in the prefix of the trace Returncodes xx register
50. KEY PROCESSING NO FLAG FUN R 43 ERROR DURING IMPORT KEYS NO FLAG 44 ERROR DURING PREPARING KEY DATASET UPDATE 48 ERROR DURING PARAMETER PROCESSING 52 ERROR DURING KEY DS OPEN PROCESING 56 ERROR DURING LIST DS OPEN PROCESING 60 USER ID PARAMETER NOT COMPLETE 64 ERROR DURING READ KEYID NO HEX VALUES 68 ERROR DURING READ KEYID NO HEX SYNTAX 72 ERROR DURING READ KEYID LENGTH ERROR 76 ERROR DURING KEY FILE OPEN PROCESSING 80 ERROR DURING UPDATE OF KEY DATA SET 84 ERROR DURING PREPARING UPDATE NOT ALL PARAMETERS rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix I Key Data Utility Program DF054K 88 NOT VALID KEY FOUND 95 KEYIMPRT FILE NOT DEFINED Note DD Statement KEYIMPRT doesn t exist 96 KEYPARAM FILE NOT DEFINED Note DD Statement KEYPARAM doesn t exist 97 KEYDATA FILE NOT DEFINED Note DD Statement KEYDATA doesn t exist 98 KEYPRINT FILE NOT DEFINED Note DD Statement KEYPRINT doesn t exist 99 SYSPRINT FILE NOT DEFINED Note DD Statement SYSPRINT doesn t exist 1 6 DF054K Messages This chapter contains a short description of the messages of program DFO54K It also gives some hints for error reasons and error corrections CSUTLOI PROCESSING OF KEY MANAGEMENT STARTED The message occurs during start Protocol message only CSUTLIP KEY DATA SUCESSFULLY READ
51. Keys either have to be protected by hardware keyword PCICC or created as clear key without this keyword The private key must be generated with the attribute SITE or must be owned by rvsMVS user e The own key pair private key and certificate and the partner certificates have to be connected to the same RACF key ring The key ring must by accessible by rvsMVS e The complete certificate chain all issuing CA and ROOT certificates have to connected to the key ring 10 3 1 Examples The configuration of the RACF resources must be done by the RACF administrator who is aware of the effects on the whole system and might adopt configuration details to specific site requirements i e some resource profiles or generic profiles may already be in use user already have OMVS segment The decision which of the steps if any of the RACF configuration might be delegated to the rvs administrator depends on the rules which are in place on site If desired the rvs admin must be given sufficient authorization Assumed names in this example may be configured to be different TESTUSR user who runs rvsMVS TESTKEYLABEL label of the own keypair private key and signed certificate PARTNERKEYLABEL label of the public key of partner station signed certificate TESTCA label of selfsigned root cert to sign TESTKEYLABEL TESTRING label of keyring to hold all keys and certificates of relevance to rvsMVS Define OMVS segment for user who runs r
52. Management Class SMS Storage Class SMS Data Class Identification s of the local own station Time interval for display of used virtuell storage in minutes configure temporary filename unique or DSN with timestamp Blocksize to be used for received TEXT format files Max reclen to be used for received TEXT format files Interval for status display Sysout class dataset name for trace data Timestamp for dataset name at relais station User completion codes Name of disk unit group Unitcount for multivolume datasets USP User Separation Name of a disk receive volume Accounting information within VW conventions Generated jobnames within VW conventions Prefix for creating the temporary Compression Security files Storage_class parameter during creation of temporary Compression Security files Management class parameter during creation of temporary Compression Security files Date_class parameter during creation of temporary Compression Security files rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset YPALLOC nnnn 20 primary_allocation parameter during creation of temporary Compression Security files YSALLOC nnnn 50 secondary_allocation parameter during creation of temporary Compression Security files YUNITC nn 10 unit_count parameter during creation of temporary Compression Security files YUNITN name unit_count parameter during creation of temporary Compression Security
53. N COMPRESS rvskey NO DDEVTYP TAPE DISK DEMIG ALLOC 5 DQPERM YES DSPLEVEL LOW MEDIUM HIGH DSPTI 60 DSPTIW EERPAD YES EXPDT yyyyddd nnnn NONE FIRSTLVL name GDGTOR 20 nn Name of user accounting exit routine Offset within ACT to obtain account number Accounting information for relais stations Time after which unused buffers are to be released Maximum size for the rvs internal OFTP bufferpool Change SDS Task Priority Change RDS Task Priority Indication for the using of the External Compression Feature Default devicetype used for receiving Specification for demigration processing Permanent display of msg DF49011 DQ command Dispatching level for parallel transmission Dispatcher time interval in seconds removed with version 2 2 05 automatic EERP Expiration Date of received datasets First level pointer for temporary data sets and DSN at relais station Maximum number of ENQ requests for a target GDG after receiving a GDG file rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset GDGTOT 1 nn JFP YES NO JSSNAME NONE OPC JSSSYSIDzname LOGDATEF ddd mmdd LOGTIMEF 4 6 8 10 12 HLDRESET NO t o 15 ONRENERR KEEP SCRATCH MAXRPT 05 nn MAXSPT 05 MSGID xx RELNCTRN NO YES REPLY rvs OC READY text RJOBSUB YES ROUT 08 nn SCC ccc cc1 ccn SE
54. ODATE 94 125 OTIME 08 13 06 0 TDATE 94 125 09 39 15 7 Control Dataset record format output Also this format is self explanatory The output contains unprintable characters and should thus be used only for further processing Layout of this format is identical to the one of Control Dataset record Fixed format output This format is also mainly for further processing but does not contain unprintable characters and not all the information from the Control Dataset record Layout of the fixed format Reference Dataset output Columns Length Description Transmissionstate recordtype Active Receive Entry Active Send Entry Break Entry Receive Break Entry Send Complete Receive Entry Complete Send Entries Resident Receive Entry Response not yet received Dataset is sent completel rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Reference Utility program DF076A response has not yet been received 3 bytes rvs Station Identification of the chosen station 5 bytes Reserved 44 bytes Name of transmitted Dataset Dataset name used between the local and the remote station It may but need not to be the physical dsname 8 bytes Name of transmitted Dataset Member Name of a member of the above mentioned dataset 3 bytes First Station Station Identification of the origin station 5 bytes Reserved 3 bytes Next Station Station Identification of the next connected station May be but need not to be
55. ONLY IF NIGHT SUBPARAMETER IS SPECIFIED DURING ACTIVATION COMMAND FOR THESE SESSIONS LOGMODE rvs3 IS USED SP2 DF099A00 091 00 00000000 00000000 OPERATOR SESSION DF099A00 092 00 S 00000000 00000000 1 SEND SESSION DFO99A00 DF092COO S 00000000 00000000 RVS3 2 SEND SESSION DF099A00 093 00 R 00000000 00000000 1 RECEIVE SESS DFO99A00 DF093COO R 00000000 00000000 RVS3 2 RECEIVE SESS 3 PROFILES FOR COMMUNICATION WITH PU TYPE 2 FOR EXAMPLE NIXDORF 8870 EACH PROFILE DEFINES ONLY ONE SESSION SPO DF099A00 091 00 00000000 00000000 OPERATOR SESSION SPS DF099A00 092 00 SM 00000000 00000000 SEND SESSION SPR DF099A00 093 00 RM 00000000 00000000 RECEIVE SESSION rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 5 JCL Member for Copy Jobs The following five members of the rvs Table Dataset are used if adataset has been queued for sending and the dataset resides on a tape volume In this case rvs starts a job in order to copy the file from tape to disk data transmission is done always from to disk e a dataset has been received and the specified or default device type for this file is tape In this case rvs starts a job in order to copy the received dataset from disk to tape adataset has been received and a specification has been made to store the received data in a sysout queue In this case rvs starts a job in order to copy the received dataset from disk
56. PEE 74 ceca ntn EIS 108 AUTOACI gina tana a 90 114 BIRSTLEME 3 T 54 AUTODIATs 5 degener 74 ZA ke NUM nM 108 automatic jobstart PR Sistine ails RHEIN Dp eam 108 JOU fOr Pailin ied S eee Ren 151 e th metus tu VILE 108 BACKUP og eun DH 74 163 ceca ini n 109 c 74 conos viet RENE 109 51 109 BEPOOUS adie Stes 51 PGE Bot doth Ve Ms 84 BSCGUSE 51 52 56 59 FTP Job see Tables Dataset FTPRVSJC CNTL3 5 nes see Tables Dataset Start Parameter IEA B ad E d DI AEE E 107 65 22 22222 2 see Messages CNTLMSG PPAR E 107 Code Translation sss 153 see I 108 Commands eget ie iUd 54 automatical execution see Tables Dataset START EIPPASS RD ER E 108 COMPRESS CNTLE ate rms 52 ETIPPOLTI ix iUis 54 COMPRESS Station general 74 75 necu 108 COMPRESS OFTP 1 eere 93 MEE 54 108 QONTALQG sce ie iere Ue 84 109 Controldataset ttn M 109 Creatlon Jc ve ne uERE EEUU 39 FTPRVSJC s
57. QUEUEING TIME 97 133 11 19 50 TF IDCMD TFIDSTATUS 000 TFIDDSN FIX0004 TESTX33 TF IDDATE 1997 05 13 TFIDTIME 11 19 50 TFIDUSER TFIDSIDC FD2 TFIDSIDS FA4 TFIDDEST 00013000001VW 4 TFIDORIG 00013000001VW FD2 TRACE DATA BLOCK FTP END TO END RESPONSE FILE RECEIVE REMOTE STATION FA4 DATASET NAME FIX0004 TESTX33 QUEUEING TIME 97 133 11 19 50 EEIDCMD E EEIDSTATUS 000 EEIDDSN FIX0004 TESTX33 EEIDDATE 1997 05 13 EEIDTIME 11 19 50 EEIDUSER EEIDSIDC FA4 EEIDSIDS FD2 EEIDDEST 00013000001 2 EEIDORIG 00013000001 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkk TRACE STOPPED DATE 97 133 TIME 11 22 1320 e e e He e ehe hehe hehehe hehehe hehe IK ke He ke e He KK ke ke ke KK e ke ke KKK KK He He e e ee e He e e He he e He he e he he e ke ke ke e ke ke e ke ke ke ke ke rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features 9 rvs Features 9 1 Feature Architecture In a layer architecture view rvs works between the network layer at the bottom and the application layer on top To connect applications with rvs there are some important interfaces pass to rvs the parameter to send data sets user interface with ISPF or batch program DF080A00 to call rvs by applications call interface by DF1804A e to call applications after receiving a data set call interface using Resident Receive Entrie
58. REMOTE DATASET DISPOSITION OF REMOTE DATASET RESERVED RJE FUNCTION IS REQUESTED REQUEST TO REPLACE EXISTING DATASET MEMBER kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk FIELDS USED BY EXITS RACF AND FOR FUTURE USE KKK KKK KKK ke ke KKK KKK KKK KKK ke ke KKK He He He ke he ek ke ke ke KKK KKK de He de He e He ke ke ke kk ke k k ke k k KDRUSER DS KDJOBDSN DS KDEXTFLD DS KDEXTTYP DS DS KDUSER DS DS KDEND EQU CL8 CL44 CL20 CL1 XL44 CL8 XL27 RACF USERID IF RACF IS INSTALLED OF THE USER JOB WHO CREATED THIS RECORD SEND REQUEST OR RESIDENT RECEIVE ENTRY DATASET NAME OF THE PDS CONTAINING THE JOB TO BE STARTED BY rvs AFTER RECEIVING THE MEMBERNAME MAY BE OBTAINED FROM FIELD KDJOB RESERVED FOR USER KDRECTYP AS FIELD WILL BE TRANSMITTED KDRECTYP AR FIELD IS FILLED FROM SENDER TYPE OF FIELD KDEXTFLD E FIELD KDEXTFLD HAS BEEN FILLED BY DFUX001 S FIELD KDEXTFLD HAS NOT BEEN FILLED BY DFUX001 IT CONTAINS INFORMATION WHICH IS TRANSFERRED FROM SENDER TO RECEIVER RESERVED USER FIELD THIS FIELD IS TRANSMITTED FROM SENDER TO RECEIVER IF THE ODETTE FILE TRANSFER PROTOCOL IS USED FOR TRANSMISSION RESERVED END OF RECORD rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix C Description of accounting information C Description of accounting information This chapter contains the layo
59. Therefore the definitions are the same like for native X 25 network connections It is necessary to create station entry along the X 25 rules The partner s ISDN dial up number must be filled into the X25NUM field and for X 25 via NPSI connections an XAPPLID must be created for every SVC rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit which is connected to the hardware box Chapters 6 1 1 and 6 2 10 show examples for mixed definitions of X 25 and ISDN network rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit 3 4 Definitions for the SNA LU6 2 component of rvs This section describes VTAM definitions that are necessary for an SNA LU6 2 connection between local and remote rvs installations The following requirements must be satisfied in order to establish an LU6 2 connection with a remote rvs installation e The local rvs installation must include the SNA LU6 2 component e The remote installation must include an rvs LU6 2 component e Local and remote computers must be connected via SNA network VTAM definitions for the local rvs installation The local rvs installation must be defined as a separate VTAM application independent LU VBUILD TYPE APPL RVSL APPL AUTH ACQ PARSESS YES VPACING 7 MODETAB LU62MODT APPC YES Remark The name of the APPL statement here RVSL must be the same as specified for the rvs St
60. X25WSIZE 1 7 X25NUM 2 4553611444 X25 X25PSIZE 2 128 X25WSIZE 2 2 SPW SENDPW RPW RECPW ADDR X25 STATION SID LU6 ACME L LSIZE 1200 SYNCLVL CONF IRM CONVTYP MAPPED SESSNUM 5 3 5 LU XLUNAME1 TPN RVSOFTP LU62MODE MODNAME1 MODNAME2 MODNAME3 ODETID OXY34000001GEDAS LU6 SENDPW SEND1 RECVPW RECV1 CREDIT 8 ADDR LU6 2 TEST SID PC1 ADDR PC Nr 1 TYPE WIN 3270 RECVPC pswpcl 7 SID PC2 ADDR PC Nr 2 TYPE WIN 3270 USERID userpc2 8 SID TCP ADDR TCP IP STATION LSIZE 32760 ACME TCP TCPIPADR 10 210 208 130 TCPPORT 3305 TCPSESS 4 ODETID ODCDE123XXX A 03 CREDIT 50 SENDPW AAA RECVPW AAA 9 SID FTP ACME F FTPRESP YES FTPERESP YES FTPSESS 5 FTPUID FIXOAAB FTPPASS XXXXXXX FTPPREF FIXOAAB FTPHNAME 144 162 14 400 ODETID ODCDE123XXX A 04 ADDR FTP MVS STATION 10 SID FPC FTPUID anonymous FTPPASS anonymous FTPPREF 2 XYZ FTPHNAME 136 11 127 23 1 ODETID ODCDE123XXX A 05 ADDR FTP PC STATION rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 11 12 13 14 15 SID IST VIA BST ADDR INDIRECT STATION ODETID ODCDE123XXX A 05 LINE 0E2 ADDR LINE 0E2 SLAVE YES LINE 001 ADDR LINE 001 SLAVE YES
61. YES IZE 30000 EDIT 999 ATUS ACTIVE E T IPADR 10 33 71 94 PORT 3306 ESS 99 PAD YES PV 2 0 FSET OFTP2 URITY YES PRESS NO ERSTORE RACE ERLABEL 1 PARTNERCERT1 ERLABEL 2 PARTNERCERT2 ERIND 2 EYIND 1 PSESS PTH PHA PWNOH Hj D QOnHdMW Wty P P HRQQAAQAQAQAnHNOE 1 CNTL EYRING TESTRING EYLABEL 1 KEYLABEL1 EYLABEL 2 KEYLABEL2 EYINDEX 2 EYSTORE RACE ERSTORE RACE Remarks KEYSTORE RACF RvsMVS supports multiple KEYLABELs and CERTLABELs via index KEYLABELs and KEYINDEX can be defined in CNTL member and CERLABELS and CERINDEX can be defined in STATIONS member for each partner station If the CERINDEX is greather than O the certificate with this index is used for encryption to this partner station If CERINDEX is 0 or not given the certificate which is valid and has the longest validity is used for encryption to this partner station RvsMVS finds certificates for signed files check signing automatically If the KEYINDEX is greather than 0 the key with this index is used to sign files If KEYINDEX is 0 or not given the key which is valid and has the shortest validity is used to sign files RvsMVS
62. after a transmission rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features JOB MEMBER OK Name of the dataset member containing the job which may be submitted after a successful transmission JOB MEMBER ERR Name of the dataset member containing the job which may be submitted after an erroneous transmission The second part of the panel DFZ20P00 shows the history of the transmission The following events are possible EVENT CREATE The event indicates the creating of a send or receive request EVENT DFUX001 The event indicates the calling of the user exits DFUX001 EVENT OK JOB The event indicates the submission of a job after a successful transmission EVENT ERR JOB The event indicates the submission of a job after an erroneous transmission EVENT SC START The event indicates the start of the security component of rvsMVS EVENT SC END The event indicates the end of the security component of rvsMVS EVENT END OF T The event indicates the end of the transmission rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features 10 OFTP 2 Features 10 1 Introduction Since version 5 00 00 rvsMVS comes with the ability to transfer files with the features of ODETTE File Transfer Protocol Level 2 0 according to RFC 5024 It s possible to compress encrypt and sign datasets using RSA keys and X 509 certificates The next chapters show how to configure the
63. argument If this keyword is given QDATE QDAY or QTIME must be omitted in the same set of search arguments Examples 9413811 looks for transmissions queued from 11 00 to 11 59 18 05 1994 QTM 92138112341 looks for transmissions queued at 11 23 41 in 17 05 1992 QDATEzdate1 date2 Queuing date s optional QDATE nrofdays One or two dates to limit the queuing time frame in days of the queried transmission s The explicitely given dates have format yy ddd or simply ddd but even the more natural and self explanatory form of dates dd mm yy is allowed Two given dates must be separated by a dash and be both in either day number or natural format yy year 2 digits day number within the year 3 digits mm month 2 digits dd day within the month 2 digits In explicitely given date definitions the given date1 must not be later than the given date2 The given date2 may be omitted and will then be defaulted equal to the date1 rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Reference Utility program DF076A If in ddd format the given day number is greater than the current machine day number the year is defaulted to the previous one Examples current machine date is 94 138 that is 18 05 94 expression equals to interval 065 06 03 94 06 03 94 QDATE 1 40 365 20 05 93 31 12 93 QDATE 139 108 19 05 93 18 05 94 QDATE 94 110 365 20 05 94 31 12 94 If there is an aster
64. backup copy of rvs Controldataset created by procedure PDF0014A assigned with ddname KDSAVE Current rvs Logdataset not the backup copy assigned with ddname RVSLOG The backup copy of the rvs Logdataset is not used So the resource assigned with ddname LOGSAVE in procedure PDF0014A may be set dummy But however these data are used for example if rvs Statistics shall be created see Appendix D within this manual In case of SMS you can use the example PDF0015B rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 10 JCL Member for failing automatic Jobstart The member JFPJCL of the rvs Tables Dataset may be used as a notification function in case of failing automatic jobstart In such a case rvs submits the content of member JFPJCL instead of the job which has been specified in the resident receive entry This member will be used only if the rvs start parameter JFP YES has been specified In this case member JFPJCL must be allocated with DD name JFPJCL within the rvs start procedure The following JCL is included in member JFPJCL on the distribution tape JOB 8 7 H e KKK KKK HK HK KK KK HK HK KK IKK KH KK IKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK MESSAGE PROTOCOL IN CASE OF FAILING AUTOMATIC JOBSTART 8 H e KKK KKK ke e e KKK KKH KK IKK HK HH KIKI KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK
65. be found at the beginning of this section XAPPLID xx name This parameter is used only for the X25 component This name must be specified in an APPL statement of the local VTAM If the SNA component or the remote operating function or both is used this value must be different from the values specified within the rvs startparameters APPLID and RMOPAPPL This application id is used to establish sessions between rvs and the NPSI To support more than one X 25 multi channel links you have to define this parameter for each X 25 multi channel CTCP XBFSIZE 2000 nnn rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This parameter is used only for the X25 component It specifies the max exchange buffer size to be used by rvs nnn may be a value between 128 and 32000 This parameter corresponds with two other values e Parameter LBLKSIZE within the rvs stations table for stations defined to use the X 25 network stations table parameter ACCESMET X25 If the value of parameter LBLKSIZE is greater than the value of parameter XBFSIZE the value for LBLKSIZE will be reduced to the value of XBFSIZE automatically during start of rvs Thus the value of parameter XBFSIZE is always the maximum size of exchange buffers used for X25 stations For the set of switched virtual circuits to be used by rvs a definition of a switched major node within VTAM is required The value for the MAXDATA parameter of the
66. console by using the parameter DESC 2 during execution of the WTO macro Those messages will be kept on the MVS console as long as they are deleted manually To define some rvs messages as non deletable the following action is necessary A new member within the rvs Tables Dataset must be created membername MSGPERM The following DD Statement must be inserted in the rvs start procedure MSGPERM DD DSN RVS TABLES MSGPERM DISP SHR The member MSGPERM contains the information whether a message shall be non deletable or not The layout of this member is the same as for member MSGID described at the beginning of this section rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 7 Automatically executed rvs commands The member START of the rvs Tables Dataset may be used to specify rvs commands which are to be executed immediately after start of the rvs Monitor So it is possible for example to activate one ore more lines after start of rvs automatically The member START may be empty or may be totally left out of the rvs start procedure If one ore more commands shall be executed automatically after start of rvs the following rules must be noticed e Every command must be specified on a separate line whithin the member e Every command must start on column 1 e Blank lines or comment lines are not allowed The rvs Tables Dataset on the installation tape contains an empty START member rvsMVS
67. dete re dete te dee E E EE kkk ae ee Te ee He TIME 15 19 TO DISPLAY A LOG ENTRY SPECIFY THE FOLLOWING PARAMETERS DATE STD 05 311 DATE 2005 11 07 SID RV1 STATION ID OF REMOTE STATION TYPE R RECEIVE S SEND USERID MAPPED USERID DSN LUSER DSN FULL OR PARTIALLY QUALIFIED FROM DAY 2005 11 07 YYYY MM DD TIME 00 00 00 HH MM SS TO DAY 2005 11 07 YYYY MM DD TIME 23 59 59 HH MM SS STATUS ALL OK ERR ALL PF1 PF13 HELP PRESS END KEY TO TERMINATE SID SID of the remote station TYPE S show entries for send activities rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features R show entries for receive activities USERID Local RACF user id DSN Name of the transmitted dataset wildcards are possible If no quotation marks are used the first level pointer is entered automatically FROM DAY Only entries with a queuing date greater or equal FROM DATE and TIME will TIME be used TO DAY Only entries with a queuing date less or equal TO DAY and TIME will be TIME used STATUS Status of the transmission OK Show only transmissions which were ended successfully ERR Show only transmissions which were ended erroneously ALL Show all transmissions The panel DZ10P00 shows a list of entries matching the selection criteria dede dee DEZIO0POO Row 1 to 10 of 10 RVS LIST FILTERED USER PERMISSION LOG ENTRIES Yee ue KEKE UU ERK EERE EERE EERE EERE EEE EERE ER EERE EERE EE
68. editor can no longer be used to transfer an extended license dataset to mainframe IND FILE or rvs can be used instead Pay attention to record format FB 80 and TEXT mode rvsMVS Installation Manual 2 Installation Requirements The system checks performed on the extended license are more detailed than before The extended license includes a list of KeyIDs KEYIDxxx used one by one by each monitor started and possibly a list of revoked KeyIDs KEYRLxx It is not possible to use an extended license while one of the revoked KeyIDs is still in use Do not modify an extended license dataset while rvsMVS is running If you intend to prepare the renewal of an extended license key while rvsMVS is running you can give the new license a new dataset name and change the DD statement in MONITOR member accordingly rvsMVS will continue to use the old license dataset while running and will use the new license dataset when restarted rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit 3 1 Definition for BSC component of rvs Two things must be done to define a BSC line which is to be used by rvs e definition of the line within the IODEVICE generation MVS and e generation of the line within the control unit EP generation 3 1 1 BSC lines without autodial function IODEVICE generation of BSC lines without autodial
69. environment to generate keypairs to import certificates of communication partners and to customize the station configuration to implement the different features This manual cannot provide a full description of security algorithms or infrastructures Please contact the security department of your company to get more information about security requirements rvsMVS provides several methods for storing and accessing private keys and certificates Private Keys be managed by PKCS 15 Keystore shipped with rvsMVS or by RACF Partner certificates can be managed by VSAM dataset shipped with rvsMVS or by RACF RACF requires ICSF 10 2 Steps to configure required datasets BUILTIN KEY CERTSTORE The following steps are only required if you want to use PKCS 15 keystore and VSAM certificate store shipped with rvsMVS Before you can use the OFTP2 security features in rvsMVS you have to create a keystore for your own private keys and a certificate store for the certificates of your communication partners The keystore and the certificate store are created and accessed with the help of JCL scripts described in the following chapters The scripts are located in the PDS RVS JOBS 10 2 1 Keystore The keystore is used for storing rvsMVS own keypair in standardized PKCS 15 format keypair consists of a private key and a public key The public key is saved as X 509 certificate Selfsigned and CA signed certificates are possible At the m
70. function BSC lines must always be defined as point to point connections The following parameters should be used for a switched BSC line IODEVICE ADDRESS xxx ADAPTER BSCA TCU 2703 UNIT BSC2 The following parameters must be used for a leased BSC line IODEVICE ADDRESS xxx ADAPTER BSCA TCU 2703 UNIT BSC1 xxx denotes the 3 byte subchannel address of the line EP generation for BSC lines without autodial function The following is an example of an EP generation concerning the LINE and GROUP macros for a 2400 baud switched line GROUP CU 2703 DATRATE HIGH DIAL YES DUPLEX HALF LNCTL BSC PAD NO TERM 2020 TYPE EP LINE ADDRESS yyy xx SPEED 2400 CLOCKNG EXT rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit Remarks e The parameters DIAL YES DUPLEX HALF LNCTL BSC and PAD NO are mandatory transmissions are impossible if one of the parameter values is specified different from those as shown above e The parameter CLOCKNG EXT should be specified for every line except for lines with a speed of 1200 baud If SPEED 1200 is specified CLOCKNG INT should be specified also e yyy denotes the address of the control unit xx denotes the last two characters of the MVS address as specified in the IODEVICE macro The following is an example of an EP generation concerning the LINE and GROUP macros for a 9600 baud leased line GROUP CU 2703
71. if the operator starts the session again Note The autoact function will work only if the VTAM control task is active see command RVSVTAM in the Operation manual LBLKSIZE 128 2000 LSIZE Line blocksize for transmission Optional parameter Allowed are values from 128 up to 2000 bytes Note For connections with PU type 2 computers the used line blocksize must be smaller than the value for the MAXDATA parameter of the LU macro VTAM definition for the remote side Default values for LU1 is 261 bytes and for LU2 265 bytes LUNAME t2 luname applid luname applid 1 8 characters LU Mandatory parameter It is possible to put in this field the name of a logical unit as well as an application identification of the remote station RECVPW 1 pw1 pw2 0 pw pw1 pw2 1 8 characters RPW J Receive passwords Optional parameter mandatory for FTP 4914 1 One or two passwords which will be compared with the password sent by the remote station No default value SENDPW rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 1 t pw pw 1 8 characters SPW J Send Password Optional parameter Password will be sent to the remote station No default value SESPROF sprof sprof 3 characters SPROF J Name of SNA session profile Mandatory parameter No default value TYPE WIN 3270 Mandatory parameter for remote stations using rvsWIN rvsWIN is a file
72. ke he ke e hee e hee ke hee ke hee ke ke ke ke e ke he ke e he e k k ek k k k k k k k k k k k e e ke k kkk LMTRVS MODETAB RVS1 MODEENT LOGMODE RVSI1 5 1 BATCH VR LOW PRIORITY TYPE 1 BITS 4 7 VON BYTE 0 FMPROF X 03 BYTE 1 TSPROF X 04 BYTE 2 PRIPROT X 31 BYTE 3 SECPROT X 31 BYTE 4 COMPROT X 2000 BYTES 5 U 6 55 06 7 SRCVPAC X 06 BYTE 8 RUSIZES X 8888 BYTES 9 U 10 5 06 11 PSERVIC X 860000000000000000000000 BYTES 13 24 RVS3 MODEENT LOGMODE RVS3 5 DIALOG VR LOW PRIORITY TYPE 1 BITS 4 7 VON BYTE 0 FMPROF X 03 BYTE 1 TSPROF X 04 BYTE 2 PRIPROT X 31 BYTE 3 SECPROT X 31 BYTE 4 COMPROT X 2000 BYTES 5 U 6 55 06 7 SRCVPAC X 06 BYTE 8 RUSIZES X 8888 BYTES 9 U 10 5 06 11 PSERVIC X 860000000000000000000000 BYTES 13 24 RVS5 MODEENT LOGMODE RVS5 COS BATCH3 DIALOG VR LOW PRIORITY FMPROF X 03 BYTE 1 TSPROF X 03 BYTE 2 PRIPROT X 31 BYTE 3 SECPROT X 31 BYTE 4 COMPROT X 3080 BYTES 5 U 6 55 00 7 SRCVPAC X 01 BYTE 8 RUSIZES X 8888 BYTES 9 U 10 5 02 11 PSERVIC X 000000000000000000000000 BYTES 13 24 MODEEND END VTAM definitions for the remote rvs installation The remote rvs installation must be defined within VTAM as a cross domain
73. max supported blocksize for IEBCOPY is 32720 ODETID 1 hz Odette id Odette id max 25 chars OID J Odette identification of remote station Mandatory parameter The Odette id must be put into quotes if it contains blanks No default value ODETTE identifications will be defined and issued by the national automotive associations Up to now it is not completely clear which organizations will do this work in the different countries For the Federal Republic of Germany the following address should be consulted Verband der Automobilindustrie e V VDA WestendstraBe 61 Postfach 170563 Kennwort VDA AVKD 4914 60079 Frankfurt Tel 069 97507 283 Fax 069 97507 300 Mail habild vda de Registration and distribution of ODETTE ID is not free of charge OWNOID Odette id Odette id max 25 chars Odette identification of own station The Odette id must be put into quotes if it contains blanks No default value This parameter may be used if a special own ODETTE identification other than the own specified in the start parameter ODID is requested by the partner This parameter may only be specified in main station entries not for sub entries RECVPW 1 pw1 pw2 0 pw pw1 pw2 1 8 characters RPW J Receive passwords Mandatory parameter One or two passwords which will be compared with the password sent by the remote station No default value SENDPW rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Descript
74. minutes blank 2 minutes Default value Session delay valid only for send sessions This value specifies a time interval which the session uses as a delay time before sending of each line buffer This value may be specified in order to reduce the speed of transmissions line usage for batch transmissions One of the following values may be specified no delay 1 0 01 seconds 2 0 02 seconds C 3 0 04 seconds C4 0 08 seconds 0 16 seconds 0 32 seconds CF 163 84 seconds blank no delay Default value Remark If a general send delay time is specified see command SDELAY in the Operation Manual the general value is added to the value specified in this session profile Pacing value valid only for send sessions After sending of every n th line buffer a definite response is requested from the receiving station normally sending of line buffers containing data records is performed without any definite response but only with exceptional response The following values may be specified blank no use of definit responses for transmitted line buffers containing data records Default same as blank C 1 C F request for definit response after transmission of every 1 15 line buffer Remarks This kind of flow control is done on application level Normally it is better to use flow control functions pacing provided by the access method VTAM see definition of LOGMODE Tabl
75. needed to run DF078B rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset RVS JOBS DF078B JCL for allocating necessary datasets and starting the REXX script RVS EXEC DF078B The main REXX script which formats the output RVS EXEC SORT78B Configuration dataset for sort routine ICEMAN RVS EXEC KDPARSER REXX script for parsing the raw data of rvsMVS control dataset For executing the program there are 3 datasets necessary RVS DF078B RESULT This dataset will contain the formatted output of DF078B RVS DF078B ICEMAN This dataset will be used as output file for the sort routine ICEMAN RVS DF078B DF076A This dataset will be used as the output file for DF076A and contains the raw data of the control dataset The names of the datasets can be changed according your environment The JCL contains several Steps DELTMP 1 This step deletes the temporary datasets which are needed to run the script and the result dataset ALCTMP This step allocates the output dataset for DF0764A for the raw data from control dataset The step is necessary because the file will be used by two DD Statements Allocations SYSPRINT the output datset for DF076A REXX This step starts the REXX script ion a TSO Environment Allocations e SYSTSPRT REXX Messages Sysout LOAD rvsMVS Loadlib e KDPARSER the REXX Script for parsing the control dataset e KD rvsMVS control dataset e configuration dataset for sort r
76. nn MAXSPT 05 nn YSTORCL name YMAGMCL name YDATACL name YUNITC 10 YUNITN name KEYINDEX 0 nnnn KEYRING name This parameter defines the first level pointer first qualifier for the temporary dataset name generated during compression decompression and encryption decryption Parameter defines the default security method ComSecure and OFTP2 security are available Only one security method can be used for one station The value COMSEC sets the default to ComSecure The value OFTP2 sets the default to OFTP2 security The security method can be overwritten by the station configuration Maximum number of parallel OFTP2 decryption decompression tasks The number should not exceed a maximum of 10 Maximum number of parallel OFTP2 encryption compression tasks The number should not exceed a maximum of 10 This parameter defines the storage class for the temporary dataset name generated during compression decompression and encryption decryption This parameter defines the management class for the Temporary dataset name generated during compression decompression and encryption decryption This parameter defines the data class for the temporary dataset name generated during compression decompression and encryption decryption This parameter defines the unit count for the temporary dataset name generated during compression decompression and encryption decryption This parameter defines the unit name for the
77. of dataset names within Tables file eese 39 5 5 Creation of rvs Control 39 5 6 Creation of rvs Log 11 40 5 7 Modification of the rvs Tables file essere 40 5 8 Installation of the rvs ISPF 41 rvsMVS Installation Manual Contents 5 9 Creation of rvs Key Data 45 5 10 Installation of the Security Library Data dataset 4 45 5 11 Creation of USP datasets nace uci 45 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 12 47 6 1 Ivs Start cecidere erede 47 6 1 1 Example for definitions to support more X 25 multi channel links 70 6 2 VS Stations Tables CL 73 6 2 0 Subset 0 general parameters valid for all stations 75 6 2 1 Subset 1 valid for BSC 86 6 2 2 Subset 2 valid for SNA 08 92 6 2 3 Subset 3 valid for station entries using ODETTE FTP 96 6 2 4 Subset 4 valid for X 25 XOT Direct
78. of member JFPJCL of the rvs tables dataset instead of the job which has been specified in the resident receive entry for more details see the description of member JFPJCL of the tables dataset in this chapter Additionally the member JFPJCL of the tables dataset must be allocated with DD name JFPJCL within the rvs start procedure JSSNAME NONE OPC Write events for this kind of job Scheduling Systems If NONE is specified no events are written Only OPC is realized so far JSSSYSID name max 4 Chars Name of Job Scheduling Subsystem e g OPCE the event is routed to If this parameter is specified within resident receive entry this field will be taken see User Manual LOGDATEF ddd mmdd This parameter is used to define the format of the date in logfile ddd day of year e g 038 rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset mmdd month day e g 0207 LOGTIMEF 4 6 8 10 12 This parameter is used to define the format of the time in logfile 4 HHMM e g 1022 6 HHMMSS e g 102225 8 HHMMSS and part of seconds 2 digits 10 HHMMSS and part of seconds 4 digits 12 HHMMSS and part of seconds 6 digits LUG62APPL applid only if LU6 2 component rvs is used Application ID of the local own station 1 8 alphanumeric characters This name must be specified in an APPL statement of the local VTAM see chapter 3 4 This name must be specified also in the rvs stations
79. of rvs Messages 6 6 1 Control of Messages for Console and remote Operating Starting with Release 1 4 Level 01 four new functions have been implemented to allow more control for the display of rvs messages on console and for the remote operating session These functions are 1 Suppression of messages on console 2 Display of messages on console 3 Suppression of messages for remote operating 4 Display of messages for remote operating Both display functions have highest priority in view of all other control algorithms for message processing In particular the display of special P messages which are normally only written to sysout protocols see 6 6 2 is now possible Another example for the display function is the general suppression of some messages which however will be displayed only for a special remote station The messages to be suppressed displayed must be defined within a member of the rvs tables dataset This member is called CNTLMSG member The above functions may be used only if this member is allocated to the rvs monitor with DD name CNTLMSG If this allocation does not exist rvs can not activate the above functions The control of additional sysout protocols see 6 2 2 is not affected by these functions this means that these functions do only control display suppression of messages on console and for the remote operating session The content of the CNTLMSG member may be changed at any time It may be activated i
80. option 1 4 for browsing an user s manual may be supplied for each rvs user For this you have to create the dataset according to the job for creating additional manuals The rvs panels may be used by every TSO user the panels are explained in detail in the User Manual However there are two restricted functions deletion of existing send requests and deletion of resident receive entries These functions are executed only if the TSO user who requires the deletion has created the record s to be processed Significant for this comparison is the TSO userid jobname if a record has been created by a batch job In order to avoid too much restrictions it is possible to suppress this restriction for certain TSO users significance TSO userid This can be done in the following way Execute the RVS command and select option A in the entry menue DFOOOPOO After entering of option A the following screen appears Option A is not displayed in the panel kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk DEAOOPOO kkk kk x e e ck ke ce ke e ke ke e e ke e e e e e ke e ke ke x RVS ADD OR CHANGE AUTHORIZATIONS RVS USERS B KKK e ke eek ke ke e ke ee ke ke ke ehe ee kk ke He de e e kk ke ehe eek ke ke hehe ee kk e He e e ke kk ke e He He He He kk ke ke ek ke ke He ke ke He ke ke ke ke ke ke ke COMMAND gt OPTION gt 1 CHANGE PASSWORD 2 UPDATE DELETE OR ADD USER PROFILE 3 DISPLAY USER PROFILES PASSWORD
81. prf is the name of another program profile of the profile table see Operations Manual Module name of the line control program The specified module name is only used during activation of a BSC line command A lll A sid or A sid lll see Operations Manual DF056B00 must be specified for leased lines and and for stations connected via a leased line Additional this value must be specified for e switched lines if at least one of the remote stations using this line has installed rvs DOS Release 2 e remote stations which have installed rvs DOS Release 2 DF055A00 must be specified in all other cases Remark Module DFO55A00 includes support for autodial and password exchange functions module DFO56B00 does not include this support Thus the following restriction should be noticed rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix H rvsMVS Tables A switched line defined as an autodial device see description of the rvs Stations Table in this manual cannot be used for remote stations which have installed rvs DOS Release 2 This problem can be solved if the remote station installes rvs DOS Release 3 Module name of the send routine Module name for communication with rvsMVS or rvsDOS DF034K00 Module name for communication with rvsRPG DF034L00 Module name for all other communications DF034M00 Module name of the receive routine Module name for communication with rvsMVS or rvsDOS DF035K00 Module name for comm
82. resource VBUILD TYPE CDRSC RVSB CDRSC CDRM Mnn Mnn denotes the name of a cross domain resource manager which must also be defined if not already existing rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit Example for a definition of a cross domain resource manager VBUILD TYPE CDRM Mxx CDRM SUBAREA xx CDRDYN YES CDRSC OPT Mnn CDRM SUBAREA nn CDRDYN YES CDRSC OPT Definition of ACF VTAM routes to the remote host example Fxxnn PATH DESTSA nn ERO yy 1 VRO 0 Remarks e nn denotes the sub area of the remote host remote rvs installation e xx denotes the sub area of the local host e yy denotes the sub area of the next node host if the connection between local and remote host is not a direct connection e The name of the cross domain resource for the remote rvs here rvsB must be specified within the rvs Stations Table entry for the remote rvs installation see chapter 6 2 parameter LUNAME 3 3 Definitions for X25 component of rvs 3 3 1 Definitions for using the X 25 network via XOT This section describes the principles of X 25 connections via XOT XOT is a protocol for transmitting X 25 packets over a TCP IP network It was recommended by CISCO as RFC1613 An XOT capable hardware is able to extract the X 25 packets from XOT and send it over an X 25 network The following requirements must be satisfied in order to establish an X 25 connec
83. selectable but must not start with a A program profile is assigned to each entry station or line of the stations table which is defined to use BTAM BSC line s This assignment is done during start of the rvs monitor A program profile which is assigned to a line entry of the stations table is used only during activation of the line command A Ill see Operation Manual The only information of the program profile which is used in this case is e the name of the line control program column 5 12 and e the definition how the identification phase shall be done after a line connection is established column 72 All other information will be taken from the program profile which is assigned to the stations entry for the remote station at the time when this other information is needed rvs already knows the station id of the remote station because the identification phase is already complete Each line of the program profile table defines one program profile Lines with a in column 1 are treated as comment The following fields are included within a program profile Name of the program profile alphanumeric free selectable This name is used only for reference to the rvs Stations Table see parameter PROGPROF The names of program profiles must be unique within this table For test purposes the program profile for station sid may be changed within the rvs monitor by entering the command F sid PP prf where
84. sender final receiver name and format of the dataset etc rvsMVS is looking for information files periodically evaluates them registers the previous receiving of a dataset and starts the desired processing rename of dataset job start routing etc The following pictures shows transmission using the FTP component of rvsMVS partner rvsMVS station stations FTP partner transmitted Data File Queuing files DF080A00 RENY nN IFTP EXEC FTP to be checked Information File 25 by the i n FTP component if required to send the of rvsMVS queued Data File to send the built information file rvs network X FTP Job FTP Output transmitted UN FTP Server of the partner station TCP IP V3 R1 or higher 5 MVS UNIX Win95 WinNT Filetransfer with the FTP component of rvsMVS send direction rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit partner stations Resident Receive Ent rvs network routing files to other station rvsMVS station tvsMVS looks for files with special DS Names of Ga Infofile puts e some information 2 about the file transfer into the rvsMVS Control FTP partner rvsLight Shellscript origin X YZ destination ABC makeinfo exe o origin d destination put datafile put infofile makeinfo exe part of rvsLight to build the Infomation File Da
85. session s If a SNA connection is established send session s receive session s all transmissions of datasets which are queued for sending will be performed automatically by the rvs monitor indicated by several messages If a leased BSC line is used for transmission all transmissions of datasets which are queued for sending will be performed automatically by the rvs monitor after activation of the line within rvs and depending on the situation within the remote installation If a switched BSC line is used for transmission after activation of the line within rvs the line connection to the remote installation must be established dialing and for telephone lines the modems on both sides must be switched from voice to data Both dialing and modem switching may be done manually or automatically depending on the hardware capabilities and the definitions within rvs autodial function If the line connection is established and the identification between local and remote station is complete the datasets queued for sending will be transmitted Remarks If transmissions on BSC lines are not executed a rvs trace and in special cases a GTF trace CCW trace should be activated for the used line in order to obtain more information about the failing transmission These information together with the rvs messages of this situation should be discussed with the software producer The following station identification is used for VW AG R11
86. sessions table independent wether the sessions are active or not By stating the denomination of the session you can select single sessions T sid mn resp O sid mn where m denotes the type of the session O operator session 5 send session R receive session and n denotes the relative session number 0 only one session of the specified session type is defined 1 2 first second session of the same session type The rvs trace is automatically stopped with end of BTAM line control resp VTAM session control command P sid or P III For X25 connections different traces may be started for e acertain remote station command T sid the X25 Master Logical Unit command T XMLU This session is established during initialization of the X25 control task CTCP and is used to establish switched virtual circuits transfer of callpackets e a certain switched virtual circuit SVC independent of the remote station command VCLUnnn All traces for the X25 component are stopped automatically during termination stop of the X25 control task For TCP IP connections two different types of traces may be selected 1 Trace of the server task command T TCPR This trace records the following events Accepting incoming connection requests Receiving of the Odette protocol unit SSID Sending of the Odette protocol units SSRM and SSID This trace may be used in case of problems with incoming conn
87. sid TRACE FTP with xxx Subchannel address of the line sid identification of remote station nm Session denomination nn index of TCP IP control task nnnnn number of the used entry within SC Table sssss used socket number will be dynamically allocated on a disk volume which belongs to the unit group with the symbolic name as stated in the rvs start parameter UNIT If a dataset with an equal name is already cataloged the existing dataset will be extended use with DISP MOD Example After entering the commands TRACE rvs and T ST1 S1 where S1 denotes the first send session to the remote station ST1 a dataset with name rvsMVS Installation Manual 8 Special Functions Procedures 5 5 1 51 will be allocated 8 2 2 Start Stop of rvs Trace For leased BSC lines the trace is started and stopped by the commands T sid and O sid With several lines to the same station you can choose one of them by stating the subchannel address Ill T sid lll and O sid Ill For switched BSC lines the trace should be started and stopped by the commands T III resp O III where Ill denotes the subchannel address of the line For SNA sessions the trace is started and stopped by the commands T sid resp O sid where sid denotes the station identification of the remote station In this case a trace is started on all sessions which are defined for the remote station rvs stations table rvs
88. specified or if default values are available If one ore more of these parameters are not specified and if no defaults are available the TCP IP component cannot be used A list of all parameters for this component may be found at the beginning of this section TEMPNAME UNIQUE 5 configure temporary filename unique or DSN with timestamp TSTAMP old format DSN lt TSTAMP gt UNIQUE new unique temporary file name New blueprint for temporary data sets name T Mxx Dyyddd Thhmmss Cxxxx Cyyyy with name taken from parameter FIRSTLV in CNTL Mxx monitor number Dyyddd date stamp Thhmmss time stamp Cxxxx Cyyyy unique counter since monitor start TEXTBLSZ 6000 nn nn value between 9 and 32760 TEXTLREC 2048 nn value between 5 32756 Specification of blocksize 52 or a maximum record length TEXTLREC to be used for files which are to be received as text format files These files are always allocated with record format variable blocked but the values for maximum record length and blocksize may be rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset specified different from the ODETTE recommendation These parameters apply only for components which use the ODETTE FTP as transmission protocol LU6 2 X 25 TCP IP The value for TEXTBLSZ must be greater than or equal to TEXTLREC 4 If a textformat file is to be received which includes records longer than the value
89. station because you connect with your own station For the loop test a station entry must be defined in the following way rvsMVS Installation Manual 7 Running Installation Tests The station you call is to be defined within STATIONS TABLE in the usual way see chapter 6 TCP entry The values of SID ODETID and TCPPORT must be identical to the values you coded for the local station member CNTL of the TABLES dataset The TCPIPADR parameter of the stations definition must specify the IP address of the local installation Furthermore SENDPW and RECVPW must be equal and the parameter DIRECTN B must be active specified or by default for both station definitions If you want to send data you have to take care of different names on sender and receiver side gt work with the rename function when queuing the dataset 7 2 Transmission of Datasets The following steps must be performed for transmission tests send receive e creation of a dataset to be sent size of about 50 records e queuing this dataset for transmission to the remote installation this may be done with program DFO80A00 or with the rvs ISPF panels see rvsMVS User Manual Benutzerhandbuch for more details e creation of resident receive entries for the datasets to be received necessary only if special functions like automatic jobstart shall be tested e start of the rvs monitor and the transmission component e activation of BSC line s or activation of SNA
90. station name of the local rvs installation and some other values This initial message is followed by the message sid ENTER PASSWORD The logon password must now be entered row 1 column 1 This password is the same as described in the section Installation of rvs ISPF panels within this manual The password is not displayed on the screen If the valid password has been entered the message sid LOGON COMPLETE rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Using the Remote Operating Function will be displayed and the remote operating function will start working display of messages processing of rvs commands see below This session may be stopped at any time if LOGOFF is entered in the input field starting at column 1 If an invalid password has been entered the message sid INVALID PASSWORD REENTER will be displayed If four invalid passwords are entered within one sequence the SNA session will be closed by rvs and a new logon is required If the logon request is not successful an SNA session between rvs and the logical unit of the screen could not be established the following points should be checked in order to determine the reason of this e The specified application id of the logon request is invalid or the application id is not defined within VTAM or some cross domain resources are missing or incorrect e The application is not active the rvs monitor is not active or the remote operating control ta
91. supports the revision 1 3 dated from Dec 1992 without error recovery described in the 1 3 document The X25 LU6 2 and TCP IP components of rvs support this protocol For more service between stations with rvs products rvs enhances this protocol by using some specials e rvsMVS PDS File Transfer Use of the user fields of SSID and SFID protocol record These fields contain some flags led by an eye catcher RF for initiator s outgoing protocol records and RF for incoming protocol records e Additionally rvsMVS uses a SFID extension SFIX for transfer of partitioned data set information e Additionally rvsMVS uses SFID extension SFIX for transfer of partitioned data set information 5 external Security and Compression Feature Enhancement of the first data block with a rvs header with an eye catcher of RVSF and some hex characters in total 10 characters e User Separation USP USP provides a remote user RACF check mapping of name possible rvsMVS Installation Manual 1 Introduction This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 2 Installation Requirements 2 Installation Requirements This chapter describes the requirements of the environment in which rvsMVS can operate 2 1 Software Requirements rvsMVS runs any host with operating system MVS XA MVS ESA OS 390 or z OS Dependent on the component TP line s to be used by rvs BSC SNA X 25 LU6 2 TCP IP or a
92. table of the remote station s see chapter 6 2 If used this name must be different from those specified for the rvs startparameters RMOPAPPL APPLID and XAPPLID LU62MODE mode1 mode2 mode3 LOGMODE names for the LU62 sessions with the following order modei modename for low priority session mode2 modename for medium priority session mode3 modename for high priority session All names must be defined in the LOGMODE table of VTAM for the used application ID Note e This names are the default values if no modes are defined in the station table entry of a LU6 2 station e This names must be exactly 8 characters long LU62MAX 0 nnn nn value between 0 and 999 Max number of sessions for the LU62 component LU62USE YES This parameter is used only for the LU62 component It indicates that this component is to be used by RVS All parameters for this component must be given and a list may be found at the beginning of this section MAXRPT 1 nn This parameter is used only for the Compression Security feature component It specifies the max number of parallel comp secr dispatcher receive tasks used by this component nn may be a value between 1 and 99 MAXSPT 1 nn rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This parameter is used only for the Compression Security feature component It specifies the max number of parallel comp secr dispatcher send tasks used by thi
93. temporary dataset name generated during compression decompression and encryption decryption This parameter defines the index of the private key and its corresponding certificate located in the keystore which has to be used by rvsMVS e g for signing It is defined in CNTL member and can be overwritten in STATIONS member This parameter defines the RACF keyring containing the certificates and private key Only used if KEYSTORE or CERSTORE is defined as RACF KIRING requires at least rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features one valid KEYLABEL definition in the CNTL member 1 64 character only upper case KEYLABEL i name This parameter defines the RACF label of the own key pair private key and certificate Only used if KEYSTORE is defined as RACF KEYLABEL requires a valid KEYRING definition in the CNTL member 1 32 character only upper case KEYSTORE RACF BUILTIN This parameter defines the type of keystore BUILTIN uses the pkcs 15 keystore shipped with rvsMVS The private key and the own certificate is addressed by keyindex If RACF is defined the private key and the own certificate is managed by and addressed by keyring and keylabel RSA decryption is done using ICSF CERSTORE RACF BUILTIN This parameter defines the type of certificate store BUILTIN uses the VSAM certificate store shipped with rvsMVS The partner certificate is addressed by cerindex If RACF is defined the partner
94. the BSC control character X 2D C 1 definition of the local own station as a slave station the own station identification will be sent within the first text buffer If the own station shall be defined as a slave station this value should always be specified C 2 definition of the local own station as a master station the identification of the remote station is expected in one string together with the BSC control character X 2D C 3 definition of the local own station as a master station the identification of the remote station is expected in the first text buffer Remarks This value of the program profile defines which of the two stations local or remote has to send its identification first after the line connection dial is established For leased lines the value C 2 should always be specified Explicite specification of all components functions of the transmission protocol This field will be ignored unless column 68 contains the value C X The use of this field allows the definition of very special transmission protocols This may be useful if a connection to another computer shall be established but software or hardware restrictions of the remote station require a modification of one of the rvs standard procedures described in the rvs Interface Description In case of such a requirement please consult the software producer VWAG reserved This field must contain blanks The following is an exampl
95. the details of the selection Entering U in front of a list entry shows the panel DFY30P00 for updating the selected user mapping entry Entering D in front of a list entry deletes the corresponding user mapping entry If there is only one user mapping entry matching the selection criteria the corresponding details are indicated in panel DFY10P00 rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features Yeve ve dee e eeu ve eve eue vec DFY10POO dede de dede de de de de de de dede dede de dede dede dede dede de dede eR WS DISPLAY L UPDATE DELETE OF USER E RARATON RECEIVE ZNTRIES He ate ate ate ats ale ale ale ale ale ale ale ale ale al te ale cle le le se ke kek COMMAND gt DATE 05 311 TIME 15 16 SPECIFY OPTION D DELETE ENTRY U UPDATE ENTRY REMOTE STATION REMOTE USERID LOCALE USERID ACCOUNT NUMBER 3DFR004 ODETTEID 00000000000GEDAS JOBCARD Entering option D deletes the actual user mapping entry Entering option shows the panel DFY30P00 for updating the actual user mapping entry Display of USP Log Entries The menu item Z shows a panel which allows the user to display user separation log entries The panel DFZOOPOO helps to select a corresponding entry by specifying some selection criteria X kt le ale DFZOOPOO ex ex DISPLAY USER PERMISSION oe ENTRIES tg ale cle ale ale ale ale ale ale ale eve vee deese
96. the rvs Tables Dataset This member contains the following JCL statements which are used if a dataset on tape has been queued for transmission and must be copied from tape to disk before the transmission can start SENDTAPE EXEC PGM DF024A00 PARM IN DD UNIT TAPE DEFER DISP SHR VOL SER DSN E HEH H HH HH HH HH H HHHH OUT DD UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 060 070 RLSE DISP KEEP DELETE DSN E HEH H HHH HHH HH H HHH H STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR In this case rvs will generate and submit a job consisting of the modified content of members JOBCARD and rvs will modify all fields containing characters The lines containing these characters should not be modified Other parameters for example UNIT or SPACE should be adapted to the corresponding installation Member SYSOUTUJC of the rvs Tables Dataset This member contains the following JCL statements which are used if a dataset shall be copied to a sysout queue after receiption SYSOUT EXEC PGM IEBGENER SYSPRINT DD SyYSOUT SYSIN DD DUMMY rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset SYSUT1 DISP OLD DELETE KEEP SYSUT2 SYSOUT In this case rvs will generate and submit a job consisting of the modified content of members JOBCARD or JOBCARDS if available and member SYSOUTJC rvs will modify all fi
97. their default assignments MSG SETDEF or MSG S This command also displays the new assignments for all functions Syntax of the CNTLMSG member kt Lines starting with a in column 1 are treated as a comment The length of a line 80 characters may completely be used for definitions etc The first non comment line must define the group subset name of the message subset Syntax SUBSET name where name is a string of up to 8 alphanumeric characters No differences are made between small capital letters all input from the CNTLMSG member will be translated to capital letters before interpretation After the definition of the subset name one or more default assignments for the different functions may be done Syntax DEFAULT CNSLSUP default assignment for suppression of console messages DEFAULT CNSLDSPL default assignment for display of console messages DEFAULT RMOPSUP default assignment for suppression of rem op messages DEFAULT RMOPDSPL default assignment for display of rem op messages Subset definition and default assignment s must be separated by at least one blank The default assignments become active after start of the rvs monitor as well as after entering the command MSG REFRESH If there are more than default assignments for the same function only the first assignment will be accepted further assignments are ignored Other definitions within this line will be ignored After definition of the subse
98. time of day is reached See also DIALOPTS DIALOPT3 and ACTOPTS dt dt1 dt2 times of automatic dial indicates when the remote station is to be called dialed one time no retry This function is useful for recalling datasets from a remote station at certain times of day Up to four different times may be defined Syntax dt hh mm Examples DIALOPT2 14 08 DOPT2 14 08 15 40 No default value DIALOPT3 t t1 t2 r L DOPT3 J Polling interval for automatic dial Optional parameter 11 12 denote a time interval a retry time for this interval Similar to the DIALOPT2 parameter this parameter provides a polling function in view of establishing a connection A dial request is generated automatically every r minutes within the specified time interval regardless of any send requests Syntax t1 hh mm t2 hh mm r value between 1 and 255 minutes Examples DIALOPT3 07 30 20 40 20 DOPT3 20 00 06 30 8 rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset No default value DOPTS xx D xx b ti rt tit rt ti2 rt2 ti3 rt3 ti4 rt4 DOPTSy Dy Options for automatic dial for specific day of week Optional parameter Parameter xx name of day xx english notation xx german notation Parameters ti and rt like in DIALOPTS DOPTS parameter Default value no Examples DIALOPTS 11 15 12 00 5 DOPTS DI 08 00 09 00 1
99. together define the use of VW FTP V2 0 Session options may be used for modification of functions performed by this session The use of this field is only for test and development purposes the value C 00000000 must always be specified File options may be used for modification of file dependent functions performed during transmission of a file The use of this field is only for test and development purposes the value C 00000000 must always be specified Session timer This timer is used to check TIMEOUT situations Transmission of data records of a file sending or receiving is preceeded and followed by transmission of some rvs protocol records The transmission of all of these protocol records and the time used for establishing a session after activation request is controlled by the session timer If sending of a protocol record is not completed within the time interval rvs treats this as a TIMEOUT situation and the transmission will be cancelled The session timer time interval is also used for re writing the record counters during transmissions to the controldataset checkpoints for a later restart of the transmission One of the following values may be specified 15 seconds 30 seconds 2 1 minute rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 2 minutes C4 4 minutes 8 minutes 16 minutes C 7 32 minutes 8 64 minutes C 9 128
100. 0 31 QUEUEING TIME 12 49 17 0 TRANSMISSION TIME 12 49 37 7 JOB CARD DSN LUSER MEMBER JOBCARD LUSER JOB MEMBER IEFBR14 STATUS SEQ DATE JOBNUMMER PROGRAM EVENT CREATE OK 2005 10 31 49 37 8 119B EVENT DFUX0O1 OK 2005 10 31 49 37 8 119A EVENT OK JOB OK 2005 10 31 49 41 5 RUSER 20416004 058A EVENT ERR JOB EVENT SC START 2005 10 31 E 38 6 RUSER 052v EVENT SC END OK 2005 10 31 E 41 3 RUSER 052v EVENT END OF T OK 2005 10 31 38 1 RUSER 094 PRESS END WHEN FINISHED REMOTE STATION SID of the remote station participated on the transmission RECORD TYPE LR The panel shows a receive entry LS The panel shows a send entry DATASET NAME The virtual dataset name during the transmission LOCAL DSN The physical dataset name on the local system LOCAL USERID The local user id used for RACF authorization ACCOUNT NR Account number of the RACF C USER RACF C USER User id under which rvsMVS runs and created the log entry REMOTE USERID The user id sent by the remote station If a user mapping entry exists it is used for RACF authorization Otherwise the transmitted user id is used QUEUEING DATE Date at which the send or receive entry was created QUEUEING TIME TRANSMISSION DATE Date at which the transmission was started TRANSMISSION TIME JOB CARD DSN Name of the dataset containing the jobcard of the corresponding remote user id JOB DSN Name of the dataset containing the job which may be submitted
101. 00 MORE THAN MAX BYTES BH EXITO1 YES IS ERROR ST R3 BUFLEN SAVE BUFFER LENGTH ICM R3 B 1111 4 R1 LOAD ADR OF BUFFER BZ EXITO1 IMPROPER PARAMETER LIST ST R3 BUFADR SAVE BUFFER ADDRESS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkkxkxk MAIN FUNCTION OBTAIN THE TOD VALUE INTERMIXED WITH TASKS THAT PASS CONTROL BACK TO MVS TO PROCESS ENTROPY IS INTRODUCED FROM THE FACT THAT THE AMOUNT OF TIME MVS TAKES TO PROCESS THE REQUESTS IS UNKNOWN AND DEPENDENT ON FACTORS NOT IN OUR CONTROL KKK de He de He de He e ke de KKK KKK KKK He de He ke He de He e He e He ehe He He He He He He He eek ke ke He He ec e He e He ke He ke He ke e ke ec ke ke e ke k ke k 0 0X EACH LOOP GATHERS 8 BYTES OF DATA ENLOOP DS LA R2 WBUF LOAD ADR OF WORKING BUFFER PLIST ATTACH SATTACH INIT PARM LIST LA R4 0 LOAD NULL ST R4 STECB ZERO ECB LA R4 STECB LOAD A ECB ATTACH ECB R4 SF E PLIST LTR R15 R15 SUCCESSFUL BNZ 2 FAILED ST R1 STTCB SAVE ADR OF TCB STCK TOD OBTAIN TOD VALUE MVC 0 1 R2 TODB7 SAVE BYTE 7 LA R2 1 R2 INCR ADR WAIT ECB R4 WAIT FOR TASK TO COMPLETE LA R4 STTCB LOAD A TCB DETACH R4 STCK TOD MVC 0 1 R2 TODB7 LA R2 1 R2 LTR BNZ R15 R15 EXITO2 GETMAIN RC LV 50000 LOC 31 31 DETACK TASK OBTAIN TOD VALUE SAVE BYTE 7 INCR ADR SUCCESSFUL NO EXIT rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP
102. 00000 00000000 0801000 00800000 0003 9 0 0380 000 00016260 03000084 20800000 00000000 000000F8 0000010C 10309450 00000000 RC 00 00 00 80800001 40000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 000349DC 80008010 00000000 00000000 00000000 SEND STYPE RESP RESPOND NEX FME NRRN jenuejy uonejeisu SAIWSA VNS JO 3921 01665 5 eroeds 8 rvsMVS Installation Manual 8 Special Functions Procedures 8 2 5 Format of LU6 2 Trace For each executed APPC command a trace entry consisting of several rows is written The individual entries are separated by a dashed line An example is printed on the next page Explanation of trace fields 1st row SESSION LU NAME MODE NAME REMOTE STATION DATE TIME 2nd 5th row RPLADDR RPLDATA RC2ocyy zz eth row Denomination of the session Your own logical unit name Used logmode for this session Name of remote station Date in the form yy ddd Time of day Address of used RPL Used RPL in hexadecimal A short explanation of this VTAM control block is given in the prefix of the trace Returncodes xx register 15 yy register 0 22 feedback code For the meaning of these codes see the IBM manual SC27 0449 ACF VTAM Programming Name of the APPC command issued For SEND and RECEIVE macros the contents of the buffer pointed to is printed in dump format SESSION SCT ENTRY 00001
103. 002 is found on the rvsMVS installation tape in the rvs source library 2 file Please refer to this example in case of need of adaption to your environment An example of a station table entry for rvsWIN is specified in Chapter 6 2 2 SNA Stations parameter TYPE WIN 3270 A 3 Accounting User Exit The accounting user exit may be used to obtain data about all executed transmissions in order to process these data for reasons of accounting or other reasons for example statistics This exit is called by the rvs monitor if the start parameter has been specified see chapter 6 1 For operating system MVS XA both addressing mode AMODE and residency mode RMODE must be set to 24 bit addressing If installed the exit is given control e just after start of the rvs monitor without any accounting information e after each transmission of a dataset send or receive independent of the fact whether the transmission ended normally or not e just before stop of the rvs monitor without any accounting information Interface description of the exit If the exit is entered e register 13 points to a 72 byte savearea e register 14 contains the return address and e register 1 contains the address of a parameter list with the following fields rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits offset dec length description flags from calling module bitstring first call of exit next call of exit
104. 05 94 QDAY 138 108 18 05 93 31 12 93 QDAY 94 138 365 18 05 93 18 05 94 If there is an asterisk in place of date it is defaulted to the current machine date rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Reference Utility program DF076A Examples current machine date is 94 108 that is 18 05 94 expression equals to interval QDAY 18 05 94 18 05 94 QDAY 3 15 05 94 18 05 94 QDAY 240 11 08 93 18 05 94 If this keyword is given QDATE or QTM must be omitted in the same set of search arguments QTIME time1 time2 Queuing time s of day optional QTIME time2 1 QTIME hh mm One or two times of day to limit the queuing time frame of the queried transmission s The explicitely given times have the format hh mm where hh hours and mm minutes 24 hour clock and if the second time is given they are separated by a dash An omitted first time of day is defaulted to 00 00 and second one to 24 00 If the first time expression is an asterisk it is replaced by 00 00 and the second time is defaulted to the current machine time If the asterisk is followed by a second time expression the first time is calculated to a time given number of hours and minutes before the machine time and the second time is defaulted to the machine time Yet the time cannot by this way span to the previous day The second time expressed by an asterisk will be replaced by the current machine time If this k
105. 0A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR KEYPROOO DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEY PR DISP SHR KEYPUOO0 DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEY PU DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT KEYPARAM DD UID LOC DDNAME KEYPROOO NEW UID LOC DDNAME KEYPUOOO NEW 1 3 6 a public key of your partner The job KEYIMPPU can be used to import a key of your partner to the key management Set PID to SID of your partner Example A JOB KEYIMPT EXEC PGM DFO54K PARM KEYS STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR KEYPUOO0 DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEY PU DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT KEYPARAM DD PID R11 DDNAME KEYPUOOO NEW I 3 7 List all keys of the key management The job KEYLIST can be used to list all keys from the key management Example A JOB KEYLIST EXEC PGM DF054K PARM LIST ALL STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT 1 3 8 Export all keys from the key management to a sequential file The job KEYEXPRT can be used to export all keys from the key management to a sequential file see KEYIMPRT too Example A JOB KEYEXPT EXEC PGM DFO54K PARM EXPT ALL rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix I Key Data Utility Program DF054K STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR SYSPR
106. 1 It must be different from the application names if used for the SNA component and the remote operating function Switched Major Node For the set of switched virtual circuits to be used by rvs the definition of a switched major node within VTAM is required The following code is an example for the definition of a switched major node for two switched virtual circuits rvs startparameter MAXSVC 2 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkk DEFINITION OF A SWITCHED MAJOR NODE FOR rvs X25 MULTI CHANNEL LINK X30A0 THIS DEFINITION INCLUDES SPECIFICATIONS NEEDED FOR TWO SWITCHED VIRTUAL CIRCUITS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk H030X03 VBUILD TYPE SWNET P30XODO1 PU ADDR 01 IDBLK 003 003 IS MANDATORY IDNUM 00002 SEE NOTE ON NEXT PAGE BATCH NO DISCNT YES F IRETRY YES MAXDATA 3850 VALUE MUST BE GREATER THAN XBFSIZE SEE rvs STARTPARAMETER CHAPTER 6 1 MAXOUT 1 0 PACING 1 PASSLIM 1 PUTYPE 1 PUTYPE 1 IS MANDATORY SPAN SP11 VPACING 1 ISTATUS ACTIVE T30XODO1 LU LOCADDR 0 0 IS MANDATORY MODETAB LMTrvsX SEE EXAMPLE PACING 1 1 SSCPFM USSSCS SPAN SP11 VPACING 2 FF F FF FH FH F HF HF HF X FF 0X rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit P30XOD02 PU ADDR 01 IDBLK 003 IDNUM 00004 BATCH NO DISCNT YES F IRETRY YES MAXDATA 3850
107. 13 RE EE etes 76 ACCOUNT i REPE 73 74 BS 93 accounting information eerte tree ei eter etes 84 description tese 227 io haves 77 own RE UD URS eds 73 DOPBT39 ten tee e eie TT ii ost cese SEE 50 nostis ere De ter hives 76 ACME eere 83 89 97 101 105 107 113 DOPTSH z tec user ertt eR e eee iere TT 83 89 113 DOPTSy ce erred 77 ACTMOD E 83 89 113 POPPR cem ete 52 AQTOBST sicci eee 51 lt ether 53 ACTOPTS anseres 89 113 DSBLI esce erit ee esee 53 vertente 51 Rene 78 93 Pu U W 74 see User Exits ADDE VICE wo eei eret eges 114 53 74 114 EXTERNAL 179 net 74 114 EXTERNAL SECURITY eene 180 ADS 114 Feature Architecture eese 177 510 det tetti E 74 PERS ng erben 107 E 51 107 RII
108. 25 LU62 COMPONENT SUBSET COMPX251 DF9409 DF9415 COMBINATION COMPSNA1 251 SUBSET STANDARD DF3601 DF3713 DF9409 DF9415 OUTPUT OF DD COMMAND SUBSET DISPLAY1 DEFAULT CNSLDSPL DEFAULT RMOPDSPL DF5211 JOBSTART MESSAGE FOR STATION X01 SUBSET JOBSTRT1 gt 0 5801 R XO1 Remark The example above in included in the tables dataset of the distribution tape 6 6 2 Additional SYSOUT protocols Most but not all of the rvs messages are displayed on the operators console For example all messages containing the character P in column 7 of the message identifier are not displayed on console In some cases for example problem determination it is useful to have more information about the activity of the rvs monitor Because of such reasons it is possible to define one or more SYSOUT protocols for the rvs monitor The content of these protocols may be selected by message identifiers To define an additional SYSOUT protocol the following things must be done 1 Two additional DD statements must be inserted into the rvs start procedure for one SYSOUT protocol The first one is used to allocate a member of the rvs tables dataset which contains the information about the messages to be printed on the protocol see below The second one is used to allocate the SYSOUT protocol output file itself These two DD statements build a pair with the DD names MSGIDnn and SYSWTOnn where n
109. 25 a LIC Type 1 is used This is the same connection as used for BSC lines without autodial function The physical connection between control unit and ACU must be a connection as described in recommendation CCITT for V 25 interface For IBM 3705 a line set 1E is used for this interface for IBM 3725 a LIC Type 1 is used This connection is used only for dialing If dialing is complete all data traffic is performed on the V 24 connection between contol unit and modem The Datenfernschaltger t DFG for the DATEX L network already includes the ACU But the physical connections to the controlunit are the same as if modem and ACU are separate boxes see figure below X 21bis data control DATEX L unit DFG V 25 dial The following is an example of an EP generation concerning the LINE and GROUP macros for a 2400 baud switched line with autodial function GROUP DIAL YES LNCTL BSC PAD NO TYPE EP LINE ADDRESS yyy xx AUTO zzz 20 CLOCKNG EXT CU 2703 DATRATE HIGH DUPLEX HALF SPEED 2400 TERM 2020 rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit Remarks e The parameters DIAL YES DUPLEX HALF LNCTL BSC and PAD NO mandatory e The parameter CLOCKNG EXT should be specified for every line except for lines with a speed of 1200 baud If SPEED 1200 is specified CLOCKNG INT should be specified instead e xx deno
110. 54321 All parameters with same index specify one specific CTCP The index has to be defined for every mandatory parameter Optional parameters without index are valid for all defined CTCPs optional parameters with index are valid for the specified CTCP only 4 1 Parameters used only for the X25 component via XOT XOTLOCAD xx ipaddress Own ip address of local TCP IP stack XOTLPORT xx 1998 nn Local port number for xot server function XOTREMADY xx ipaddress ip address of xot router rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset XOTRPORTI xx 1998 nn Port number of xot router XOTUSE xx YES NO Indication for the use of the XOT component name Reference name of the defined TCP IP stack 4 2 Parameters used only for the X25 component via NPSI XAPPLID xx name Application ID of the local own station XLUNAME xx name LU name of the local X 25 multichannel link XNUMCHCOCK xx YES NO checking of incoming call 5 Parameters used only for the LU62 component LU62USE NO YES Indication for the use of the LU62 component LU62MAX 0 nnn max number of sessions LU62APPL name Application ID of the local own station LU62MODE mode1 mode2 mode3 MODE names for LU62 sessions ODID name Odette identification of the own station X25TOT 10 nn timeout interval 6 Parameters used only for the TCP IP component TCPUSE NO YES Indication for the use of the TCP IP com
111. 8 XOTREMAD 11 192 168 0 2 XOTRPORT 11 1998 XNUMBER 11 45536120002 PSIZE 11 128 WSIZE 11 7 11 15 2 2 7e e e e e KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK Fe he e he Fe he e he e ke e he ke He He He e he e he e ke e ke e ke e ke e ke e eek 5 Definition of X 25 XOT groups Rok e e ke ke e ke e he khe khe ke he khe khe khe khe khe khe Fe Fe e he e he Fe Fe e he e he e ke e he ke he ke he ke he ke he ke e ke e ke e ke e ke e eek X25GROUP ISDN1 1 X25GROUP ISDN2 2 X25GROUP ISDN 1 2 X25GROUP X25 10 X25GROUP XOT 11 2 e e e ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke e ke e ke e ke e ke e BOTTOM OF DATA kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 1 2 Definition of two X 25 multi channel links which should use ISDN The parameters to describe CTCP 1 and CTCP 2 are specified by index 1 index 2 3 Definition of an X 25 multi channell link which should use X 25 as network The index number to specify the CTCP is 10 4 Definition of an XOT link which should use 25 as network The index number to specify the CTCP is 11 5 Definition of X 25 groups to comprise various X 25 multi channel links For instance ISDN specifies a group consisting of CTCP 1 and CTCP 2 X25 specifies a group consisting of CTCP 10 rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Ins
112. A rvs User Exits Logic within the send sections select first or next dataset for transmission isa dataset available to send 2 link to exit DFUX001 N is return code equal zero yes N V transmit send the selected dataset place send request in HOLD state display message about this fact see remark 1 lt lt NV try to receive a dataset depending on the line characteristics and other parameters one of the following will be done try to send next queued dataset if any or wait until a dataset is queued for sending break line connection switched BSC line inactivate switched virtual circuit X 25 rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits Logic within the receiving sections a HEADER record has been received determine specifications which apply for reception of this dataset Y link to exit DFUX001 NV is return code equal zero yes is return code equal no 12 WV suppress specifications which should be used for reception of dataset see remark 2 reject reception of the dataset lt reception of dataset starting with allocation of the output dataset 22 rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A
113. APPL name Application ID of the local own station Description of rvs Start Parameters in detail General remark Some of the rvs start parameters are used not only by the rvs monitor but also by programs executed in different address spaces for example rvs ISPF panels Such programs obtain these values from the rvs control dataset where the rvs monitor stores the current used parameter values during every run of rvs Thus if parameter values are changed they become active for all programs only after the next monitor start Name of an user provided accounting exit routine If no exit routine is installed this parameter must be omitted An accounting exit routine may be used to obtain accounting information about all executed transmissions The interface for this exit is described in appendix A of this manual A coding example is contained in appendix A also Specification of this parameter is independent of the SMF parameter see below ACTOFST 49 nn value between 49 and 192 Some of the rvs programs for example rvs ISPF panel programs try to obtain accounting information from the ACT of the job tso session which executes these programs The accounting information within this system control block is variable depending on the specified accounting information within the JOB statement This parameter specifies the displacement base address ACT 16 from where an account information shall be obtaine
114. ARM DAY MON YEAR SUBCHANL STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSUT1 DD DSN RVS TPSTAT DISP SHR SYSUT2 DD SYSOUT TSO Clist You will find an example of this CLIST on rvsMVS installation tape file RVS TABLES LINECL Clist layout RVS Sway war Ss ware amp LINE FX GE ag AY ag a Ne take SELECT LINE LINE gt 095 SELECT DAY MONTH YEAR DAY 00 gt MONTHLY STATISTICS DAY gt 00 MONTH gt 01 YEAR gt 87 PARMS 095 00 01 87 CALCULATION OF LINE ACTIVITY STARTS rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix D rvs statistics Output List Line Activity RVS Soe 74 ae ae be age Rp 59 LINE ACTIVITY 01 87 gt LINE 0 CREATED 20 01 87 0 25 100 DAY 01 01 0 02 01 4 03 01 0 04 01 0 05 01 RRR 20 06 01 xxxskee 10 07 01 k de ke ke k k k k 11 08 01 85 09 01 o kk 30 10 01 0 11 01 0 12 01 e e e e e e e e e e e 13 01 Kk 34 14 01 XxXXdddkdekekeek 155583 15 01 17 16 01 A A k e e e e e k k k k 13 17 01 0 18 01 0 19 01 e e e e e e e e e e KKK KK 20 20 01 4 21 01 0 22 01 0 23 01 0 24 01 0 25 01 0
115. BSC lines X 25 LU 6 2 and TCP IP connections automatic activation of BSC lines and or SNA sessions if for some reason or more of these lines sessions have become inactive allow operation of rvs with a minimum of manual activities A remote operating function allows to control and operate from any 3270 screen The rvs monitor normally runs for the duration of one or more days it is not necessary to stop the monitor before or after transmissions have been executed The rvs monitor is designed to operate with any number of BSC lines SNA LU 0 and LU 6 2 TCP IP and X25 connections switched virtual circuits There is no restriction in view of the number of file transmissions which can be executed parallel at the same time Allocation of the datasets to be transmitted received takes place dynamically i e no specific job control instructions are required within the rvs start procedure Functions create update send requests delete create update resident receive entries delete control information for files to be received statistics Authorization Exit DFUX001 processing options before during transmission rename of dataset to be sent compression restart code translation transmission start time after transmission execute disposition keep delete jobstart write event processing options before during transmission rename of file to be
116. CL definition have to be taken care of the fixed format requires LRECL of at least 112 while for the keyword format 80 is sufficient The DD name of the input dataset is set to the value of the INFILE keyword parameter or defaulted to SYSIN if the parameter input area is omitted or it contains no valid set of search arguments Keyword format input parameters INFILE ddname Input file DD name 1 8 characters optional This keyword parameter identifies the DD name of the dataset which contains the input Default is SYSIN if there is no parameter input area at all or the value of this keyword is omitted or blank When this parameter is defined all keywords other than OUTFILE and FMT should be omitted This parameter is valid only in call parameter input The synonyme of this parameter is INF OUTFILE ddname Output file DD name 1 8 characters optional This keyword parameter identifies the DD name of the dataset on which the output will be written Default is SYSPRINT if the parameter output area is omitted or the input is read from a dataset The given value must not be SYSOUT If the dataset is explicitely or implicitely defined as output dataset and the output is written in keyword format see below it will also contain error and informational messages unless the dataset SYSOUT or dataset for WTO messages is available When this parameter is defined all keywords other than INFILE and FMT should be omitted This parameter is valid on
117. CURITY rvskey NO SECRPREF name TSO USERID SERIAL EFPA EERP SMF 0 nnn SMSMNGCL name SMSSTOCL name SMSDATCL name STATION sid sid1 sid2 sidn STORAC 0 nn TEMPNAME UNIQUE TSTAMP TEXTBLSZ 6000 nn TEXTLREC 2048 nn TIME 10 nn TRACE E xxx TSTAMP NO YES UCC uuu uut uun UNIT SYSDA unit UNTCOUNT 1 nn USERSEP YES NO VOLUME volume VWACC NO YES VWJOBC INO YES YPREFIX name TSO USERID YSTORCL name YMAGMCL name YDATACL name Time to wait in seconds to get ENQ for a target GDG after receiving a GDG file Jobprotocol in case of failing jobstart Selecting Job Scheduling System write events Job Scheduling Subsystem Id to write events to Log date format Log time format Time interval for releasing send requests from hold status Controlls the behavior on rename errors after receive max number of Compression Security feature dispatcher receive tasks max number of Compression Security feature dispatcher send tasks rvsMVS message identifier No code translation in case of routing textfiles IMPORTANT Please read full description because of problems with backward compatibility Reply text of rvs monitor SYSOUT job execution enabled Routing code used for WTO s System Completion Codes for extended SNAP dump Indication for the using of the Security Feature see YPREFIX Trigger of Serialize SVC number for writing SMF records SMS
118. DD statement rvsDUMP see rvs start procedure is used to write the dump data If other completion codes occure only a short SNAP dump will be taken Completion codes 0 1 0 4 0C6 and OC7 will always result in extended dump except the same completion code occures more than one time within one monitor run SECRPREF name TSO USERID This parameter is used for the compression security component only This parameter specifies the user prefix name 1 7 characters All compression security temporary files to be created by rvsMVS have to start with this prefix Alike with the parameter YPREFIX SECURITY rvskey NO It specifies how the Security Feature is used Parameter SECURITY EXT YES is not longer necessary The Security module is active if it is allowed by licence key 2 Use SECURITYzNO to switch off security although it is allowed by licence key If SECURITY NO is specified the Security Feature will be rejected for all send requests of this installation Attention The parameters GPUKID GPUKNM GPRKID und GPRKNM are removed SERIAL EFPA EERP Change Trigger of serialized send entries EFPA triggered by the ODETTE element End File Positive Answer EERP triggered by the ODETTE element End to End Response rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 0 nnn nnn denotes the number of an installed User SVC 139 255 which may be used to write SMF records for rvs t
119. DDEST DS CL6 DESTINATION WHEN SYSOUT DATASET KDPROG DS CL8 SYSOUT PROGRAM NAME KDJOB DS CL8 NAME OF A PDS MEMBER CONTAINING A JOB WHICH IS TO BE STARTED BY rvs AFTER THE DATASET HAS BEEN RECEIVED KDCOPIES DS CL2 NUMBER OF SYSOUT COPIES KDFORM DS CL4 SYSOUT FORM NUMBER DS CL12 RESERVED kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkxkxkk FURTHER INFORMATION kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkxk DS CL5 RESERVED KDFIRST DS CL3 ORIGIN STATION ID DS CL5 RESERVED KDFINAL DS CL3 ID OF THE FINAL STATION DS XL30 RESERVED KDUSERID DS CL8 TSO USERID OR NAME OF THE BATCHJOB WHICH CREATED THIS RECORD SEND REQUEST OR RESIDENT RECEIVE ENTRY DS CL14 RESERVED e oe ce ce e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce oe ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ee e ce eee ee e KKK KKK A x X INFORMATION ABOUT REMOTE DATASET REMOTE OPTIONS oe ce ce ce ce e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e ce e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e e ce ce KKK eec ce e e e e e A x x DS CL8 RESERVED KDVOLNRR DS CL6 VOLUME NO OF REMOTE DATASET rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix B Description of the rvs controldataset record KDRECORD KDDEVR DS KDDISPR DS KDBITSR DS KDBITSR1 DS KDRJE EQU KDREPL KDBITSR2 DS KDBITSR3 DS KDBITSR4 DS XL31 OXLA x 20 X 10 X X X DEVICE TYPE OF
120. DE s 200 Data transfer mode is Stream EZA1460I Command EZA17361 PUT FIX0003 BX FIX0004 TESTX33 FA4 F000019 EZA17011 gt gt gt 5 FIXrecfm 138 Lrec1 138 Recfm FB BLKSIZE 18630 200 Site command was accepted EZA17011 gt gt gt 143 163 32 2 4 31 200 Port request OK EZA1701I gt gt gt STOR FIX0004 TESTX33 FA4 F000019 125 Storing data set FIX0004 TESTX33 FA4 F000019 250 Transfer completed successfully EZA1617I 13761 bytes transferred in 1 020 seconds Transfer rate 13 49 Kbytes s EZA14601 Command EZA17361 TYPE E EZA17011 gt gt gt e rvsMVS Installation Manual 8 Special Functions Procedures 200 Repre EZA14601 EZA17361 EZA17011I 200 Data EZA1460I EZA17361 EZA1701I 200 Site EZA1701I 200 Port sentation type is EBCDIC Command MODE B gt gt gt MODE b transfer mode is Block Command PUT FIX0003 TEST FTPHD FD2FAA4 FA4 F000019 FIX0004 TEST FTPHD FD2FA4 gt gt gt 5 FIXrecfm 160 Lrecl 160 Recfm FB BLKSIZE 16000 command was accepted gt gt gt PORT 143 163 32 2 4 32 request OK EZA17011 gt gt gt STOR FIX0004 TEST FTPHD FD2FA4 FA4 F000019 125 Storing data set FIX0004 TEST FTPHD FD2FA4 FA4 F000019 250 Transfer completed successfully EZA16171 163 bytes transferred in 0 504 seconds Transfer rate 0 32 Kbytes sec EZA14601 Command EZA17361 QUIT TRACE DATA BLOCK FTP TRAILER FILE gt RECEIVE REMOTE STATION FA4 DATASET NAME FIX0004 TESTX33
121. DER BER coded The import can be done using the example job RVS JOBS IMPCERT A JOB IMPORT EXEC PGM DF053C REGION 4M STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR CERTS DD DSN RVS CERTS DISP SHR CERT DD DSN RVS CERT DISP SHR SYSIN DD COMMAND IMPORT OID 0 ODETTE ID INDEX 1 COMMAND EXPORT This command exports the partner s certificate Required parameter OID INDEX Optional parameter DD names CERTS the certstore dataset CERT dataset to store the partner s certificate in PKCS 7 format dataset format U DER BER coded JOB IMPORT EXEC PGM DF053C REGION 4M STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR CERTS DD DSN RVS CERTS DISP SHR CERT DD DSN RVS CERT DISP CATLG UNIT SYSDA 1 SPACE CYL 1 1 RLSE DCB RECFM U LRECL 0 BLKSIZE 6144 SYSIN DD COMMAND EXPORT OID 0 ODETTE ID INDEX 1 COMMAND DELETE rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features This command deletes a certificate from certstore Required parameter OID INDEX Optional parameter DD names CERTS the certstore dataset Deleting a certificate can be done using the example job RVS JOBS DELCERT A JOB DELETE EXEC PGM DF053C REGION 4M STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR CERTS DD DSN RVS CERTS DISP SHR SYSIN DD COMMAND DELETE OID 0 ODETTE ID INDEX 1 rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features COMMAND LIST This command lists deta
122. E EERE EERE EE COMMAND gt SCROLL gt PAGE REMOTE STATION RV1 SELECT A SINGLE ENTRY TO BE DISPLAYED 5 DATE AND TIME OF QUEUEING TRANSMISSION DATASET NAME DATE TIME DATE LUSER LUSER LUSER LUSER LUSER LUSER LUSER LUSER LUSER R TESTDATA ITT I K Entering S in front of a list entry shows the details of the corresponding selection in panel CJJCL JOBTEST JOBTEST JOBTEST JOBTEST JOBTEST JOBTEST JOBTEST LOOPTEST DFZ20P00 BREE 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 20 2005 11 07 13 WX Bottom of data WR 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 20 9 2005 11 07 13 LEX LEE EE LEE rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features He te ae de de He a ae de ee a a ae ee ae ae ae ae ae deett DEZ20PQQ etse ae ae de de de dette de ae a ae de dee s RVS x DISPLAY USER Erde LOG RECORD 2292727 WWW Gxext COMMAND gt TIME 15 29 REMOTE STATION GEA RECORD TYPE DATE STD 05 311 DATASET NAME LUSER JOBTEST DATE 2005 11 07 LOCAL DSN LUSER JOBTEST LOCAL USERID LUSER ACCOUNT NR 1 5005 RACF C USER LUSER REMOTE USERID FIXOGER QUEUEING DATE 2005 10 31 TRANSMISSION DATE 2005 1
123. E DD DSN RVS KEYSTORE DISP SHR SYSIN DD COMMAND LIST ALL Key management parameter INDEX 0 nn nn value between 0 and 5 The index is the unique identifier for a keypair It allows a direct access to a special keypair KEYSIZE 1024 2048 4096 8192 The keysize is the number of bits used as size for a new keypair VALIDITY 365 nnnn value between 1 and 9660 This parameter specifies the number of days after a self signed certificate expires VALIDFROM now YYDDD YYDDD e g 12032 for 02 01 12 This parameter specifies the date when the validity of the certificate starts If it isn t set the current date will be used COUNTRYzcountry name 2 characters This parameter specifies a two letter international country code used in the distinguished name of a self signed certificate or a certificate request Please refer X 509 and X 500 RFC for more information ORGNAME organization name max 64 characters This parameter specifies the name of the organization used in the distinguished name of a self signed certificate or a certificate request Please refer X 509 and X 500 for more information OUzorganizational unit name max 64 characters This parameter specifies the division of the organization used in the distinguished name of a self signed certificate or a certificate request Please refer X 509 and X 500 RFC for more information SPzstate or province name max 64 characters This parameter
124. ELETE Deletes a certificate LIST o List details for a single certificate LIST ALL o List details for all certificates Most commands need further options to work properly Please refer command description which options are required or optional and chapter 2 2 3 for parameter description rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features Allocation of the Certstore The certstore has to be allocated by the job RVS JOBS DEFCERTS JOB CEDEFINE EXEC PGM IDCAMS STEPLIB DD DSN SYS1 LINKLIB DISP SHR SYSIN DD DEFINE CLUSTER NAME RVS CERTS CYL 3 1 STORAGECLASS SEBS MANAGEMENTCLASS MSYSTSO1 FREESPACE 40 30 KEYS 31 0 RECORDSIZE 5036 5036 INDEXED DATA NAME RVS CERTS DATA INDEX NAME RVS CERTS INDEX The initialization of the certstore has to be done with the job RVS JOBS INICERTS This job writes the line of blanks followed by line IN DD to the certstore A JOB CEINIT EXEC PGM IDCAMS SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SXSIN DD REPRO INFILE IN OUTFILE OUT IN DD OUT DD DSN RVS CERTS DISP SHR rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features Certificate management COMMAND IMPORT This command imports the partner s certificate Required parameter OID INDEX Optional parameter DD names CERTS the certstore dataset CERT dataset containing the partner s certificate in PKCS 7 format dataset format U
125. ESS is set to NO the compression is turned off If the parameter is set to OFTP the old Odette compression is used If COMPRESS is set to OFTP2 the OFTP2 compression is used If the parameter is set to OPT compression can be enabled when the send request is created Compressed and not compressed datasets are allowed for incoming transmissions COMPRESS OFTP2 is only allowed if SECFSET OFTP2 is set For easy switching from ComSecure to OFTP2 security ComSecure values are accepted for this parameter as well Security SECURITY NO YES OPT Defined in the member STATIONS For SECFSET COMSEC refer ComSecure manual This parameter enables OFTP2 encryption IF SECURITY is set to NO the encryption is turned off If the parameter is set to YES outgoing datasets are encrypted Incoming transmissions without encryption are rejected If the parameter is set to OPT encryption can be enabled when the send request is created Encrypted and not encrypted datasets are allowed for incoming transmissions For easy switching from ComSecure to OFTP2 security ComSecure values are accepted for this parameter as well Security Algorithm SECALG 3DES AES Defined in member STATIONS This parameter defines the security algorithm used for file encryption This parameter is only allowed if SECFSET OFTP2 is set rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features File Signature FILESIG NO YES OPT Defined in member STATIONS This parameter enables th
126. EXCHANGE BUFFER SIZE SSIDSR zB SEND RECEIVE INDICATOR S R B SSIDCMPR Y COMPRESSION INDICATOR SSIDREST Y RESTART OPTION Y N SSIDSPEC N SPECIAL LOGIC INDICATOR SSIDCRED 001 EXCHANGE BUFFER CREDIT SSIDRSV1 RESERVED SSIDUSER USER FIELD SSIDCR COMPLETION SUCCESSFUL RETCODE ERRCODE 00065 SOCKET 00001 REMOTE ADDR 010 210 208 130 REMOTE PORT 01392 REMOTE STATION RV1 REQUEST READ LENGTH 0004 HEX 00004 DEC DATA 10000005 COMPLETION SUCCESSFUL RETCODE ERRCODE 00004 SOCKET 00001 REMOTE ADDR 010 210 208 130 REMOTE PORT 01392 REMOTE STATION RV1 REQUEST READ LENGTH 0001 HEX 00001 DEC DATA 52 ODETTE PROTOCOL UNIT CDCMD COMPLETION SUCCESSFUL CHANGE DIRECTION CD COMMAND IDENTIFIER m DATE 99 175 TIME 08 31 4133 9 3 AX100013000001VW RVI AA 00128BYYNO01 o aie 9 O 79 p U o D o 0 3 DATE 99 175 TIME 08 31 4133 DATE 99 175 TIME 08 31 4133 enuen uonejeisu SANSA eroeds 8 rvsMVS Installation Manual 8 Special Functions Procedures 8 2 7 Format of FTP Trace The FTP trance of rvs contains the events on the interface between rvs and the FTP That means it includes e the content of additional control files information file alias header response file alias trailer and the end to end
127. FORMAT OOYYDDDF ACREADYT DS F QUEUING TIME OF THE DATASET FORMAT HHMMSSTF ACSTARTT DS F TRANSMISSION START TIME BINARY IN UNITS OF CENTISECONDS ACSTARTD DS F TRANSMISSION START DATE FORMAT OOYYDDDF ACENDT DS F TRANSMISSION END TIME BINARY IN UNITS OF CENTISECONDS ACENDD DS F TRANSMISSION END DATE FORMAT OOYYDDDF ACTRANS DS c DIRECTION OF TRANSMISSION R RECEIVING S SENDING ACLTYPE DS c LINE TYPE B BSC LINE SWITCHED OR LEASED V VTAM LINE SNA SESSION X X 25 LINE ODETTE PROTOCOL T TCP IP LINE ODETTE PROTOCOL H XOT LINE ODETTE PROTOCOL ACCTCPN DS H INDEX NUMBER ACLOCAL DS CL3 rvs STATION ID OF LOCAL OWN STATION DS XL5 RESERVED ACDIRECT DS CL3 rvs STATION ID OF DIRECT CONNECTED STATION DS XL5 RESERVED ACSENDER DS CL3 rvs STATION ID OF FIRST SENDER DS XL5 RESERVED ACRECEIV DS CL3 rvs STATION ID OF FINAL RECEIVER DS XL5 RESERVED ACLINEAD DS CL3 PHYSICAL LINE SUBCHANNEL ADDRESS IF ACLTYPE B DS x RESERVED ACNUMBER DS CL7 ACCOUNT NUMBER SPECIFIED OR OBTAINED BY DEFAULT FOR THIS TRANSMISSION DS x RESERVED ACDSN1 DS CL44 NAME OF DATASET USED FOR COMMUNICATION WITH REMOTE STATION ACDSN2 DS CL44 PHYSICAL NAME OF DATASET USED TO ALLOCATE THE DATASET ON DISK ACVOLS DS CL6 DISK VOLUME NUMBER OF DATASET DS XL2 RESERVED rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix C Description of accounting information ACRECFM ACBLKSI ACLRECL ACRSTCNT FF FF o ACDSBYTE
128. FRN NO YES non MVS stations only Specifies whether the DSN of the file which should be transmitted will be added by a stamp Defaults 5 stations YES MVS stations FTPRESP FRS NO YES Specifies whether a response file will be expected shall be sent after data file transmission FTPRESP YES or not FTPRESP NO If parameter FTPRESP is set to NO then FTPERESP will be set to NO too FTPSESS FSS 1 nn 1 16 Specifies the max number of parallel transmissions to the same FTP partner station Allowed are values between 1 and 16 FTPUID FUID user id user id 1 64 characters FTP login name of the partner station No default value TYPE MVS SINIX PC This parameter specifies the computer type of the partner stations The FTP component of rvsMVS supports three types of stations MVS SINIX PC Optional parameter rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 8 Subset 8 valid for Indirect Stations VIA entries J relais station identification mandatory parameter Description of rvs Station Table Parameters in detail VIA sid sid 3 characters Relais station identification Mandatory parameter The transmission runs exclusively via the chosen relais station No default value Note This entry poin
129. INDEX is 0 or not given the certificate which is valid and has the longest validity is used for encryption to this partner station RvsMVS finds certificates for signed files check signing automatically Certificate Label CERLABEL i name Defined in member STATIONS This parameter defines the RACF label of the partner certificate user certificate not root certificate CERLABEL requires a valid KEYRING definition in the CNTL member Only used if CERSTORE is defined as RACF 1 32 character only upper case Certificate Store CERSTORE RACF BUILTIN Defined in member CNTL STATIONS This parameter defines the type of certificate store BUILTIN uses the VSAM certificate store shipped with rvsMVS The partner certificate is addressed by cerindex If RACF is defined the partner certificates are managed by RACF and is addressed by keyring and cerlabel rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features Security Feature Set SECFSET COMSEC OFTP2 Defined in members CNTL STATIONS This parameter sets the security method for the station ComSecure and OFTP2 security are available If not set the value is taken from CNTL member COMSEC enables ComSecure security OFTP2 enables OFTP2 security SECFSET OFTP2 is only allowed with ODETTE protocol level 2 Compression COMPRESS NO OFTP OFTP2 OPT Defined in member STATIONS For SECFSET COMSEC ComSecure manual This parameter enables OFTP and OFTP2 compression If COMPR
130. INT DD SYSOUT KEYPRINT DD DSN P390A KEYPRINT DISP SHR KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR 1 3 9 keys from a sequential file to the key management The job KEYIMPRT can be used to import keys from a sequential file to the key management see KEYEXPRT too Example JOB KEYSIMPT EXEC PGM DFO54K PARM IMPT ALL STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT KEYIMPRT DD DSN P390A KEYPRINT DISP SHR KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR 1 3 10 Delete key from the key management The job KEYDELET can be used to delete key s from the key management Example A JOB KEYDEL EXEC PGM DF054K PARM ADMN STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR 2 SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR KEYPARAM DD KEYID XXXXXXXX DEL This job remove this key from the key management Info Version 1 0x01 Serial Number 1 0x01 Mode 1 0x01 Created At Jul 10 10 32 27 2003 UTC Created By unknown Owner unknown KeyPair ID a2 74 f0 96 validity Not Before Jul 10 10 32 25 2003 UTC Not After Oct 10 10 32 25 2003 UTC Subject Key Info Public Key Algorithm rsaEncryption Exponent 65537 0x10001 KeyData ac a4 30 f7 7c 9f 47 cf 0d 1d 9b ce 66 fa 4e b9 80 9a c4 83 fa 5e 93 97 04 2f 8c 0f b8 5b d3 cb fb 90 b3 6d 51 a4 6d 6a 65 52 9d 84 4e 68 fa a1 7a fe 22 5d d9 5f e2 2a b3 35 3d 4c c5 8c 86 d7 65 9
131. ION CODE WHEN ABEND CHARACTER FORMAT DS CL3 USER COMPLETION CODE WHEN ABEND CHARACTER FORMAT DS CORRESPONDING FIELD TO FIELD KDUSREXT OF THE KD RECORD USE IN DFUX001 EXTENSION STARTING WITH RVSMVS RELEASE 4 07 00 DC PL8 0 NUMBER OF BYTES IN DATASET PACKED FORMAT DC PL8 0 NUMBER OF BYTES TRANSMITTED PACKED FORMAT DC PL8 0 STARTING BLOCK NUMBER DURING RESTART PACKED DC PL8 0 TOTAL BLOCKS TRANSMITTED PACKED FORMAT EQU 5 2 rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix D rvs statistics D rvs statistics D 1 General Information Station Activity The rvs Station Activity program provides a station related summary of all important transmission data like number of transmissions number of transmitted bytes speed etc Statistics are available for e asingle station agroup of stations groups must be specified by the user see D 4a all stations Possible time intervals of calculation are e one or one month Line Activity The rvs Line Activity Program generates a chart which shows the usage of a switched line e per day of the chosen month or e per hour of the chosen day D 2 Prerequisites Dataset RVS TPSTAT Basic data will be accumulated in a permanent dataset which is used as data base of both of the rvs statistics programs It is called RVS TPSTAT hereafter and should have following attributes ORGANIZATION physical sequential RECORD FORMAT fixed blocked
132. IS STATION IS A RELAIS STATION KDRMTOPT EQU X 04 REMOTE OPTIONS ARE SPECIFIED KDBITS3 DS x KDRESREC EQU X 10 RESIDENT RECEIVE ENTRY KDRECTYP RR HAS BEEN x USED AS A MODEL FOR THIS RECORD ONLY IF rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix B Description of the rvs controldataset record KDRECORD KDTRANS R KDBITS4 DS x DS XL14 RESERVED KDBITS5 DS x BITSTRING KDRSTART EQU X 40 VALID ONLY IF KDTRANS R RESTART IN PROGRESS RESTART COUNT MAY BE ZERO DS XL59 RESERVED KDVOLNRD DS CL6 VOLUME NUMBER DISK KDVOLNRT DS CL6 VOLUME NUMBER TAPE DS XL61 RESERVED KDDEVTYP DS x DEVICE TYP MEANING OF THE BITS IS EQU X 80 GDG EQU X 08 DISK EQU Xx 20 MSS EQU x 22 JOB EQU Xx 10 THE RECEIVED DATASET CONTAINS JCL WHICH IS TO BE STARTED BY rvs SYSOUT EQU 01 THE RECEIVED DATA SHALL BE COPIED TO A SYSOUT QUEUE DS x RESERVED kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkxkxkxk INFORMATION FOR DATASET PROCESSING AFTER TRANSMISSION kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkxkxkxk KDDSNNEW DS OCL44 PHYSICAL DSNAME OF THE DATASET TO BE SENT OR RECEIVED KDDSNOLD DS CL44 ALIAS NAME FOR KDDSNNEW KDSYSOUT DS C SYSOUT CLASS IF KDDEVTYP SYSOUT KDDISP DS x DATA SET DISPOSITION KEEP EQU Xx 80 X 80 KEEP CATLG EQU Xx 40 X 40 CATLG UNCATLG EQU X 20 X 20 UNCATLG DELETE EQU X 10 X 10 DELETE KDSUNIT DS CL8 SYMBOLIC UNIT NAME K
133. ITOR J RRR HK KKK KKH KK hee e KH HK KKK KK HK KKK ke e ehe he hee ke eee jeje e e e He eje eee MONITOR EXEC PROC PDF0001A COND 0 EQ TEST 4 LT SAVE 0 LT SUBMIT rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix E Example for an extended rvs Start Procedure Remarks for the single steps within this job Step TEST The first step of this job determines if the dataset RVS KDSAVE TEMP is cataloged or not If it is cataloged this step ends with condition code 0 and all following steps will be bypassed and the rvs Monitor will not start This indicates that the temporary copy of the Controldataset is not yet processed and deleted see also step SUBMIT If RVS KDSAVE TEMP is not cataloged this step ends with returncode 4 and processing of the following job steps continues Step SAVE This step creates backup copies of Control and Logdataset if the usage of the Logdataset is 30 or more In this case the step ends with returncode 0 and step DELETE will be bypassed If copies are suppressed because of parameter NOSAVE 30 step DELETE is executed as next and RVS KDSAVE TEMP will be deleted Step DELETE This step is executed only if creation of a backup copy for the Controldataset has been suppressed because of parm NOSAVE 30 in step SAVE Step SUBMIT This step is executed only if creation of a backup copy for the Controldataset has been done A separate job is copied from member SAVETEMP of the rvs Ta
134. KETS LOGICAL CHANNELO LLCLIST LLC4 LLC4 MUST BE USED LUNAME X30A0A01 LU NAME NCPGRP G03050 NAME OF NCP GROUP MACRO NDRETRY 1 NUMBER OF TP NP RETRY NPRETRY 7 NUMBER OF RETRIES TPTIMER ELAPSED OWNER DUMMY PAD NO NO LLC5 OPERAND IS USED PKTMODL 8 MUST BE HIGHER THAN VWINDOW PUNAME X30A0A NAME OF THE PU SPAN SP11 STATION DTE THIS PHYSICAL LINK IS A DTE rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit TDTIMER 1 TIMER TO WAIT FOR ND RETRIES TRAN NO NO TRANSLATION IS TO BE PERFORMED TPTIMER 1 X 25 T1 TIMER IN SECONDS X25LCG LCGN 0 LOGICAL CHANNEL GROUP 0 ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce INSTRUCTIONS FOR 15 SWITCHED VIRTUAL CIRCUITS e oe ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e ce ce ce ce ce ce cec e e ce cec e e e e e e e e A A x 25 SPAN SP11 LCN 1 15 15 VIRTUELLE LINES TYPE SWITCHED OUFINDX 1 DEFIND IN X250UFT MACRO VCCINDX 1 VIRTUAL CICUIT CALL INOUT COMMITO 4 COMMIT TIMEOUT ISTATUS ACTIVE MAXLU 3 NUMBER LU S FROM PU IN VTAM NCPGRP G03051 NCP GROUP NAME OWNER DUMMY RETVCTO 30 TIMER BETWEEN RETRANSMISSIONS RETVCCT 5 NUMBER OF RETRANSMISSIONS Remarks Parameter MAXPKTL of the X25VCCPT macro corresponds with the rvs start parameter PSIZE T
135. KEYUSAGE CERTSIGN Generate a signed keypair for your testuser rvsMVS certificate RACF admin maybe rvs admin RACDCERT GENCERT ID TESTUSR WITHLABEL TESTKEYLABEL SUBJECTSDN CN TEST SIZE 1024 NOTAFTER DATE 2015 01 15 KEYUSAGE HANDSHAKE DATAENCRYPT SIGNWITH CERTAUTH LABEL TESTCA PCICC The keyword PCICC defines the private key as hardware protected Without this keyword the private key is created as clear key If you are using a IKJEFTO1 utility and running a batch job in a paralell sysplex environment make sure your job is running in the same LPAR that RVS will run You can use the JOBPARM S XXXX statement to do that Connect your generated key to the keyring RACF admin maybe rvs admin RACDCERT CONNECT ID TESTUSR LABEL TESTKEYLABEL RING TESTRING USAGE PERSONAL ID TESTUSR rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features Connect the signing key s all keys in the trust chain in case of self signature just the TESTCA to the keyring RACF admin RACDCERT CONNECT CERTAUTH LABEL TESTCA RING TESTRING USAGE CERTAUTH ID TESTUSR Export your certificate to be used by partner stations RACDCERT EXPORT LABEL TESTKEYLABEL ID TESTUSR DSN FIXOBKR CERT OWNCERT CER FORMAT CERTDER If CERSTORE RACF Import the certificate of partner station RACF admin maybe rvs admin RACDCERT ADD R02 TLS EVO TEP ID TESTUSR TRUST WITHLABEL PA
136. KK KK KKK rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Reference Utility program DF076A eK RVS REFERENCE TABLE NECESSARY PARAMETER NONE OPTIONAL PARAMETERS INFILE OUTFILE FMT f STATUS TYPE SID DSNAME REFNR NRSYN f QTM QDATE QDAY QTIME f TTM TDATE TDAY TTIME IGI IIIT II REFJOB EXEC PGM DF076A PARM t STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR KD DD DSN RVS KD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD DSN DISP NEW CATLG DELETE UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 1 1 SYSOUT SYSOUT SYSIN DD Note File SYSIN is not needed if the necessary search arguments are given in the parameter area in EXEC statement The program is callable from another application program as well e g assembler CALL DF076A INPARM OUTPARM GENPARM SYSTDCB VL INPARM is a parameter area to contain either keyword parameters or fixed format input record to the program OUTPARM is a parameter area to contain the response from the program after the execution This area must be large enough for the output otherwise the result is unpredictable GENPARM is the rvs general parameter area when it is available SYSTDCB is an area which contains an opened DCB for SYSOUT dataset Note e One or more call parameters may be omitted
137. KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK COPY1 EXEC PGM IEBGENER STEPLIB DD DSN SYS1 LINKLIB DISP SHR SYSUT1 DD amp DAY amp TIME AUTOMATIC JOBSTART OF rvs FAILED RECEIVED DATASET amp DSN REMOTE STATION amp SID NEW DATASET NAME amp DSNNEW DISK VOLUME amp VOL JOB WHICH COULD NOT BE SUBMITTED BY rvs amp JOBDSN amp MEM SYSUT2 DD SYSOUT A SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSIN DD DUMMY Remarks 1 It is assumed that this member contains a complete job incl valid jobcard The above job should be treated as an example this member may contain any other job steps as well as the above job 2 During submit of member JFPJCL rvs performs replacements of the following characterstrings amp DAY replaced by the current julian day within the year amp TIME replaced by the current time format HH MM amp SID replaced by the identification of the remote sending station amp DSN replaced by the datasetname of the received dataset amp DSNNEW replaced by the new datasetname of the received dataset important only if the rename function is used amp VOL replaced by the disk volume number onto which the received dataset has been stored amp JOBDSN replaced by the dataset name of the jobdataset PDS amp MEM replaced by the membername of the jobdataset PDS member amp RUSER replaced by the RACF userid if available of the job user who created the resident receive entry 3 Submit of member JFPJCL is perfor
138. LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT amp PAPIER KD DD DSN RVS KD DISP SHR KDSAVE DD DSN RVS KD SAVE DISP SHR RVSLOG DD DSN RVS LOG DISP SHR LOGSAVE DD DSN RVS LOG SAVE DISP SHR rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Remarks The parameter NOSAVE nn controls if a copy of control and logdataset is to be created or not nn specifies in percent the usage filling of the logdataset and may be a value between 00 and 99 A copy of control and Log dataset is performed only if the logdataset is at least filled by nn 96 This allows the combination of this procedure with the rvs Start procedure without creating backup copies during every start of rvs See Appendix E of this manual for such a combination If execution of the procedure results in creation of backup copies the program DF072A00 ends with returncode 0 if backup copies are suppressed because of the parameter NOSAVE nn a returncode of 4 is set by DF072A00 The datasets RVS KDSAVE and RVS LOGSAVE must be created before execution of this procedure or the allocation must be done with DISPZ NEW Both datasets are sequential files RVS KDSAVE requires 1 3 of the space which is allocated to RVS KD RVS LOGSAVE requires the same space as RVS LOG Specification of DCB attributes is not necessary program DF072A00 uses hard coded values in each case These are LRECL Record Format RVS KDSAVE 1000
139. LU XLUNAME1 MODE NAME MODNAME1 REMOTE STATION 106 DATE 92 223 TIME 13 28 5197 RPLADDR 07945538 RPLDATA 00206270 87953B66 079454C8 00000000 00001004 00800000 00038310 00000000 07945378 00000000 29800000 00000000 00000013 00000000 10309450 00000000 RC 00 00 00 80800000 40000000 00000000 079455A8 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 80008012 00000000 00000000 00000000 RPL EXTENSION C1D7D7C3 10140000 0100000A 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 08000000 00 090 0009 00000000 80008800 000000 8 0000010C 10309450 00000000 00001000 01000000 00000000 07945538 E7D3E4D5 C1D4C5F1 D4D6C4D5 1 4 4 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 APPCCMD CONTROL ALLOC QUALIF Y ALLOCD WHATRCV ZERO RETURNCODE PRI SEC 00000000 OK 130502FF 0003D100 0006D9E5 E2D9C3E5 00000000 EL ace Eia ECOG jenuejy uonejeisu SAIWSA Zon JO 92210 10 Sjduiex3 0156 5 eroeds 8 rvsMVS Installation Manual 8 Special Functions Procedures 8 2 6 Format of TCP IP Trace For each executed TCP IP command socket interface assembler macro API a formatted trace record consisting of several rows is written Trace records are separated by a line of hyphens An example is printed on the next page Explanation of trace fields 1st row SOCKET REMOTE ADDRESS REMOTE PORT REMOTE STATION DATE TIME 274 row REQUEST Status of request gn Request depend
140. Layout of the 3270 screen when using the remote operating function rvs assumes to work with a screen with 24 rows and 80 columns After an SNA session to rvs has been established the screen will be cleared The first row is always used as an input field If any inputdata are entered for example rvs commands the input data must start in column 1 The second row remains blank All other rows are used for display of rvs messages Writing of messages to these rows is done in a wrap arround mode The last displayed message is always followed by a line consisting of characters All rvs messages which are displayed on the screen are preceeded by the sequence sid where sid denotes the rvs station name of the local rvs installation In some cases the 7th byte of the rvs message identifier is changed to the character for example DF3000 is changed to DF3000Q Logon from a 3270 screen to the rvs monitor A logon request to rvs is initiated if the sequence LOGON APPLID DATA OPER is entered from the screen name denotes the application id which is used for this function The application id must be defined within VTAM name must be the same value as specified within the rvs start parameter RMOPAPPL If the logon request is successful an SNA session has been established an initial message will be sent to the screen this message is starting with the charactes P rvs followed by the release number and the rvs
141. MAXOUT 1 MAXPATH 0 PACING 1 PASSLIM 1 PUTYPE 1 SPAN SP11 VPACING 1 ISTATUS ACTIVE T30XOD02 LU LOCADDR 0 MODETAB LMTrvsX PACING 1 1 SSCPFM USSSCS SPAN SP11 VPACING 2 FF FF FF HF HF HF F FF ox Note Coding of IDNUM During session establishment NPSI generates an idnum value This hex value must match with one of the idnum values defined in your switched node The lowest idnum value is 00002 followed by 00004 00006 etc If you initiate a call out the NPSI generates an idnum beginning with the number of the lowest non busy channel If you receive a call in the NPSI generates the idnum of the highest non busy SVC Example 1 You defined 5 SVCs on your multi channel link A call out will trigger the NPSI to generate the idnum value 00002 A call in will lead to 0000A Please consider that the sequence of idnum mustn t necessarily start with 00002 If you have defined other SVCs in your NCP you have to take this into account NPSI stage 1 output shows the sequence of all SVCs assigned to your NCP Idnums can be found out as follows The first SVC permanent virtual circuits will not be counted gets the fictious number 00002 the second SVC 00004 the third 00006 etc independent whether it will be used by rvs or not Example 2 You have installed 2 multi channel links on the same NCP On the one multi channel link you use 1 PVC and 4 SVCs on the other you use the first 4 SVCs for RVS If you
142. Manual 8 Special Functions Procedures e e MAIN SYSTEM XR33 RVSETP1 EXEC PGM FTP STEPLIB DD DSN SYS1 LINKLIB DISP SHR SYSUDUMP DD SyYSOUT SYSDUMP DD SyYSOUT INPUT DD DISP SHR DSN FIXOGG3 FTP FTPID FD2FA4 FAA4 F000019 OUTPUT DD DISP OLD DSN FIX0GG3 FTP FTPOD FD2FA4 FA4 F000019 SYSPRINT DD SyYSOUT RVSFTP2 EXEC PGM IEBPTPCH SYSPRINT DD SyYSOUT SYSUT1 DD DSN RVSFTP1 OUTPUT DISP OLD SYSUT2 DD SYSOUT PRINT MAXFLDS 1 RECORD FIELD 80 RVSFTP3 EXEC PGM IEFBR14 NEW DD DISP NEW CATLG CATLG DCB RVSFTP INPUT SPACE TRK 1 1 DSN FIX0003 TEST FTPND FD2FA4 FA4 F000019 TRACE DATA BLOCK FTP OUTPUT FILE gt SEND REMOTE STATION FA4 DATASET NAME FIX0004 TESTX33 QUEUEING TIME 97 133 11 19 50 EZA1450I MVS TCP IP FTP V3R1 EZA14561 OPEN name of foreign host EZA1772I FTP EXIT has been set 2 1736 conn 143 163 23 4 00021 EZA15541 Connecting to 143 163 23 4 port 21 220 SFTPSER IBM MVS V3R1 at OR11 11 21 17 on 05 13 97 220 Connection will close if idle for more than 50 minutes EZA1459I USER identify yourself to the host EZA1701I gt gt gt USER FIX0004 331 Send password please EZA1701I gt gt gt 55 k x 230 FIX0004 is logged on EZA1460I Command 2 1736 TYPE E EZA17011 gt gt gt 200 Representation type is EBCDIC EZA1460I Command EZA17361 MODE S EZA17011 gt gt gt MO
143. N LOGICAL ORDER KEY OF RECORD kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk KDRECTYP DS CL2 RECORD TYPE AR ACTIVE RECEIVING AS ACTIVE SEND SEND REQUEST CR COMPLETE RECEIVE WRITTEN AT END ABEND OF RECEIVING CS COMPLETE SEND WRITTEN AT END OF TRANSMISSION SEND RR RESIDENT RECEIVE RECORD ORG 1 KDTRANS DS TRANSMISSION DIRECTION R RECEIVE S SEND KDREMOTE DS CL3 ID OF REMOTE STATION DS CL5 RESERVED KDDSN DS CL44 DATA SET NAME UP TO 44 CHARS THIS NAME IS A VIRTUELL OR REFERENCE NAME OF THE DATASET USED FOR COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE LOCAL AND THE REMOTE STATION IT MAY BUT NEED NOT BE THE PHYSICAL DSNAME THE PHYSICAL DSNAME SHOULD BE OBTAINED FROM FIELD KDDSNNEW QUEUING DATE OF THE DATASET QUEUING TIME OF THE DATASET TRANSMISSION START DATE TRANSMISSION START TIME FF FF KDREADYD DS KDREADYT DS KDSTARTD DS KDSTARTT DS KDKEYEND EQU fr ty on fu e e oe e ce ee e cede fe ce de ce ce e ce ce ee ce e ce e ce e e ce e ce ce e ce ce e ce ce e ce ce e ce cec ce ec e e kv ke xk x CONTROL INFORMATION FOR THIS TRANSMISSION oe ce ce ce ce ce ce e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce RRR ce ce e e ce ee e e ee eec ce ce e e 333 DS XL2 RESERVED KDBITS DS OXL4 MIXED FLAGS KDBITS1 DS x KDBQISID EQU X 08 KDRECORD QUEUED BY OPERATOR WITH I SID KDBITS2 DS x KDRELAIS EQU X 40 TH
144. NCLUDED SRCPRFX XN301 SUBAREA TYPSYS OS STAGE2 PROVIDED FOR OS VERSION V4R2 NCP VERSION X25NET DM YES NETWORK SEND LAPB COMMAND NETTYPE 1 TYPE 1 NETWORK CPHINDX 1 1 ENTRY DEFINED FOR VCCPT OUHINDX 1 1 ENTRY FOR OUFT e oe ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce cec ee e ecce e e e e e e e A x x INSTRUCTIONS FOR VIRTUAL CIRCUITS e oe ce ce ce ce ce e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e ce e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce KKK ce ce ce e e eee ee e e e e e e A A x X25VCCPT INDEX 1 FIRST ENTRY IN VCCPT MAXPKTL 128 MAX PACKET LENGTH VWINDOW 2 TRANSMIT RECEIVE WINDOW SIZE 2 INSLOW 6 0 FREE BUFFER 6 HIGHER THAN NCP X250UFT INDEX 1 DUMMY ENTRY OUFT e ce ce ce ce ce ce e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce eee ce ce ce e ee cese ee e e e e e 3333 INSTRUCTIONS FOR MULTI CHANNEL LINK X30A0 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkkkxkk X30A0 X25MCH ADDRESS 047 3725 ADDRESS FULL DUPLEX FRMLGTH 131 MAXIMUM FRAME LENGTH LCGDEF 0 15 ON LCCGN 0 HIGHEST CHANL 15 MWINDOW 7 FRAM WINDOW 7 ANS CONT CONTINUE FOR NCP PU MACRO DBIT NO D BIT NOT USED IN PCNE DSABLTO 3 DISABLE TIMEOUT IN SECOND ENABLTO 3 ENABLE TIMEOUT IN SECOND GATE GENERAL GATE FUNCTION MUST BE USED ISTATUS ACTIVE LCNO NOTUSED INCOMING PAC
145. NCTION NO 5 FOUND During the execution of the Key delete function was no found keys for delete rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix I Key Data Utility Program DF054K CSUTLBI CSUTLCI CSUTLDI CSUTLEP CSUTLFI CSUTLFI CSUTLGP kKkKKKKKKKK PUBLIC KEY XXxXxd Summary message Protocol message only PUBLIC KEY NOT FOUND During the execution of the Key function was no public key found kkKKKKKKK PRIVATE KEY xXx Summary message Protocol message only PRIVATE KEY NOT FOUND During the execution of the Key function was no private key found PROCESSING OF LIST MANAGEMENT STARTED The message occurs during list function start processing Protocol message only PROCESSING OF LIST MANAGEMENT ENDED The message occurs during list function end processing Protocol message only CSERUTIL KEY MANAGEMENT PROGRAMM The message occurs during start Protocol message only PROBAID The identification of release level of program The message occurs during key generation list of input parameters Protocol message only rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Key Data Utility Program DF054K 1 7 Key Data record description This chapter contains the KEYRECORD description in terms of an assembler space description It would be helpful for interpretation of listing of the RVS KEY DS Remember that the data will be compressed and ther
146. NE macro for a 2400 baud switched line with autodial function based on V 25bis LINE ADDRESS yyy xx 0 xx 1 V25BIS YES DLSS AUTO YES DUPLEX HALF SPEED 2400 TYPE EP PAD NO CLOCKNG INT CODE EBCDIC TERM 2020 STATOPT MDG14MX22 rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit Remarks xx denotes the last two characters of the MVS address for this line as specified in the IODEVICE macro yyy denotes the address of the control unit for the V 25bis interface 3 2 Definitions for SNA component of rvs This section describes VTAM definitions which are necessary for a SNA connection between the local and a remote rvs installation The following requirements must be satisfied in order to establish a SNA connection with a remote rvs installation e The local rvs installation must include the SNA component e The remote rvs installation must include the SNA component rvsMVS or the remote side has installed rvsVSE SNA e Local and remote hosts must be connected via SNA network It is possible to connect PU type 2 computers with rvs using the SNA component In this case rvs compatible software is required for the remote computer but the restriction to leased line connections must not be necessary For a list of PU type 2 computers which are already connected to rvs using the SNA component see rvsMVS Interface Description VTAM definitions for the local rvs insta
147. NT DD DSN RVS DF078B DF076A DISP NEW CATLG UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 500 500 RLSE STEP FOR ALLOCATING THE NECESSARY DATASETS AND STARTING THE REXX SCRIPT TSO ENVIRONMENT REXX EXEC PGM IKJEFTO1 SYSTSPRT DD SYSOUT LOAD DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR KDPARSER DD DSN RVS EXEC KDPARSER DISP SHR KD DD DSN RVS KD DISP SHR SYSIN DD DSN RVS EXEC SORT78B DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD DSN ALCTMP SYSPRINT DISP SHR SORTIN DD DSN ALCTMP SYSPRINT DISP SHR SORTOUT DD DSN RVS DF078B ICEMAN DISP NEW CATLG UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 500 500 RLSE OUTFILE DD DSN RVS DF078B RESULT DISP UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 500 500 RLSE DCB LRECL 132 RECFM FB BLKSIZE 5900 TSO COMMAND HERE WE CALL THE REXX SCRIPT SXSTSIN DD EXEC RVS EXEC DF078B DSN FIX LVL L2 DAY 017 EXEC STEP FOR DELETING TEMP FILES DELTMP2 EXEC PGM IDCAMS SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSIN DD DELETE RVS DF078B DF076A DELETE RVS DF078B ICEMAN The JCL will start the REXX script DF078B which can be found in rvs Exec Dataset The script fetches information from rvs control dataset with the use of DF076A These data will be sorted and formatted similary to the output of DF078A Requirements for running DF078B ICEMAN alias for DFSORT DFO076A shipped with rvsMVS IDCAMS IKJEFTO1 TSO Environment There are 4 files which are
148. P SHR Remarks rvsMVS Installation Manual 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS The space for the control dataset has been selected for approx 30 transmissions per day If more transmissions are planned or already executed the space specification must be increased The IDCAMS parameter KEYS SHAREOPTIONS and RECORDSIZE should not be modified If the specified volume is shared between two or more systems the control dataset should be created on the same volume where the user catalog containing the catalog entry for the control dataset resides If you use SMS please use the job DEFKDSMS to create the control dataset Warning e f catalog and controldataset reside on different volumes in a shared environment interlock situations and system hang ups may occur e f you use KD dataset SYSPLEX environment you can get a problem with duplicate indexes The Problem can occur if a new EXTEND of KD data set is created Solution The problem is fixed if your load library is APF authorized If not you have to use a primary allocation of KD data set which is large enough to avoid build of new EXTEND for KD data set 5 6 Creation of rvs Log Dataset The following job member DEFLOG of rvs Tables Dataset may be used to create this dataset JOB DEFLOG EXEC PGM DF071A00 PARM RECORDS 500 STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT rvsLOG DD DSN RVS LOG DISP NEW CATLG DELETE UNIT u
149. P as file transfer protocol the temporarily stored file isn t readable or processable without using special rvs programs Using OFTP rvs transfers the following special control information from the sender to the receiver case of e rvsMVS PDS File Transfer Use of the complete user fields of SSID and SFID OFTP protocol record This fields contain some flags leaded by an eye catcher RF for initiator s outgoing protocol records and RF for incoming protocol records Additionally rvsMVS uses a SFID extension SFX1 to transfer partitioned data set information e rvs internal compression GZIP compatible Use of the complete user fields of SSID and SFID OFTP protocol record This fields contain some flags leaded by an eye catcher RF RF e rvs external Security and Compression Feature Enhancement of the first data block with an rvs header leaded by an eye catcher which consists of the string RVSF with some hex characters in total 10 characters The length of the complete header is variable and depends on the used features 9 2 Partioned Data Set PDS Transfer The PDS Transfer Feature of rvsMVS for OFTP stations uses the well known functions of PDS Transfer from the rvsMVS SNA component e unload of a PDS during creation of Send Request e load of the PDS data set after receiving Whereas the header record of the SNA component transfers the data set attributes OFTP Protocol architecture gives no place for such informa
150. PT Write keys from a sequential dataset to the key management DD Statements KEYDATA key management dataset VSAM Dataset KEYIMPRT sequential input file SYSPRINT program logfile rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix I Key Data Utility Program DF054K A JOB KEYSIMPT EXEC PGM DF054K PARM IMPT ALL STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT KEYIMPRT DD DSN P390A KEYPRINT DISP SHR KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR 1 4 6 Funktion ADMN Delete key s from the key management DD Statements KEYDATA key management dataset VSAM Dataset SYSPRINT x program logfile KEYPARM parameters KEYID Id of Key which is to delete hex value A JOB KEYDEL EXEC PGM DF054K PARM ADMN STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR 2 SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR KEYPARAM DD KEYID A274F096 DEL This job remove this key from key management Info Version 1 0x01 Serial Number 1 0x01 Mode 1 0x01 Created At Jul 10 10 32 27 2003 UTC Created By unknown Owner unknown KeyPair ID a2 74 f0 96 validity Not Before Jul 10 10 32 25 2003 UTC Not After Oct 10 10 32 25 2003 UTC Subject Key Info Public Key Algorithm rsaEncryption Exponent 65537 0x10001 KeyData EndData rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix I Key Data Utility Program DF054K 1 5 Return codes of DF054K
151. R STATIONS SESSIONS JOBCARD JOBCARDF STAPEJC RTAPEJC SYSOUTJC FTPRVSJC KEY PFKEYS KEYDATA TRNTABLE USERDATA USERLOG LOGDATA LOGLOG Y EXTCONF Allocation of Internal Reader for example used for jobstart after receiption of a dataset Since version 4 01 00 If this statement is used dynamic allocation deallocation and open close are used once only Allocation of rvs Stations Table contains information about all connected stations Allocation of rvs Sessions Table information about the transmission protocol and other specifications which are to be used for the communication with certain stations This information is used for all transmissions working with the SNA component Allocation of a valid jobcard used for example if received datasets are to be copied to tape or sysout Allocation of a valid jobcard used for for jobs of the FTP component Job control used if a dataset queued for transmission resides on tape and must be copied to disk before transmission Job control used if a dataset is to be copied to tape after receiption for example if the start parameter DDEVTYP TAPE is active and no other control for receiption of this dataset has been specified Job control to copy a received dataset into a SYSOUT queue for example if the SYSOUT parameter has been specified within a resident receive entry for this dataset Job control used for FTP file transfer FTP component only Specificati
152. RECORD LENGTH 39 bytes BLOCK SIZE 19500 bytes may be changed SPACE 1 cylinder approx Important Each transmission is represented within RVS TPSTAT by 39 byte record Assumed that the average number of transmissions per day is 30 the chosen space of 1 cylinder of a 3380 disk approx 40000 bytes track is big enough to accumulate statistics data of more than 1 year 500 days If more transmissions are planned or already executed the space specification must be increased to avoid overflow D 3 Job to gain the basic data for the statistics Basic data will be obtained from a rvs log file called RVS LOG SAVE assigned DD name LOGSAVE within kdsave logsave procedure see member PDF0014A of RVS TABLES Important It is necessary to run the accumulation job immediately after the kdsave logsave procedure to be sure that RVS LOG SAVE contains only data since the last save procedure rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix D rvs statistics The following job member ACCUM of dataset RVS TABLES is an example for starting the accumulation job JOB kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk ACCUMULATION OF STATISTICS DATA kk Coke he e he e he e he KKK He he He he He he KEIR KK ERE KKK ACCUM EXEC PGM DF555B STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSIN DD DSN RVS LOGSAVE DISP SHR SYSOUT DSN RVS TPSTAT DISP MOD DCB RECFM FB LRECL 39 BLKSIZE 19500
153. REFN reference number non MVS only FTPRESP response FTPSESS number of parallel transmissions FTPUID user id TYPE type of stations mandatory parameter Note Additional to these parameters subset 0 must be specified Description of rvs Station Table Parameters in detail ACCESMET t F TP ACME Access method must be FTP Mandatory parameter FTPERESP FERS NO YES Specification whether an end to end response file shall be sent will be expected after data file transmission FTPERESP YES or not FTPERESP NO If parameter FTPRESP is set to NO then then FTPERESP will be set to NO too Optional parameter FTPHFILE FHF NO YES non MVS stations only Specification whether an additional information file including further information about the transmission partners etc header file shall be sent after data file transmission FTPHFILE YES or not FTPHFILE NO If parameter FTPHFILE is set to NO then parameters FTPRESP and FTPERESP will be set to NO too Optional parameter Default values are YES if TYPEZMVS is specified NO else rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset FTPHNAME FHN name name 1 64 characters Remote IP address This address may be specified either in dotted decimal notation for example FTPHNAME 10 211 036 20 or as a symbolic name length up to 24 bytes for example FTPHNAME VWRVSB No default value FTPPASS FPS te
154. RENT SOFTWARE ddd yy will be displayed after start of the rvs Monitor where ddd is the julian date and yy is the year of the expiration date 4 2 rvs Controldataset The rvs Controldataset RVS KD is organized as a VSAM KSDS All information required on the individual transmissions are stored in the Controldataset It is the central information and controlfile a kind of catalog within the rvs system and thus an interface between the rvs Monitor on one side and rvs users on the other side rvsMVS Installation Manual 4 rvs System Files All requests for transmissions of files are stored in this dataset and if active the rvs Monitor scans this file for transmission requests and transmits these files as soon as a transmission path is available So it is possible to obtain for example status information about all transmissions which e have not yet started queued send requests are just active in this case record counters for a later restart are saved in the file are complete so it is always possible to display information about transmissions of the last days The control dataset contains additional information about the various processing options that shall be executed after a file has been received for example automatic jobstart Remark The rvs control dataset should be reorganized from time to time depending on the number of Cl and CA splits which have occurred during normal operation of rvs Too many s
155. RH can be compiled and linked using JOB53RH DF053RS be compiled and linked using JOB53RS Note The encryption module checks the quality of the random number If the quality insufficient encryption will not work include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt static int getRandom int random_number_length unsigned char buffer int status 0 int return_code 0 int reason_code 0 int exit_data_length 0 unsigned char exit data 4 0 unsigned char form 8 RANDOM unsigned char random number 8 int offset 0 int bytesLeft random number length while bytesLeft gt 0 amp amp status 0 status CSNBRNG amp return_code amp reason_code exit_data_length exit data form random number if status 0 t if bytesLeft 8 t memcpy buffer offset random number bytesLeft offset offset bytesLeft rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features bytesLeft 0 else memcpy buffer offset random_number 8 offset offset 8 bytesLeft bytesLeft 8 return status int DFO53R int length unsigned char buffer if length gt 8192 return 1 return getRandom length buffer For the software solution we show one possible example Please contact your system administration and your operational stuff to check the consequences It comes from the cryptlib software package which is the base for
156. ROLINTERVALSIZE 16384 INDEX NAME P390A V2CS NEWOl KEYS INDEX CONTROLINTERVALSIZE 2048 The IDCAMS parameter KEYS SHAREOPTIONS RECORDSIZE should not be modified Do not change the DD Name KEYDATA of the initialize step In contrast to the Control Data set of rvs there is no Log Data set for the Key Data dataset 1 3 3 Initialize Key Datasets VSAM D Statements KEYDATA key management dataset VSAM Dataset SYSPRINT program logfile atus E KEYINIT EXEC PGM DF079S STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT 1 3 4 Generate a key pair of your own The job KEYGEN can be used to create a new key pair Example A JOB GENKEYS EXEC PGM DF054K PARM GENKEYS STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR KEYPARAM DD KSIZE 1024 KPERIOD 12M KNAME RVST V2CS NEWO1 KEY Note For a description of parameters see appendix 1 4 1 1 3 5 your own key pair to the key management rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix I Key Data Utility Program DF054K The job KEYIMPAL can be used to import your own key pair to the key management Set UID to your own SID Example A JOB KEYSIMPT EXEC PGM DFO54K PARM KEYS STEPLIB DD DSN P39
157. RTNERKEYLABEL Dataset must have VB format Connect the partner certificate to the keyring RACF admin maybe rvs admin RACDCERT CONNECT ID TESTUSR LABEL PARTNERKEYLABEL RING TESTRING USAGE PERSONAL ID TESTUSR in this example the partner certificate is a selfsigned one In case of a CA signed partner certificate all keys in the trust chain must be connected to the keyring too The certificate named in the CERLABEL parameter of STATIONS member however must always be the public key certificate of the partner station Refresh the in storage RACF profiles RACF admin maybe rvs admin SETROPTS RACLIST FACILITY REFRESH Useful commands to list information LISTUSER TESTUSR OMVS SEARCH CLASS CSFSERV RLIST CSFSERV AUTHUSER RACDCERT LISTRING ID TESTUSR RACDCERT LIST ID TESTUSR RACDCERT LIST LABEL TESTCA CERTAUTH In case of key protection by RACF Check if keys are protected SEARCH CLASS CSFKEYS IRR DIGTCERT G Define resource profile for user RDEFINE CSFKEYS IRR DIGTCERT TESTUSR UACC NONE SETROPTS RACLIST CSFKEYS REFRESH Give permission to use own keys PERMIT IRR DIGTCERT TESTUSR CLASS CSFKEYS ID TESTUSR ACC READ SETROPTS RACLIST CSFKEYS REFRESH rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features Configure parameters in TABLES Dataset of rvsMVS rvs admin STATIONS 2 ADDR RVS TEST DETID ORVSTEST ENDPW XXX ECVPW XXX TODIAL
158. RY DISPLAY DELETE USER SEPARATION ENTRY DISPLAY USER SEPARATION LOG ENTRY S qd 222 4 DE 8 X Z H RVS INFORMATIONS The start panel DFO0O0UO1 was expanded with the menu items 6 X Y Z rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features Create a user mapping entry The menu item X shows a panel which allows the user to create new user mapping entries A user mapping entry is used by the user separation to map a given remote user id to a local RACF user id RUSER LUSER USER JOBCARD SID SID of the remote station USERID Remote user id transmitted by the remote station during the OFTP communication LUSERID Local RACF user id used for mapping the remote user id JOBCARD Name of the dataset containing a jobcard for the remote user id This jobcard will be used for job submission by a resident receive entry rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features Display Update Delete of a USP Entry The menu item Y shows a panel which allows the user to display update or delete user mapping entries The panel DFYOOPOO0 helps to select a corresponding entry by specifying some selection criteria SID SID of the remote station RUID Remote user id If there are several user mapping entries matching the selection criteria these are indicated as a list in the panel DFY20P00 rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features Entering S in front of a list entry shows
159. Running Installation Tests 7 Running Installation Tests This chapter describes some functions of rvs which should be tested in order to see if these functions are working as described or not In the latter case possible error information has to be analyzed and handling of rvs or a part of the installation must be corrected 7 1 Start of rvs Monitor Procedure PDF0001A Alias MONITOR After installation of rvs the first step of testing should be the start of the rvs monitor procedure PDFO00014 This may be done as job or started task After initialization of internal tables the rvs monitor writes the message DF3001A RVS OC READY to console This message indicates that communication with the rvs monitor may be done by using the reply assigned with the above message Any commands may be entered for the monitor see the rvsMVS Operation Manual for a description of the rvs commands The monitor may be stopped by entering the command P RVS During start of the monitor all rvs startparameters are stored within the rvs control dataset parameter record This parameter record is used for example by the rvs ISPF panels which may be tested after the first start of the monitor Test of switched BSC line s Switched BSC lines should be activated within the monitor by entering the command A III where III denotes the subchannel address of the line If everything is ok message DF5621A A 111 READY TO TRANSMIT
160. STORE STARTS The message occurs after new security key data are read sucessfully from the KEYIN or DDNAME input Protocol message only CSUTL2P KEY UPDATE FUNCTION XXXXXXXXX 25 CHAR XXXXXXX reserved CSUTL3E ERROR DURING 1 1 2 3 The message describes an error The space may contain one of the following error reasons PREPARING KEY DATA SET UPDATE Summary message above this message the error reason will be shown PARAMETER PROCESSING The message occurs during start Protocol message only KEY DS OPEN PROCESSING The Key Data data set RVS KEY DS could not be opened Look for VSAM return code in the system message protocol KEY VALUE OPEN PROCESSING The Security Key value data set user KEYDS could not be opened Look for correct DDNAME parameter or KEYIN DD statement rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix I Key Data Utility Program DF054K LIST DS OPEN PROCESSING The message output data set could not be opened Look for correct definition of the job STATION PARM NOT COMPLETE The message could occur if a parameter set is not complete but end of data is indicated Action terminated the key will not be written into the Key Data data set READ KEYID NO HEX VALUES The KEYID parameter contains other characters than 0 9 A B C D E and F Action terminated the key will not be written into the Key Data data set READ KEYID NO HEX SYNTAX The KEYID parameter is not enclosed in apostro
161. T DSN RVS KD DISP SHR RVSLOG DD DSN RVS LOG DISP SHR KDSAVE DSN RVS KDSAVE TEMP UNIT SYSDA 73 DISP NEW CATLG DELETE SPACE CYL 1 1 LOGSAVE DD DSN RVS LOGSAVE TEMP DISP SHR DCB LRECL 1000 BLKSIZE 20000 RECFM FB 8 e e KKK KK HK HK KKK KK HK KKK KH HK IKK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KK e He KK KKK HK KKK KK KKK KEK DELETE RVS KDSAVE TEMP 8 e e KKK KK KH HK KKK KK HK KKK KKH KI KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKH KK KEK KKK KKK KKK KK KK DELETE EXEC PGM IDCAMS COND 0 EQ TEST 4 NE SAVE SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSIN DD DELETE RVS KDSAVE TEMP RRR RK KKH KKK KK ke ee hehe ee HK HK KKK e e e e IKK e He e He he hee e eee jeje e e e He eje ee e He e He e He e e KKK KKK 7 SUBMIT OF SAVETEMP TO COPY KDSAVE TO TAPE 8 k e e He e e ee HK HK KKK KH HK KKK ke ke HK IKK ke e e He he hee ke ehe je ee e e He eje eee He e He e He e KKK SUBMIT EXEC PGM DF901A00 COND 0 EQ TEST 0 LT SAVE STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR IN DD DSN RVS TABLES SAVETEMP DISP SHR OUT DD SYSOUT A INTRDR J 8 e e KKK e e ke HK HK KKK KKH KI KKK HK HK IKK KKK KKK KKH KK IKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK DELETE OLD RECORDS FROM CONTROLDATASET PDF0009A EXEC PROC PDF0009A INTV 2 COND 0 EQ TEST 4 LT SAVE 0 LT SUBMIT KKK KKK KH HK KKK e ke HK IKK KK KK IKK ke e e He he hee ke ehe jeje ee e e eje ee e e e He e rvs MON
162. TE data unit SSID will be responded by an ESID data unit end of session with reason code 03 user code not known or invalid See also corresponding parameter of rvs stations table x 25 entry To support more than one X 25 multi channel links you have to define this parameter for each X 25 multi channel CTCP The parameter without Index extension is valid for all defined X 25 multi channel links in your rvs Monitor XOTLOCAD xx ipaddress Own ip address of the local TCP IP stack The specified address will be used by the XOT listener task to accept incoming connections from XOT capable hardware e g XOT Router The ip address for this parameter may be specified as a dotted decimal number or as a symbolic name dns name If this parameter is not coded the default ip address of the local TCP IP stack will be used XOTLPORT xx 2 1998 nn nn value between 0 and 32767 rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Local port number used for the XOT server function The specified number will be used by the XOT listener task to accept incoming connections from XOT capable hardware e g XOT Router The default value of 1998 is the port number recommended by the XOT RFC 1613 If the index xx is not coded the index value 1 will be automatically assigned XOTNAME xx name Reference name for the specified TCP IP stack If the parameter is not specified the default TCP IP stack will be
163. TESTINSTALLATION Customer Name Part one Part two reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved Computer Model TESTVERSION Physical CPU Identification 98365 Expiration Date 1 45 203 1 4 6 EE724EAF 74ED1A1B 46931227 A1CAC433 377F50D1 7AD16E85 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Volkswagen AG 1978 98 make a success of rvsMVS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk To use rvsMVS you must give us the CPU Identification of your Computer You can find this CPU ID by using of program DF018C Example JOB EXEC PGM DF018C CPU DD DISP NEW KEEP UNIT SYSDA DSN TRK 1 1 We generate a key and send it to you To use User Level Security you need the following components e C for User related Odette IDs e D for Transfer Restrictions e E for Virtual Stations Please insert this values into the member USER under consideration of all spaces and lines by using an default editor e g TSO Editor or ISPF Editor After correctly modifying of member USER you can use rvsMVS 2 3 1 Extended Licensekey From rvsMVS 5 01 00 on it is possible to work with a new extended layout of license key The extended license must be used if no expiration day is given An extended license can be distinguished from the old layout by the additional sections appended lt RVSMVS gt and lt CHECKLICENSE gt Cut and Paste in
164. VOLKSWAGEN T Systems Release 05 04 03 Installation Manual 2015 05 07 rvsMVS Installation Manual Contents This documentation is valid for rvsMVS release 05 For rvsMVS the following documentations are provided rvsMVS Benutzer Handbuch german Manual for rvs Users rvsMVS User Manual english Manual for rvs Users rvsMVS Operator Handbuch german Manual for rvs Operator rvsMVS Operation Manual english Manual for rvs Operator rvsMVS Messages and Codes english Overview about rvsMVS messages and abend codes Distribution information will be given kindly T Systems Enterprise Services GmbH Corporate Customers Silke Peigert Vertriebsassistenz rvs Holzhauser Str 4 8 13509 Berlin Tel 49 30 8353 23089 Fax 49 30 8353 84869 Email mailto Silke Peigert t systems com Technical information will be given kindly T Systems Enterprise Services GmbH rvs Systems Holzhauser Str 4 8 13509 Berlin Tel 49 30 3997 1777 International Tel 0800 664 7745 Germany only Fax 49 30 8353 84869 Email mailto rvs service t systems com Copyright 2015 by Volkswagen AG T Systems gedas deutschland GmbH rvsMVS Installation Manual Contents Contents 7 2 Installation Requirements 4 4 20 11 2 1 Software Requirements ccccccesccesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeenseeeeeesescaesesneeeneeeeseese
165. Volkswagen AG Wolfsburg If transmission tests are planned with VW AG Wolfsburg the following name of datasets are used for tests LOOPTEST When a dataset with this name is sent to station R11 regardless of its content or file format it will automatically be sent back to its original sender rvsMVS Installation Manual 8 Special Functions Procedures 8 Special Functions Procedures 8 1 Using BSC Line s as Backup for SNA This section contains a description of all definitions and actions which are necessary if BSC line s shall be used as backup for a SNA connection between two rvsMVS installations 1 rvs Station Table Both Stations Tables must contain entries for e the SNA connection to the remote installation parameter ACME VTAM e the backup connection to the remote installation parameters SNCL III e theline s subchannel s to be used Parameter LINE nnn The entry for backup connection parameter ACME BTAM must be located within the stations table before the entry defining the SNA connection One of both station tables must assign a program profile defined as master to the entries for backup connection and line subchannel definition The other station table must assign a program profile defined as slave to the entries for backup connection and line subchannel definition Remark A program profile for a line entry may be changed without stopping rvs if the follo
166. XOUT 7 PUTYPE 2 ISTATUS ACTIVE LURVSL LU LOCADDR 0 DLOGMOD LOGMLU62 MODETAB LU62MODT SSCPFM FSS PACING 7 VPACING 7 ISTATUS ACTIVE 3 5 Definitions for TCP IP component of rvs This section describes definitions which are necessary for the TCP IP component of rvs The only requirement for the use of this component is the installation of of a TCP IP product This may be either IBMs TCP IP for MVS Version 3 Release 2 or following version or the TCP IP product of INTERLINK There are no restrictions in view of the equipment used for the connection of the host with the IP network 3 6 Definitions for FTP component of rvs and rvsLight This section describes definitions which are necessary for the FTP component of rvs With this component rvsMVS gives you an interface to the FTP Your communication partner only needs FTP support which is nowadays part of most of the common operating systems You can exchange data with your partner without having to resign the many rvs functions like routing automatic dataset processing etc In opposite to the other components of rvsMVS this FTP component represents a decoupled solution that is this component does not reproduce FTP but uses FTP as part of the TCP IP software for the actual file transfer Because of this it is necessary to take a separate look at the transmission directions Definition of FTP partners rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating S
167. able in the OFTP network real stations are non virtual stations A local virtual station has one owner and possibly some users as station members This mapping between users and a station is only possible for virtual stations A real station don t have users When a user creates a send entry the user table will be checked and if the user ID a part of it the founded virtual station will be used as originator The virtual station definition consists of the parameters SID TYPE and ODETID Example SID U11 TYPE VIRT ODETID 00013003210GEDAS R11U11 A virtual station is identified by its ODETTE ID This ODETTE ID needs not to be officially requested It must be unique in your communication area on your system and on your partners systems A local virtual station e g U11 should be defined as a routed station at your partner reachable via your local station e g R11 Example SID VST ADDR VIRTUAL STATION OF R11 ODETID 00013003210GEDAS B212U11 VIA R11 Note The parameters SECURITY and COMPRESS stands only for security and compression between real stations not between virtual stations USERSEP YES NO USP Enables the user separation for the remote station rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 1 Subset 1 valid for BSC Entries short
168. aced but only data traffic with station sid X25 component only pointer sid TRACE if an FTP transmission to station sid is traced If a dataset is allocated for trace output the allocation uses the value from the startparameter UNIT for the symbolic unit group For more information about this trace see the chapter rvs Trace TSTAMP YES NO This parameter is used only at a realais station for indirect file transfer A timestamp Thhmmsst is appended to any name of a dataset that is routed over this relais station The dataset is allocated under this new name but will be sent to the next station under its original name This is useful in order to prevent datasets of same name to be allocated UCC uuu uut uun Specification of user completion codes in decimal for which an extended SNAP dump of the abended task will be taken DD statement RVSDUMP see rvs start procedure is used to write the dump data If other completion codes occur only a short SNAP dump will be taken If the same user completion code occurs more than one time within one monitor run an extended dump will be created only after the first occurrence of this abend code rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset UNIT SYSDA unit Symbolic name of a disk unit group which will be used by the rvs monitor to allocate datasets during reception if other specifications resident receive entries see User Manual are no
169. al parameter Significates whether autodial devices for the line are installed or not ADDRESS b text string text string max 20 chars ADDR J Address of the station Optional parameter The text string must be put into quotes Within the quotes all characters blanks commas etc are allowed and will not be recognized as delimiters The maximal length of the string is 20 characters ADDRESS is only comment can be shown on the console by the operator command X sid No default value AUTOACT ON OFF Automatically activation of BSC lines Optional parameter The line control will be automatically re activated after an abnormal end occured The reactivation starts not immediately but after a specified delay time see ACTOPTS Autoactivation is suppressed after the operator has stopped the line by a stop command Autoact function works again if the operator starts the line again DIALINTF V25 V25BIS Interface for switched BSC lines with AUTODIAL function This parameter specifies whether the AUTODIAL device e g modem uses V25 or V25bis Interface This parameter must correspond with the EP generation of this line LBLKSIZE 2 400 2000 LSIZE J rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Line blocksize for transmission Optional parameter Allowed are values from 400 up to 2000 bytes LINE lineaddress lineaddress 3 characters Name of the line BTAM subchannel addre
170. al port number used for the TCP IP server function of the used stack After start of the specified TCP IP stack a server task is automatically started to look for incoming requests for rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset connection This server task only cares about requests for the specified port number If the index xx for the stack is not coded the index value 1 will be automatically assigned The default value of 3305 is the port number recommended by the Odette organization which is officially registered by IANA USA for the OF TP TCPPROD xx IBM INTERLINK This parameter specifies the product name of the TCP IP stack to be used rvsMVS supports the stacks of IBM or INTERLINK If the index xx for the stack is not coded the index value 1 will be automatically assigned TCPSTKID xx zname Reference name for the specified TCP IP stack This name corresponds with the stations table parameter TCPIPADR Name may be any alphanumeric string with a length of max 8 bytes If the index xx for the stack is not coded the index value 1 will be automatically assigned If more than one TCP IP stack shall be used this parameter must be coded for each stack TCPUSE YES NO This parameter is used only for the TCP IP component It indicates that this component is to be used by rvs In this case during start of the monitor rvs will check if the other parameters related to the TCP IP component are completely
171. amp DUMP DSN RVS TABLES MSGID DISP SHR SYSOUT amp PAPER DSN RVS TABLES CNTLMSG DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES CNTL DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES START DISP SHR SYSOUT A INTRDR DSN RVS TABLES STATIONS DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES PROGPROF DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES SESSIONS DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES JOBCARD DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES JOBCARDF DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES STAPEJC DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES RTAPEJC DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES SYSOUTJC DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES FTPRVSJC DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES USER DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES PFKEYS DISP SHR DSN RVS KEY DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES TRNTABLE DISP SHR SYSOUT amp PAPER DSN RVS PTABLES DISP SHR DSN RVS USERDATA DISP SHR DSN RVS USERLOG DISP SHR DSN RVS LOGDATA DISP SHR DSN RVS LOGLOG DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES EXTCONF DISP SHR Explanation of the used DD statements STEPLIB RVSDUMP MSGID SYSWTO CNTLMSG CNTL START Allocation of the rvs load library Output of snap dumps written by rvs Specification of messages which are to be written to the resource allocated with ddname SYSWTO SYSOUT protocol for rvs messages defined in member MSGID Control of console and rem operating messages Specification of rvs start parameters Specification of automatically executed rvs commands rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset INTRD
172. ample Automatic Dial lt 72 characters gt lt 8 gt KkKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk TOP OF DATA 1 SID ADS SCNL 099 0E3 FTP 4914 0 5 DNUM 5361829C3 ADDR AUTODIAL STATION DOPTS 09 25 12 00 6 14 30 17 00 12 DOPT2 22 15 2 LINE 099 ADDV YES ADDR AUTODIAL LINE 099 3 LINE OE3 ADDR LINE 0 3 4 SID VAD ACME V LU T4711 SPROF OS1 AUTOACT YES Fk ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke e ke e ke e ke e ke e ke e BOTTOM OF DATA e ke ke khe ehe che che ke e ke ec ke e ke e ke e ke e ke e ke e x Explanation 1 BSC Station ADS is directly connected Autodial is possible because the necessary parameters AD and DNUM are specified and one of the chosen lines subchannel 099 is prepared for autodial see entry 2 The autodial function is activ between 9 25 am and 12 am first interval with a retry time of 6 minutes The second interval starts at 2 30 pm and stops at 5 pm with a retry time of 12 minutes Station ADS will be called automatically at 10 15 pm even if there is no send request for ADS useful if you are expecting data from ADS which are queued for you until 10 15 pm Entry for line 099 The necessary devices for autodial are installed ADDV YES Entry for line OE3 Autodial is not possible SNA Station VAD is directly connected Autodial is possible because AUTOACT YES
173. andatory parameter Description of rvs Station Table Parameters in detail ACCOUNT account account 1 8 chars ACCT J Account of remote station This value is taken when a dataset is to be received and no account is transmitted by the sender and no RR entry account exists No default value rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset ACTCLASS type distance Account classification for the connection with the remote station This parameter is used only if the rvs startparameter SMF is also coded The classification consists of the linetype L leased S switched and a specification for the distance L local F far distance l international Default ACTCLASS S L For more information see description of the SMF accounting record in the rvs source library RVS SOURCE ADDRESS b text string text string max 20 chars ADDR J Address of the station Optional parameter The text string must be put into quotes Within the quotes all characters blanks commas etc are allowed and will not be recognized as delimiters The maximal length of the string is 20 characters ADDRESS is only comment can be shown on the console by the operator command X sid ALIASSID b sid sid 3 characters ASID 1 Alternative station identification Optional parameter This parameter be used to address the remote station by a second name No default value AUTODIAL 1 t YIESI NIO
174. anized as a VSAM KSDS rvsMVS Installation Manual 4 rvs System Files It is a necessary data set if the rvs installation want to use the Security Feature All private and public keys you want to use in a rvs installation have to store in the Key Data dataset This data set is the central information data base for the security feature It works as an interface between the rvs Monitor and rvs Security Administrator which maintains the security key data Security keys will be obtained by a data set key of KEYTYPE SID and KEYID KEYTYPE may be PU for public keys or PR for private keys SID is identically with the rvs parameter SID and KEYID is a hexadecimal character string which make the key unique in a rvs installation The key identification KEYID will be generated by the key generation program and is equal for a key pair consisting of a public and private key Remark e The program DF054K may be used for maintaining the Key Data set For more information about this program see appendix within this manual 4 6 Datasets for USP feature only rvs User Mapping Dataset USP RVS USERDATA VSAM KSDS rvs User Mapping Log USP RVS USERLOG BDAM dataset rvs User Log Dataset USP RVS LOGDATA VSAM KSDS RVS LOGLOG BDAM dataset rvs User Mapping Dataset VSAM dataset with user mapping rvs User Mapping Log log of User Mapping Dataset rvs User Log Dataset VSAM dataset with log events rvs User Log Log log
175. annel links Use the Index extension xx 1 32 in this case The ODID parameter without Index extension is valid for all defined X 25 multi channel links in your rvs Monitor ONRENERR KEEP SCRATCH This parameter is used to control the behavior on rename errors after receiving a dataset SCRATCH deletes the temporary dataset KEEP tries to rename the temporary dataset to lt FLP gt E Mxx Dxxxxx Txxxxxx CXXxx CXXXx PSIZE xx 128 nnn This parameter is used only for the X25 component It specifies the packetsize to be used nnn may be one of the values 128 256 or 512 This value must be the same as specified for parameter rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset MAXPKTL of the X25VCCPT macro NPSI generation The specified value must be the same as the value used within the national X 25 network To support more than one X 25 multi channel links you have to define this parameter for each X 25 multi channel CTCP The parameter without Index extension is valid for all defined X 25 multi cannel links in your rvs Monitor RELNCTRN NO YES This parameter takes effect only if rvsMVS is a relais station In ODETTE text mode files are transmitted using ASCII codepage If rvsMVS is a relais station content of a file was translated from ASCII to EBCDIC during receive and from EBCDIC to ASCII before send This behaviour can be disabled by setting RELNCTRN to YES This can avoid corruption of the conte
176. apter 6 2 2 fixed password or RACF authorization Application ID LU name of rvsMVS SNA component defined in member CNTL of rvsMVS table file parameter APPLIDz In addition the rvsWIN user needs authorization to enter the following LOGON line including DATA operator from his terminal PC with 3270 emulator rvsWIN creates this LOGON for session establishment LOGON APPLID applid DATA WI sid applid application identification of rvsMVS SNA component sid rvsWIN Station ID It is possible that you have to change some VTAM definitions 3 8 Definitions for remote operating function This section describes VTAM definitions which are necessary if the remote operating function shall be used The only requirement for the use of the remote operating function is the definition of an application within VTAM VBUILD TYPE APPL RVSO APPL AUTH ACQ PARSESS NO Remark The name of the APPL statement here 5 must be the same as specified for the rvs Startparameter RMOPAPPL see chapter 6 1 rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 4 rvs System Files 4 rvs System Files The following files are required for the control of rvs Dataset names are freely selectable for each installation The following names will be utilized throughout this manual Designation Dataset name Dataset orga
177. artparameter LU62APPL see chapter 6 1 A special logmode must be defined for the LU6 2 component kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk LOGMLU62 RVS LU 6 2 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk MODEENT LOGMODE LOGMLU62 COS BATCH TYPE X 00 FMPROF X 13 TSPROF X 07 PRIPROT X B0 SECPROT X B0 COMPROT X DOB1 RUSIZES X 8686 PSERVIC X 060200000000000000002C00 MODEEND The log mode name must be referred to by the rvs start parameter LU62MODE see chapter 6 1 it must be 8 characters long The remote station must be defined as independent LU The name of the remote LU is to be referred to by the stations tables parameter LUNAME see chapter 6 2 5 The following example refers to definitions of an independent LU within the NCP for a remote rvs LU6 2 over a leased line PURVSL ADDR C1 ANS CONT AVGPB 1280 MAXDATA 262 MAXOUT 7 NPACOLL YES PUTYPE 2 XID YES lt PU 2 1 ISTATUS ACTIVE rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkxk LURVSL LU LOCADDR 0 DLOGMOD LOGMLU62 MODETAB LU62MODT PACING 7 RESSCB 5 SSCPFM FSS VPACING 7 ISTATUS ACTIVE The following example refers to definitions of an independent LU within a switched major node e g for Token Ring or X 25 PURVSL PU ADDR C1 DISCNT YES IDBLK nnn IDNUM nnnnn IRETRY NO MAXDATA 261 MA
178. ation slave reaction or no automatic dial is used the exit does not work successfully Working mode The exit changes the identification record X record wich will sent by rvs if e the exit is called before sending own identification exit parameterlist field IXTCNTL bit IXTCBSND is on Daimler Benz ID of the partner station is known exit parameterlist field IXTDBID is filled e the identification record is known exit parameterlist field IX TIDREC is filled This identification record must be 22 bytes long at least exit parameterlist field IXTIDRLN and is in conformity with the VDA Empfehlung 4914 exit parameterlist field IXTX491 4 e the ID table of the exit contains the Daimler Benz ID in the left part exit table field IDTAB If all these four conditions are fulfilled the right part value of the table replaces the value of the STATION parameter rvs tables dataset member CNTL STATION sid dbid For example The DB ID addressed by the field IXTDBID has the value 01234567899 In this case rvs sends the value 099911590 in the X record Hints for installation e can use the exit after modification of the table field IDTAB Note the right side of the table contains the ID s which rvs is used for identification in the partner station the left side of the table contains this ID s which the partner station s are used for identification to rvs e you must declare for rvs the use of the exit in the sta
179. ation mode of line control Optional parameter ACTMODE NORMAL line control can be activated by every activation command except A ALL ACTMODE ALL line control can be activated explicit or by an A ALL command ACTMODE SPECIAL line control of this station has to be activated under declaration of the line address Operator commands Activation of BSC lines see chapt 5 5 of the rvsMVS Operation Manual 65 at rt at1 rt1 at2 rt2 at3 rt3 at4 rt4 Options for automatic activation see AUTOACT of line control Optional parameter at at1 at2 specifies the activation times when automatic activation will be active Start time and end time must be written in hours and minutes Syntax at hh mm hh mm Default value is 00 00 24 00 rt rt1 rt2 rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset specifies the activation retry time The retry time is a delay for the program to try the activation again after the last try wasn t successful Allowed values 1 255 min Default value is 5 minutes The parameters must be put in brackets separated by comma Maximal input are four combinations of at and rt Example 5 11 15 12 00 5 14 02 17 00 10 Note Do not specify time interval beyond midnight seperate it Instead ACTOPTS 23 00 06 00 5 use ACTOPTS 23 00 24 00 5 00 00 06 00 5 ADDEVICE t Y ES ADDV J Automatic dial devices Option
180. ation on the line after contention is a write ALG2 The first operation on the line after contention is a read DBID zcc cc 1 10 characters Daimler Benz station identification Only necessary for communications with Daimler Benz Stations using DAKS Datenaustausch Kommunikations System of DB identify themselve by a up to 10 characters long identification number The DBID is only necessary for the identification phase for further handling the Daimler Benz station will be recognized within your rvs system by its rvs station id Parameter SID DIALNUM 1 string of max 20 characters DNUM J Telephone number for automatic dial Mandatory if AUTODIAL YES Note Autodial is mandatory for FTP 491 4 1 If the dial interface is V 25bis only the number to be dialed has to be coded If the dial interface is V 25 the number to be dialed has to be extended in the following way For Datex L lines from the Deutsche Bundespost the characters C3 must be added to the number Character C is an indication for the dialing hardware that the end of the number to be dialed is reached Character 3 is an indication for the contol unit 37x5 that the end of the number to be passed to the dial hardware is reached If the public telephone network is used it may be necessary depending on the automatic calling unit that the telephone number is preceeded by character D waiting for indication from the network that a numbe
181. ause termination of the transmisson Starting with rvsMVS 1 2 10 there will be an OFTP user exit for a user aided check of the X 25 number In the flow of the ODETTE protocol session this user exit is executed in the following situation rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits When the exit gets control register 1 points to a parameterlist consisting of the following 5 fullwords 1 fullword address of the received SSID buffer 2 fullword address of the stations table entry for the remote station 3 fullword return code of module DFOO6A standard numcheck 4 fullword address of the X 25 number as defined for the remote station within the stations table 5 fullword address of the X 25 number obtained out of the received X 25 call request packet This exit may return two values to the calling program e return code returned in register 15 a nonzero return code will cause termination of the connection e changed return code of DFOO6A returned in register 1 If the connection shall be established both returncodes must be zero otherwhise the connection request will be rejected If the connection is to be rejected rvs sends the OFTP protocol unit End Of Session Id with reason code 03 unknown user code instead of SSID back to the initiator initiator responder call request _ call confirm OFTP SSRM SSID numcheck if specified within CNTL m
182. ay be specified in keyword format output LRECL must be 80 or higher and it should be equal to or higher than the respective default for each format above otherwise the output records are truncated For SYSOUT dataset following should be noted Mor A control character may be specified LRECL must be 80 or higher If the DCB is provided as a parameter also MACRF PM may be defined There are three different output formats Keyword format Some information from the Control Dataset records records is edited to a printable form Control Dataset record format The records retrieved from the Control Dataset are presented unedited Fixed format Most of the information from the Control Dataset records is edited to a printable form rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Reference Utility program DF076A Keyword format output This format of output is self explanatory TYPE Indication of the status and direction of the transmission SID Remote station identification DSNAME The dataset name of the dataset which will be or has been been transmitted Member name when applicable in parentheses SEQNR Number of so far found records which satisfy the search arguments six digits In fact a sequence number QDATE Queuing date of the transmission QTIME Queuing time of the transmission TDATE Transmission start date TTIME Transmission start time Example SEQNR 000001 TYPE AS SID RF2 DSNAME ENK ZNEEBS ECIA
183. be blank if the resident receive entry had been created in earlier rvs releases than rvs OS Release 3 2 4 User fields KDEXTFLD KDUSER The content of these fields is transmitted from sender to receiver of the file So these fields may be used for communication between exits within sending and receiving station Field KDEXTFLD is used by the SNA and BSC components field KDUSER is used by the X25 component ODETTE FILE TRANSFER PROTOCOL This explains the different length of the fields If KDEXTFLD is filled with data in the sending station field KDEXTTYP should be set to character E Example of exit DFUX001 An example of DFUX001 is located on the rvsMVS installation tape in the rvs source library 2 file Please refer to this example in case of need of adaptation to your environment A 2 rvsWIN Exit DFUX002 The exit DFUX002 may be used to check authorization for access of rvsWIN users to rvsMVS The use of this exit allows for example an accommodation of rvs to RACF requirements the exit might check if an rvsWIN user using an RACF userid is authorized to get access to the rvsMVS the host The loadname DFUX002 of this exit is required For operating system MVS XA both addressing mode AMODE and residency mode RMODE must be set to 24 bit addressing rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits The rvs loadlibrary on the installation tape contains this exit as load module The source module is distr
184. ber SFX1VER1 EQU XI Version 1 SFX1UNRF DS CL2 RECFM of unloaded PDS DCBRECFM format SFX1UNLR DS CL5 LRECL SFX1UNLB DS CL5 5 2 SFX1PDSF DS CL2 RECFM of PDS DCBRECFM format SFXIPDSL DS CL5 LRECL SFX1PDSB DS CL5 BLKSIZE SFX1PDSD DS CL5 number of Directory Blocks SFXIRVS DS CL33 reserved initialized with X 20 9 3 External Compression External Compression Feature consists of a program which works along the GZIP algorithm rfc 1952 Data sets will be reduced in best cases until 30 percent only in the case of very small files the added process information will expand the user data set size Because of this feature is not free of charge it is necessary for using External Compression to install a new rvsMVS license key There are no additional installation steps to the well known rvsMVS installation to use this feature Only the parameter COMPRESS EXT has to inserted into the STATION entry to inform about the partner capability Please refer to chapter 6 1 and 6 2 9 3 1 2 Steps to Prepare the Use of External Compress Feature The following chapter gives a short description of How to prepare What to do Help is where Install rvsMVS chapter 5 1 1 Geta valid license with security code Z 2 Addthe parameter COMPRESS GZIP to partner s station entry chapter 6 2 0 the rvsMVS user is available to send data ae O Create a send request see USER Manual All remai
185. bles Dataset to the internal reader and thus submitted to the system This job member SAVETEMP is as follows COPY JOB RRR e e KKK KK KH KK KKK KKK KKK KH KK IKK KKK KKK KK HHH KKK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK COPY BACKUP COPY OF CONTROLDATASET TO TAPE RRR e e e HK KKK KKH HK KKK KK HK HK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKH KK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK COPY EXEC PGM IEBGENER SYSUT1 DD DSN RVS KDSAVE TEMP DISP OLD DELETE KEEP SYSUT2 DD DSN RVS KDSAVE DISP NEW CATLG DELETE UNIT TAPE SYSIN DD DUMMY SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT It is useful to perform the to tape function within a separate job because the other steps of the start job must not wait for a tape mount in this case If this separate job has completed the temporary dataset RVS KDSAVE TEMP is deleted and no problems will occure within step TEST if the start job is executed next time Step PDF0009A This step executes procedure PDF00094A Deletion of records will be performed only if this has not been done during the last two days parameter INTV 2 Step MONITOR Last but not least the rvs Monitor is started if everything else especially the control for backup was ok rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Reference Utility program DF076A F Reference Utility program DF076A The utility program DF076A converts data from selected records of the rvs Control Dataset VSAM to a sequential dataset The resul
186. but if OUTPARM is defined INPARM must also be defined e Two or more call parameters are applicable only at a call from another application program Further the program is callable from the command processor TSO XCALL CALL DF076A Process The input output and formats are determined If the search arguments are read from a dataset it is opened If the output is written to a dataset it is opened An effort is made to access the rvs SYSWTO dataset or alternatively to open dataset SYSOUT The input is read and analyzed one set of search arguments at a time If the input is a dataset both formats keyword and fixed may be mixed provided that the record length is sufficient The Control Dataset is searched for records to satisfy the given search arguments using a key which is built as far as possible of the given information The rest of the search arguments are matched by the program code rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Reference Utility program DF076A If no meaningful key can be built from the search arguments the search is made with sequential read through the dataset The result is presented to the caller and the return code is set rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Reference Utility program DF076A Output The output from the program is written either to the output parameter area if it is provided or to the output dataset If the output is written to the output parameter area it is the
187. c 2b 6b 2a 7f 86 63 63 ab 91 39 02 f9 25 93 f1 4a 1c a4 fb f0 cb 04 99 ef 84 bc 22 0b 0a 0e 2b a3 1a 9c 3a 71 2c 52 d0 c9 4d5 94 18 3e 3c d9 ca EndData 1 4 Detailed description of function Key Data Utility Program DF054K rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix I Key Data Utility Program DF054K you can manage your security keys with the program DF054K A VSAM dataset is used to manage store the keys The program DF054K provides the following functions PARM 1 GENKEYS Generate a key pair 2 sequential datasets 2 KEYS Add key s to key management 3 LIST List keys from the key management 4 EXPT Write keys from the key management to a sequential dataset see IMPT too 5 IMPT Write keys from a sequential dataset to the key management see EXPT too 6 ADMN Delete key s from the key management 1 4 1 GENKEYS Generate a key pair 2 sequential datasets DD Statements KEYDATA key management dataset VSAM Dataset SYSPRINT program log file KEYPARM parameters example generate a key pair A JOB GENKEYS EXEC PGM DF054K PARM GENKEYS STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR KEYPARAM DD KSIZE 1024 KPERIOD 12M KNAME RVST V2CS NEWO1 KEY Parameters for GENKEYS Parameter Description Syntax File name of private key suffix PR Text max 32 characters
188. caller s responsibility to define the length of the area sufficient to contain the output record The error and informational messages are written preferably to the SYSWTO dataset amongst the other similar messages If it is not possible the output is written to SYSOUT or output dataset If there is a parameter area for SYSOUT dataset DCB the dataset should be opened If the parameter area is not provided an attempt is made to open the SYSOUT as well In either way the error and informational messages are written to this dataset If the output is written to a dataset in keyword format and no SYSOUT dataset is available the messages are written to the output dataset If no access to SYSOUT dataset is possible and the output is not written in keyword format the writing of error and informational messages is suppressed If OUTPARM is defined the input is expected from INPARM as well If the output datasets are allocated as new and DCB information is not complete the program makes following defaultings For output dataset in keyword format LRECL 80 BLKSIZE 80 RECFM FBA fixed format LRECL 512 BLKSIZE 7680 and RECFM FB KD record format LRECL 590 BLKSIZE 6490 and RECFM FB For SYSOUT dataset LRECL 80 BLKSIZE 80 RECFM FBA and MACRF PL For both output datasets DSORG PS is mandatory If the output dataset DCB information is provided from any source to the program following should be noted Mor A control character m
189. ccessmethod All of the parameters except tp accessmethod ACME may be changed even if rvs system is executing See rvsMVS Operation Manual Modification of station parameters rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Conditions for encoding the parameters The parameters are coded with keywords They are separated by commas or blanks Each line can be used from column 1 to 72 A continuation character is not necessary A comment line has to be signed by a in the first column The first parameter of each Station Entry must be SID All other parameters may be coded any sequence e The first parameter of each Line Entry must be LINE All other allowed parameters can appear in any sequence e Starting with rvsMVS 1 2 10 the following additional rules are valid for encoding of parameters comment within a line all characters inside a line behind a character will be interpreted as a comment This implies that none of the specified parameter values should include the character continuation lines some parameters consist of a list of single values separated by comma This value list must be enclosed by apostrophs or parenthesises Now this value list may be coded on different up to 16 lines Note that only parenthesis may be used for nested structures Apostrophs may only be used to delimit strings which do not include any other apostrophs If a parameter shall be coded on diffe
190. ce 4th row etc The following rows describe the channel program pointed to in the DECB containing the respective buffer contents in dump format Only those CCWs can be listed which are available in main storage after termination of the BTAM macro If BTAM has started several channel programs during execution of the macro eg repetitions in case of line faults only the CCWs executed last can be listed S SXX DSN DVV R11SXX A314 6W VOL W80111 KENN 42 STAT 00 IND1 00 9 57 353 BLKS 00482 BYTES 0040082 OAF PGMADDR 002208 001E42 OPT F600F080 0000 FEAT 00 RETRY 03 TOTRET 01 5 0 AQ 006 BITS 61 DECB P 7F OP 14 SN 00 L 004C R 0000 CC 02 FLAG 00 RESP 1061 TPCD A5 ERRST 00 CSWST 0C00 BUFFADDR 1177FA CCW 011177FA 6011004C WRITE 1002E3C4E5E54BD9 1 1 2 74 FIF4F 6 640404040 404040FOFOF 4F 8F2 TDVV R11SXX A3146W 00482 FOFOFOF3F8F5F6F0 FOFOFS8FOFOFOF8FO FO40D9FIFIE2ZE7E7 4040404040404040 00038560008000800 R11SXX 4040404040404040 40404040 CCW 01112166 60130002 WRITE 1003 e CCW 021120BA 20A50002 READ 1061 2 S SXX DSN DVV R11SXX A314 6W VOL W80111 KENN 42 STAT 00 IND1 00 9 57 359 BLKS 00482 BYTES 0040158 OAF PGMADDR 002208 001F6A 600 080 0000 FEAT 00 RETRY 03 TOTRET 01 5 0 0 006 BITS 61 DECB P 7F SN 00 L 004C R 0001 02 FLAG 00 RESP 2D00 TPCD 8B ERRST 00 CSWST 0C00 BUFFADDR 1177FA CCW 01112170 60210001 WRITE 37 CCW 021120BA 208B0002 READ 2D A SXX DSN VOL
191. ce utility DFO76A with input parameter TMPFILN name T Mxx Dyyddd Thhmmss Cxxxx Cyyyy see appendix F Blueprint for dataset names on relais station name user srcdst vdsn Dyyddd Thhmmssc FTPMAX nnn This parameter specifies the maximal number of parallel FTP transmissions nnn may be a value between 0 and 999 FTPPOLTI 60 nnn This parameter is used only for the FTP component Time interval of the FTP polling task in seconds nnn may be a value between 5 and 999 This value determines the time interval after which the FTP Polling task becomes active Every nnn seconds this task looks for FTP control files in the MVS system catalog FTPPREF name This parameter is used only for the FTP component This parameter specifies the FTP user prefix name 1 18 characters All FTP protocol files to be received by rvsMVS have to start with this prefix rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset The names of this FTP protocol files looks as following prefix F TPnn sidoriginS Gnext Siddestination efnumber prefix value of FTPPREF parameter FTPnn constant value depending on the protocol file Sidorigin origin station sid Sidnext sid of direct connected FTP station Sidgestination destination station sid refnumber FTP reference file number The prefix must comply with the MVS DSName conventions Example for a control file name FTP information file FTPPREF MVSPREF origin station AAA c
192. ced between any two sets of search arguments The comments are recognized by an asterisk in position one followed by at least one blank character There are two valid formats of input records either in parameter area or dataset input e n keyword format the search arguments are given selectively identified by the keywords described below A set of search arguments begins with text STATUS 5 REFNR RNR or and occupies the whole parameter input area or one or more consequent physical input dataset records which are considered to form one logical record The keyword parameters are separated by a comma and or one or more blanks A single keyword with its value cannot be spanned to the next record The eight last positions of the physical record are ignored supposed to contain record sequence number Keyword format INPARM is also used to identify the input and output datasets and output format e n fixed format the search arguments are given according to the layout described below A set of search arguments in this format occupies exactly one physical record The data length of this format is 112 bytes and the records are supposed to have no sequence field Both formats may be given from any source and also mixed in dataset input rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Reference Utility program DF076A NOTE If mixing of these two different formats is desired e g by concatenating input files the LRE
193. certificates are managed by RACF and addressed by keyring and cerlabel HWEXT AES SHA1 3DES This parameter defines the type of allowed security hardware extensions If a extension is not supported by current hardware the software version is used and a warning is written Example of CNTL member for RACF key management EYRING TESTRING EYLABEL 1 KEYLABEL1 EYLABEL 2 KEYLABEL2 EYINDEX 2 EYSTORE RACFE ERSTORE RACE QAR RAR Example of CNTL member for BUILTIN key management KEYSTORE BUILTIN ERSTORE BUILTIN EY INDEX 2 Q rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features 10 4 2 OFTP2 enabled station STATIONS member Remark Parameters defined in STATIONS member will overwrite the values defined in CNTL member OFTP Level OFTPVERS 11 2 1 4 2 0 Defined in member STATIONS This parameter defines the OFTP protocol level Key Identifier KEYINDEX 0 nnnn Defined in member CNTL STATIONS If the KEYINDEX is greather than 0 the key with this index is used to sign files If KEYINDEX is 0 or not given the key which is valid and has the shortest validity is used to sign files RvsMVS finds keys for decryption automatically Certificate Identifier CERINDEX 0 nnnn Defined in member STATIONS This parameter defines the index of the certificate which has to be used by rvsMVS to encrypt files for this station If CER
194. ch arguments Synonyme to this keyword is TTOD TMPFILNzname T Mxx Dyyddd Thhmmss Cxxxx Cyyyy optional Temporary file name This parameter is used to find the related transmission for a given temporary data set name Only valid for temporary data set names with this blueprint This blueprint was introduced in rvsMVS 5 04 00 to ensure temporary data set names to be unique even if the same VDSN is transmitted several times in the same second NRSYN number Synonyme order number six numeric characters optional The number of the expected record in key sequence when the search arguments give a multiple result This parameter may be used to access other than the first record to satisfy the search arguments which are not possible or wanted to make unique Default 000001 This parameter is ignored in dataset output Note When the search is done with parameter NRSYN the result may yet be the previous or even an earlier found record due to newcome records which match with the search arguments Synonyme of this keyword NRS Layout of the fixed format input length rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Reference Utility program DF076A 0 1 2 Record type 0 1 C transmission status A B C D 1 1 C transmission direction R S 2 4 3 a Station Identification 5 9 5 Reserved 10 63 54 C Name of the transmitted partitioned dataset with member name enclosed in parentheses 10 53 44 Name o
195. clusive use with rvs RPG stations VW FTP B1 0 Open Protocol of VOLKSWAGEN published in rvsMVS Interface Description no restart no blocking VW FTP B1 1 Open Protocol of VOLKSWAGEN AG see rvsMVS Interf Descript with blocked transmission mode VW FTP B2 1 Open Protocol of VOLKSWAGEN AG see rvsMVS Interf Descript with blocking and restart VW FTP B3 0 Open Protocol of VOLKSWAGEN AG see rvsMVS Interf Descript RJE procedure similar to 2780 IDENQ YES The remote station may send its identification together with the BSC control character enquiry X 2D within one string Optional IDENQ NO can be defined if the remote station sends it s ID in a separate control record IDENQ YES enables rvs to receive the remote station id and enquiry X 2D in one string This is necessary for some remote stations which must send their ID together with the enquiry IDENQ YES works also if the remote station sends a separate control record for the station ID but rvs internal tables might overflow if more than 255 station entries with IDENQ YES on the same subchannel are defined LBLKSIZE 2 400 2000 LSIZE J Line blocksize for transmission Optional parameter Allowed are values from 400 up to 2000 bytes rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset r S L LLT J Linetype Optional parameter Valid values are S for switched and L for leased line N
196. cryption with hint at users SECURIT Y EXT unspecified External Encryption SECURITY EXT SECURITY NO no Encryption SECURITY EXT SECURITY EXT External Encryption Routing The external feature security is a function which is always used as end end function This means that the external feature security is not performed if the destination is not the own station Encrypted files are not influenced by routing station rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset SIDzsid sid 3 characters rvs station identification Mandatory parameter Must be the first parameter of each station entry rvs station ID s must be unique within a net of TP connections See chapter 6 1 rvs Startparameter parameter STATION For inhouse connections rvs station ID s are freely selectable If the rvs station ID is used only for rvs internal reference not for identification on the line for example in case of communication with DAKS see parameter DBID the rvs station ID is freely selectable also But in these cases the ID s should start with one of the following characters D F H K M Q T W ID s starting with the character and the names ALL BSC SNA X25 FTP and RVS are reserved for rvs internal use No default value TYPE VIRT This kind of station represents different users of your local real station CNTL member Real stations are your local station and the neighbour stations that are reach
197. d SESSNUM II mm hh Maximum number of protocol sessions of each priority which might be active at the same time Optional parameter Il max number of low priority sessions mm max number of medium priority sessions hh max number of high priority sessions The limit of all sessions together is ll mm hh 16383 Only even values should be specified Odd values will be rounded up to even values Default value is SESSNUM 2 2 2 Note If your partner station is a non MVS system running portable rvs only the session value for low priority is supported SYNCLVL NONE CONFIRM Synchronization level Optional parameter The rvs APPC support can use either None or Confirm as the synchronization level The prefered level is NONE A value of CONFIRM will reduce transmission speed and create additional overhead TPNzname name 1 64 chars Transaction program name of remote station Mandatory parameter No default value rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset TPN indicates the name of the program to which a conversation is requested Important for your remote partner To select the service of the Odette File Transfer Protocol of rvsMVS has to use the following TP name value RVSOFTP If your partner station is a non MVS system running portable rvs the TP name is RVSROV rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionall
198. d by a user abend e At certain times depending on the number of transmissions and the size of the logdataset a copy of control and logdataset must be done Together with this copy the Logdataset is marked empty again PDF00144 e A damaged controldataset can be recovered without loss of any information if the following steps are performed deleting the damaged file creation of a new controldataset of the last controldataset backup to the new file merging of the logdataset content since last backup copy of control and logdataset into the new file The following two procedures are used for realization of the above described concept They are content of the installation tape members PDF0014A and PDF0015A use PDF0015B in case of SMS of the rvs Tables Dataset PDF0014A PROC PAPIER NOSAVE 00 PDFO014A oe ce e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce KKK RRR KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK BACKUP OF rvs CONTROLDATASET AND LOG FILE amp RESET OF LOG FILE USE IT IN CASE OF LOG FILE IS FULL JOB CAN RUN WITHOUT STOPPING THE MONITOR OR CONTROL DATASET MUST BE RECOVERED IF IT IS DAMAGED CONTROL DATASET MUST BE RE ORGANIZED IF IT IS FULL MONITOR MUST BE STOPPED PDF0015A 8 7 H KKK KKK e ke HK HK KKK KKH HK IKK HK HK e he KKK HHH KKK KKK KKK HHH KKK KKH KKK KKK KKK KEK SDF014A EXEC PGM DF072A00 PARM NOSAVE amp NOSAVE STEPLIB DD DSN RVS
199. d by rvs programs the first accounting parameter is placed at offset 49 For more details see IBM macros IEFAJCTB IEFAACTB ACTREL RVS ACC account Accounting information max 7 characters for SMF records created by rvs and or for user accounting exit if installed see parameters SMF ACEXIT in this chapter This accounting information is used for transmissions where rvs works as a relais station that means if rvs receives a dataset from a certain station and transmits the same dataset to another station final receiver APPLID applid only if SNA component rvs is used Application ID of the local own station 1 8 alphanumeric characters This name must be specified in an APPL statement of the local VTAM see chapter VTAM definitions This name must be specified also in the rvs stations table of the remote station s see chapter 6 2 and in the VTAM of the remote station s as a cross domain resource see chapter VTAM definitions If used this name must be different from those specified for rvs startparameters RMOPAPPL LU62APPL and XAPPLID BFPOOLRL ttt Parameter for rvs internal OFTP bufferpool management ttt denotes the time in seconds after which unused buffers of this pool are to be released freed Optional parameter rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Default value BFPOOLRL 20 BFPOOLSZ sss Parameter for rvs internal OFTP bufferpool management sss
200. d in function It is set rvs intern to corresponding value of the license key If the GZIP function is not available in license key and if parameter COMPRESS GZIP is used in STATIONS this parameter is ignored error message is written If the user uses the parameter GZIPZYES at the create of send request this is also ignored error message is written The rvs stationtable parameter COMPRESS OFTP YES NO GZIP EXT determines the default value for all transfers with this station This default becomes always effective if the user doesn t use the GZIP parameter during create of send request COMPRESS OFTP this means that OFTP compression is used COMPRESS YES equal like COMPRESS OFTP Compatibility COMPRESS NO this means no compressing COMPRESS GZIP this means GZIP compression external feature COMPRESS EXT equal like COMPRESS GZIP Compatibility Default value of the station parameter is COMPRESS YES The user can also control the use of the GZIP compression via the parameter GZIP YES NO the program DFO80A00 Because of compatibility the previous DFO80A00 parameter COMPRESS YES NO RVS EXT is accepted too The values of this parameter are handled as follows COMPRESS YES is converted GZIPZNO COMPRESSENO is converted in GZIP NO COMPRESS RVS is converted in GZIP YES COMPRESS ExXT is converted in GZIP YES The table shows the combinations of the parameters and its results assume that the comp
201. data set members see chapter 9 5 optional Creation of the rvs USP data sets if USP User Separation will be used see chapter 9 5 Running test procedures see chapter 7 5 2 Content of Compact Disk README TXT Info dataset README DOC CHANGES DOC Information in detail about rvsMVS changes in this release CLIST SEQ ISPF CLIST dataset LOAD1 SEQ rvs Loadlib part 1 rvsMVS Installation Manual 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS LOAD2 SEQ LOAD3 SEQ LOAD4 SEQ LOAD5 SEQ LOAD6 SEQ MSGS SEQ PANEL SEQ SOURCE SEQ TABLES SEQ JOBS SEQ EXEC SEQ RECEIVE rvs Loadlib part 2 rvs Loadlib part 3 rvs Loadlib part 4 rvs Loadlib part 5 rvs Loadlib part 6 ISPF MSGS dataset ISPF PANEL dataset Source library This file contains various source members layout of rvs controlblocks which may be used if rvs User Exits are to be used assembler source code as example of rvs User Exits or other installation dependent programs sample jobs useful during installation of RVS macro rvsDYN used during installation of rvs Dataset containing control information for the rvs monitor and jobs used for installation or operation of rvs JOBS dataset EXEC dataset JCL for loading rvsMVS installation datasets rvsMVS documentation files in Word format Installation Manual doc Messages and Codes doc User Manual doc Benutzer Handbuch doc Operation Manual doc Operator Handbuch doc rvsMVS documentation files i
202. ddresses will be put into the address fields of the output list Note An all station evaluation is possible with or without allocated dataset RVS GROUPS The difference is that the address field in your output list can be filled only if this station is mentioned in RVS GROUPS Jobs Station Activity Starting of Station Activity is possible either by a TSO CLIST member STATCL of dataset RVS TABLES or by a batch job member STATJOB of dataset RVS TABLES Batch Job RVS TABLES STATJOB JOB BR KKK KKK HK KKK KK KH HK KKK KKK KI KK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK He RVS STATISTICS STATION ACTIVITY REQUIRED PARAMETERS DAY MONTH YEAR 2 NUMERICS EACH IF MONTHLY CALCULATION REQUIRED SET DAY 00 OPTIONAL PARAMETER i GROUP SELECTION OF A CERTAIN GROUP OF STATIONS IS POSSIBLE IF DATASET RVS GROUPS IS ALLOCATED IF DATASET RVS GROUPS IS NOT ALLOCATED SET GROUP ALL ALL STATIONS OR GROUP sid STATION IDENTIFICATION OF A SINGLE STATION e ke k eek e ehe hee ek e He e He e e ke ee he je ee ke ee he hee e e he ehe hee e e eje je eek eee STATJOBA EXEC PGM DF552A PARM DAY MON GROUP STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSIN DD DSN RVS TPSTAT DISP SHR GROUPS DD DSN RVS GROUPS DISP SHR SYSOUT DD DSN RVS ZW1 DISP NEW CATLG DELETE UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL
203. definition ACCESMET TP access method ACTMODE activation mode CONTALG algorithm in case of contention DBID Daimler Benz station identification DIALNUM dial number for autodial FTP name of File Transfer Protocol IDENQ sid and enquiry within one string LBLKSIZE line blocksize LINETYPE linetype switched leased RECVPW receive password s SENDPW send password SPEED speed of transmission SUBCHANL Subchannel addresses line addresses UCBNAME Physical line address leased lines onl mandatory parameter Note Additional to these parameters subset 0 must be specified Description of rvs Station Table Parameters in detail ACCESMET t B TAM ACME J TP access method Must be BTAM This parameter may be omitted because it is the default ACTMODE 3 t N ORMAL A LL S PECIAL L ACTM J Activation mode of line control Optional parameter ACTMODE NORMAL line control can be activated by every activation command except A ALL NORMAL is default ACTMODE ALL line control can be activated explicit or by an A ALL command ACTMODE SPECIAL line control of this station has to be activated under declaration of the line address Operator commands Activation of BSC lines see chapt 5 5 of the rvsMVS Operation Manual rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset CONTALG ALG1 ALG2 Algorithm in case of contention situation Optional parameter ALG1 first oper
204. donee acts 143 6 9 2 Overview on rvs 145 6 9 2 1 2 1 00 145 6 92 22 DEO FB B 4 5 druide i de 145 6 9 3 Deleting old entries from the rvs Control 148 6 9 4 Saving and Recovery of the rvs 149 6 10 JCL Member for failing automatic Jobstart 153 6 11 155 7 Running Installation Tests odds nid er eV cud ondas 158 7 1 Start of rvs Monitor Procedure PDF0001A Alias MONITOR 158 7 2 Transmission of seen nennen nnn nennen 161 8 Special Functions Procedures 222222 222 222222 1 162 8 1 Using BSC Line s as Backup for SNA esses ennt nnne 162 8 2 VS lenem nte EE Bann a Nn POE 162 9 2 1 Trace 4OUIDpUL ausente ort det eaae er 163 8 2 2 Start and Stop of rvs 164 8 2 3 Format of BTAM Trace BSC lines sse 165 8 2 4 Format of VTAM Trace SNA
205. e He e He e He e he He he e He He He He He He He He He He e SDF079B EXEC PGM DF079B00 PARM amp R DAYS amp DAYS INTV amp INTV STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT amp PAPIER KD DD DSN dsname DISP SHR Description of parameters for program 079 00 RESERVE or indicates whether deleting of records is to be done with exclusive control for the NORESERVE rvs Controldataset or not If access to the rvs Controldataset is done from different systems RESERVE should always be specified Default value RESERVE DAYS nnn This parameter indicates the number of days for which the information about executed transmissions is at least to be kept This means that only records older than nn days will be deleted nnn may be a value between 3 and 365 Execution of this procedure results only in deleting of records representing complete transmissions Send requests which are not complete processed or resident receive entries will never be deleted by this procedure AR Records will be deleted as soon as end date is outside nnn days Make sure to set the parameter amp DFDAYKE in the start CLIST for the ISPF Panels to the same value Default value DAYS 7 ARDAYS nnn This parameter indicates the number of days for which the information about incomplete receive transmissions AR Records without end date will be kept Instead of end date either start date or if unset ready date will be used to calc
206. e OFTP2 file signature If FILESIG is set to NO the file signature is turned off in both directions Incoming transmissions containing signature are rejected If the parameter is set to YES outgoing datasets are signed Incoming transmissions without signature are rejected If the parameter is to OPT signed and unsigned datasets are accepted on incoming transmissions Outgoing datasets are not signed It can be overwritten during creation of send entry rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features Example for SID MK1 AC ODE D TCE TCP RACF certificate store T ID RVSSOO001MK PADR 10 112 136 82 ORT 3305 e CP REDIT 99 55 10 32760 1 ALL OPTS ALL 15171 DDR TEST PW XXX PW XXX PVERS 2 0 ECURITY YES FTPV 2 0 ECFSET OFTP2 ECURITY YES ERSTORE RACF ERLABEL 1 PARTNERCERTI ERLABEL 2 PARTNERCERT2 C A A S R 5 COMPRESS NO 5 5 C ERINDEX 2 Example for SID MK2 AC ODE TCP TCP BUILTIN certificate store VSAM ID RVSS0002MK PADR 10 112 136 83 ORT 3305 UH H Hd PSESS 10 DIT 99 CTM ALL OPTS ALL LSIZE 32760 TEST ECFSET OFTP2 URITY YES ERSTORE BUILTIN E C 9 H K K
207. e and APPL Statement chapter 3 Name of a Logmode This specified Logmode will be used if the session is established as a result of a rvs activation command A command see Operations Manual If this field is left blank session parameters within the rvs programs will be used hardcoded Bind except PACING and COS values These values if specified will be taken from the DLOGMODE Entry which is specified within the APPL Statement Remark Different Logmode names may be specified in order to use different Virtual Routes rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Column Description or Transmission Groups for different parallel sessions 61 80 Field for comments The following is an example of a Sessions Table containing five session profiles included in the rvs Tables Dataset member SESSIONS on the installation tape COLUMN SCALE PROFILE WITH 1 OPERATOR 2 SEND AND 2 RECEIVE SESSIONS STANDARD PROFILE SP1 DF099A00 091 00 00000000 00000000 OPERATOR SESSION DF099A00 092 00 S 00000000 00000000 1 SEND SESSION DF099A00 092 00 S 00000000 00000000 2 SEND SESSION DF099A00 093 00 R 00000000 00000000 1 RECEIVE SESS DF099A00 093 00 R 00000000 00000000 2 5 55 AS ABOVE BUT SECOND SEND AND RECEIVE SESSION ACTIVATED
208. e and stored into the internal reader without execution of the exit For this return code a message may be passed from the exit to the calling program 16 Indication that the job submission is to be cancelled All prior processed cards are flushed For this return code a message may be passed from the exit to the calling program All other return codes will be handled in the same way as return code 16 Rules for coding of exit DFUX003 This exit must be coded reusable or reentrant The exit must restore the contents of registers 2 13 when returning control to the calling rvs program The exit should not modify e field of the current record of the rvs Control Dataset KDRECORD e the length field of the message buffer A 5 Identification User Exit This exit may be used to check modify and control the identification phase which is executed on switched BSC lines after establishing of the line connection dialing This exit is called by the rvs monitor if the start parameter IDEXIT name has been specified see chapter 6 1 where name denotes the load name of the exit The exit is executed in following cases e Immediately before sending of the own identification to the remote station e After receiption of the identification from the remote station If the exit is given control rvs has already checked validity of the received station identification An example for using this exit is to change the SID in the id
209. e of a program profile table included in the rvs Tables dataset member PROGPROF on the installation tape rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix H rvsMVS Tables kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk rys PROGRAM PROFILE TABLE EXAMPLE deiek d de dekk k k k COLUMN SCALE ILIVILEIZILEIVITEIZI EE IVELEISTEEIVILEIAL E EIVELELISTELIVETEIGT ET IVI PROFILE1 SLAVE STATION FOR SWITCHED LINE TO rvsMVS 1 DF055A00 DF034K00 DF035K00 DF057B00 DF059COO 00061 PROFILE2 MASTER STATION FOR SWITCHED LINE TO rvs DOS REL 2 PP2 DFO56B00 DF034K00 DF035K00 DF057BO0 059 00 00062 PROFILE3 MASTER STATION FOR SWITCHED LINE TO rvs RPG PP3 DF055A00 0341 00 DFO35L00 DF057B00 DF059COO A0062 PROFILE4 MASTER STATION FOR SWITCHED LINE TO COMPUTERS USING THE rvs STANDARD PROCEDURE WITHOUT RESTART PP4 DFO55A00 DF034MOO DF035MOO DF057BO0 059 00 60062 PROFILE5 SLAVE STATION FOR SWITCHED LINE TO COMPUTERS USING THE rvs STANDARD PROCEDURE WITH RESTART PP5 DF055A00 DF034MOO DF035MOO DF057B00 059 00 0061 060 PROFILE6 SLAVE STATION FOR SWITCHED LINE COMPUTERS USING THE FILE TRANSFER PROTOCOL VDA 4914 PP6 DF055A00 DF034MOO DFO35M00 DF057B00 059 00 F0061 PROFILE7 MASTER STATION FOR SWITCHED LINE TO COMPUTERS USING THE FILE TRANSFER PROTOCOL VDA 4914 PP7 DF055A00 DF034MOO DF035MOO DF057B00 DF059COO F0063 PROFILE8 MASTER STATION FOR SWITCHED LINE TO COMPUTERS USING THE
210. e of the logdataset and the number of updates of the controldataset the data of the logdataset to be copied may be overwritten by new data Procedure for recovery of rvs Controldataset PDF00154 PDF0015A PROC PAPIER 015 RII IO III e He e e He e e He e e He He e III III rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset RESTORE OF rvs CONTROL DATA SET USE IT IN CASE OF CONTROL DATASET IS DAMAGED OR CONTROL DATASET IS FULL PDFO014A MUST HAVE RUN PREVIOUS TO THIS PROCEDURE 7 e He h e e h e He he e He he e He he e He He e He He e He He e He He e He He e He He e He He e He He e He He e He He e He She e He He e He He e He He e He e ke He e RECOVER EXEC PGM IDCAMS FF STEPLIB DD DSN SYS1 LINKLIB DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSIN DD DELETE RVS KD CLUSTER DEFINE CLUSTER NAME RVS KD CYL 3 1 VOLUMES volume FREESPACE 40 30 KEYS 70 0 SHAREOPTIONS 4 3 RECORDSIZE 550 1000 UNIQUE DATA RVS KD DATA CONTROLINTERVALSIZE 4096 INDEX NAME RVS KD INDEX CONTROLINTERVALSIZE 1024 SDF015A EXEC PGM DF073A00 STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT amp PAPIER DSN RVS KD DISP SHR KDSAVE DD DSN RVS KDSAVE DISP SHR RVSLOG DD DSN RVS LOG DISP SHR Remarks This procedure restores the rvs Controldataset The following files are used for this Last
211. e received file to tape DEMIG ALLOC HSM Specification how demigration is to be done DEMIG ALLOC specifies that a migrated dataset is to be demigrated during allocation processing The allocation routine will return control to rvs only after demigration of the file is complete DEMIG HSM specifies that rvs sends a demigration request to HSM The transmission will then be cancelled by rvs a send request will be set into a temporary HOLD status see HLDRESET parameter rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset DEMIG HSM should be specified if demigration processing takes longer times In these situations rvs is not forced to wait until demigration is complete Note that waiting for demigration processing whithin dynamic allocation implies that parallel allocation requests will also wait until demigration is complete so parallel transmissions are impossible during this time DQPERM YES NO Specification whether message DF49011 display of all files which are still to be sent DQ command is to be displayed as a highlighted permanent message DQPERM YES or not If DQPERME YES is specified message DF49011 is changed whenever the send queue changes this means message DF49011 always displays the actual values If a change within the send queue is detected all messages DF49011 will be deleted and new ones will be displayed This function uses the DOM macro thus MVS SP 2 2 0 or a later MVS release is required
212. e rvs APPC support can use either conversation type BASIC or MAPPED As an initiator the conversation type to use is taken from the definition of the station to call As a responder the conversation type to use is picked up from the allocation request and adherd to Note Only partner stations running portable rvs support MAPPED LBLKSIZE 2 100 2000 LSIZE J Line blocksize for transmission Optional parameter Allowed are values from 100 up to 2000 bytes Note The LSIZE value may be reduced to the max exchange buffersize value see rvs startparameter XBFSIZE rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset LUNAME 1 F Iuname luname 8 characters LU J Mandatory parameter Name of the logical unit of the remote station Note VTAM requires LU names of full 8 characters length LU62MODE mode1 mode2 mode3 LOGMODE names for the LU62 sessions with the following order modei modename for low priority session mode2 modename for medium priority session mode3 modename for high priority session All names must be defined in the LOGMODE table of VTAM for the used application ID The names must be precisely 8 characters long Note This LU62MODE names defined in the LUG2 station table entry have a higher priority than the names of the rvs start parameter If your partner station is running portable rvs for non MVS machines only one mode mode1 is presently supporte
213. ection requests 2 Trace of a certain remote station command T sid This trace records all l O events for the specified station For incoming connection requests this trace starts with sending of the OFTP protocol unit SSID the received SSID is not available in this case For outgoing connection requests the trace starts with the CONNECT macro rvsMVS Installation Manual 8 Special Functions Procedures In case of parallel sessions to the remote station different trace output is written for the different sessions see trace dataset names above 8 2 3 Format of BTAM Trace BSC lines For each executed BTAM macro a trace entry consisting of several rows is written The individual entries are separated by a dashed line An example is printed below Explanation of trace fields within a trace entry 1st row column 1 Active function S send R receive dataset column 3 5 Name of remote station DSN Name of transmitted dataset VOL Volume number of transmitted dataset KENN International fields of line control program STAT IND1 TIME Time of day BLKS Number of line blocks line buffers transmitted since start of this dataset BYTES Number of characters transmitted since start of this dataset 2nd row Column 3 5 subchannel address of the line All other fields are internal fields of the line control program 3rd row Listing of the BTAM control block DECB A short explanation of these fields is given in the prefix of the tra
214. ee Tables Dataset FTPRVSJC Deleting of old 2 2 2 2 146 ETPSESS 5 nonet nete ert 109 Description tiet eerie eee 224 FIPUID 5 5 ee ett erts 109 General eeu e eie 31 ETPUSE hue meet 55 Saving and Recovery sse 147 tiec 109 eon bind cc LE 101 Generations 93 BP soos ees oi eod es 13 15 16 84 Ior BSG asado av eoe earns 13 DDEVTYD nenne eei eiit 52 for FTP component see 26 DEMIG 3 ee eet eas 52 for LU 6 2 component esee 25 DFO054K sees tme ei ice 263 for remote operating function sess 29 DEO67 wc 37 for rvsWIN stations nnn 29 rvsMVS Installation Manual Index for SNA 17 MSGID ette ER en 57 141 for TCP IP component eee 26 MSGPERM see Tables Dataset MSGPERM for 25 19 ODETID 5 eb ER E PRIME 78 94 6 auido CEPR 13 14 ODID 1 eer eR ERE 57 4 4 17 eS Aes eR ee 78 94 NPSI beers 22 OPTIONS eae 79 Switched Major 2 2 22 242242 1 20 OPTS taste sik ceils eae 79 HEDRESET 25 55 OWNOLD
215. efor not readable Ckckck ck ck ck ck DSECT KKKKKK KK KK KK KK KK ckck ck ck kk CAUTION IH IH 5 RECORD HAS ALWAYS TO START AT THE HALFWORD BOUNDARY W N A DOUBLEWORD LAST CK CK CK CC CC CC CC CC C CK CC CC CC C CK C CK CC CK CC CC CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK CK S S S A S A x A A A X A X CNOP 6 8 KEYRECRD EQU x KEYSTART EQU Ck C Ck 0C CC CC Ck CC C Ck C Ck CC Ck Ck Ck Ck c0 ck Ck Sk Ck Ck ck ko Ck Sk ck Sk ko Sk ko ko ko ko ko ko ko X oko RVS KEYWORDS IN LOGICAL ORDER KEY OF RECORD KEYTYPE DS CL2 TYPE OF KEY PR PRIVATE KEY PU PUBLIC KEY ORG KEYSTYPE DS C SUBTYPE OF THE KEY R PRIVATE U PUBLIC KEYSID DS CL3 STATION DS CL5 RESERVED FOR LATER USE KEYID DS CL4 KEY IDENTIFIER NORMALY A HEX VALUE KEYRES DS CL4 RESERVED KEYDSN DS CL44 KEY NAME KEYDATE DS CL4 DATE KEYTIME DS CL4 TIME KEYKEYEND EQU
216. elds containing characters The lines containing these characters should not be modified Other parameters for example UNIT should be adapted to the corresponding installation Member FTPRVSJC of the rvs Tables Dataset This member contains the following JCL statements which are used for FTP file transmission rvsFTP component only MAIN SYSTEM XY11 RVSFTP1 EXEC PGM FTP STEPLIB DD DSN SYS1 LINKLIB DISP SHR SYSUDUMP DD SyYSOUT SYSDUMP DD SyYSOUT INPUT DD DISP SHR DSN HARE OUTPUT DD DISP OLD DSN SYSPRINT DD SyYSOUT RVSFTP2 EXEC PGM IEBPTPCH SYSPRINT DD SyYSOUT SYSUT1 DD DSN RVSFTP1 OUTPUT DISP OLD SYSUT2 DD SYSOUT PRINT MAXFLDS 1 RECORD FIELD 80 RVSFTP3 EXEC PGM IEFBR14 NEW DD DISP NEW CATLG CATLG DCB RVSFTP1 INPUT SPACE TRK 1 DSN HEATER EIER AG In this case rvs will generate and submit a job consisting of the modified content of members JOBCARDF if available and member FTPRVSJC rvs will modify all fields containing characters The lines containing these characters should not be modified or removed Other parameters for example UNIT should be adapted to the corresponding installation rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 6 Control
217. ember or stations entry W exit present yes xnumcheck exit SSID rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix B Description of the rvs controldataset record KDRECORD B Description of the rvs controldataset record KDRECORD This chapter contains the KDRECORD in terms of an assembler space description The record description is part of the installation tape member KDRECORD of the rvs source library and be used as DSECT within the rvs user exits DFUX001 DFUX002 and DFUX003 If used as a DSECT addressibility should be established by coding the symbolic name KDRECORD within the USING statement The address of the record within the parameter list of the exits is the address of the field KDRECTYP on offset 6 within this DSECT Some exit dependent remarks about the use of different fields are listed in Appendix A as part of the exit description DSECT KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ke ke ke hehe eek ke ke hehe eek ke ke hehe ek ke ke ke ke he e kk ke ke ke he eek ke ke khe eek ke ke ke k k k k k ke k k CAUTION THIS RECORD HAS ALWAYS START AT THE LAST HALFWORD BOUNDARY WITHIN A DOUBLEWORD KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK hehe e He e ke ke he hee e kk ke hehe ek ke ke ke hehe ek kk ke ke he eek kk He ke ec ek ke ke ke ke ke ke k k ke k k CNOP 6 8 KDRECORD EQU KDSTART EQU KK KK IKK e hee KK rvs KEYWORDS I
218. ength of the message and has to set by the exit byte 3 n Message buffer rvs always clears this buffer with blank characters before the exit is called address of the JCL card which is passed to the exit If this field is zero no card is passed to the exit If the exit sets this field to zero this card will be omitted for job submit Remarks If the job to be submitted is a PDS member the name of this PDS and member may be found in fields KDJOBDSN and of the current KDRECORD see appendix If the JCL card shall be modified by the exit these modifications can be done directly within the area containing the current card This area contains the original card no copy which rvs uses for processing after execution of the exit The exit may set one of the following return codes in register 15 rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits 0 the current JCL card is to be used for job submit If the address of the card within the parmlist is zero the card will be omitted 4 Indication to insert one ore more cards Processing of the current card is done in the same way as for return code 0 but the next call of the exit is performed without reading the next JCL card 8 Indication that the exit is no more to be executed during this job submission Processing of the current card is done in the same way as for return code 0 All following cards will be read from the input fil
219. ent row and data and parameter following Local socket number IP address of remote station Remote port number This portnumber varies for each connection it is different from that as specified whithin the rvs stations table for the remote station Rvs ID of remote station Date in the form yy ddd Time of day Type of request CONNECT ACCEPT READ WRITE CANCEL CLOSE issued or complete In most cases trace records are written only after completion of a request For READ and WRITE the received sent data are displayed in a dump format ODETTE protocol records are additionally displayed formatted For CONNECT ACCEPT parameters like local IP address and local port number are displayed For all completed requests the return error code is displayed The meaning of these codes depends on the executed request for more details see IBM TCP IP for MVS Application Programming Interface Reference 5 00001 REQUEST WRITE REMOTE ADDR COMPLETE 010 210 208 130 REMOTE PORT 01392 REMOTE STATION RV1 10000041 58314F30 30313330 30303030 31565720 20202020 20525654 20202041 41412020 20202030 30313238 4259594 30303120 20202020 20202020 20202020 OD ODETTE PROTOCOL UNIT START SESSION IDENTIFICATION SSID SSIDCMD X COMMAND IDENTIFIER SSIDLEV 1 PROTOCOL VERSION LEVEL SSIDCODE 00013000001VW RVT INITIATOR IDENTIFICATION SSIDPSWD AAA INITIATOR PASSWORD SSIDSDEB 00128
220. ent Receive Entries parameter JOB The use of this exit allows for example an accommodation of rvs to RACF requirements the exit might check if a RACF user who has created a resident receive entry with automatic jobstart is authorized for access to the jobsdataset specified within the resident receive entry The loadname DFUXOOS of this exit is required For operating system MVS XA both addressing mode AMODE and residency mode RMODE must be set to 24 bit addressing The rvs loadlibrary on the installation tape contains this exit as a dummy exit This means the distributed exit consists of the following two instructions LA 15 0 set returncode to zero BR 14 return to calling program rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits Depending on the results returncodes of the exit the job to be submitted may be modified modify delete or insert JCL cards e suppressed flush of job The following figure shows the environment in which the exit DFUX003 is executed read first next card of JCL to be submitted n end of input yes no WV link to exit DFUX003 write JCL card into internal reader flush job display exit message rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits Interface description of exit DFUX003 If the exit is entered e register 13
221. entification phase which fact is given in case of transmission with the Daten Austausch Kommunikations System DAKS of Daimler Benz in Germany For an example look at the end of this appendix Restrictions The exit will be executed only within the line control program DF055A00 this means that the line entry within the rvs stations table must specify a program profile which contains the module name DF055A00 in columns 4 12 Depending on the results returncodes of the exit the identification phase will be cancelled break of line connection or continued normally rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits The loadname of this exit is free selectable For operating system MVS XA both addressing mode AMODE must be set to 31 bit adressing and residency mode RMODE must be set to 24 bit addressing Interface description of the exit If the exit is entered e register 13 points to a 72 byte savearea e register 14 contains the return address e register 15 contains the entry point of the exit and e register 1 points to a fullword which contains the address of a parameter list with the following fields offset dec length description IXTMODE flags from calling module bitstring IXTFIRST 1 first call of exit after activation of the line only for initialization of the exit IXTNEXT 1 next call of exit IXTLAST lt last call of exit before stop of the line control program only for close pr
222. er This field could be useful to select an closed user group or any other facilities of X 25 Example Select closed used group X25FAC 0312 byte 0 1 basicversion byte 2 3 reference number of this closed user group For more information above facility fields contact your national telecommunication and network provider X25PSIZE nn 4 b 128 256 512 3 To support more than 25 numbers for one partner station nn specifies the partner number index If there is no index defined the parameter will be used for all X 25 numbers within this station table entry rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset PSIZE nn J nn 1 99 3 Optional parameter Do not specify it for general use The start parameter PSIZE is taken as default X 25 packet size sent in call request packet With this parameter it is possible to negotiate the flow control parameter packet size with the remote station The value may not exceed the value of the start parameter PSIZE X25SESS nn ss ss 1 64 nn 1 99 4 Maximum number of parallel sessions to the remote station Local and remote station should specify the same value for this parameter Default value X25SESS 1 X25WSIZE nn 1 12 7 WSIZE nn J nn 1 99 Optional parameter If not specified the start parameter WSIZE is taken X 25 window size sent in call request packet With this parameter it is possible to negotiate the flow contr
223. ess to the pasearch command to authorized users RDEFINE SERVAUTH EZB PAGENT ADCD TCPIP UACC NONE PERMIT EZB PAGENT ADCD TCPIP CLASS SERVAUTH ID PAGENT START2 ACCESS READ SETROPTS GENERIC SERVAUTH REFRESH Set up TTLS Stack Initialization access control SETROPTS CLASSACT SERVAUTH SETROPTS RACLIST SERVAUTH SETROPTS GENERIC SERVAUTH RDEFINE SERVAUTH EZB INITSTACK ADCD TCPIP UACC NONE PERMIT EZB INITSTACK ADCD TCPIP CLASS SERVAUTH ID ACCESS READ WHEN PROGRAM PAGENT EZAPAGEN SETROPTS GENERIC SERVAUTH REFRESH SETROPTS RACLIST SERVAUTH REFRESH SETROPTS WHEN PROGRAM REFRESH rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features Defining the digital certificates and key rings SETROPTS CLASSACT DIGTCERT DIGTNMAP RACDCERT ID START2 addring ATTLS keyring2 RACDCERT ID START2 CERTAUTH GENCERT SUBJECTSDN O T Systems CN RDZCA C DE TRUST WITHLABEL RDZCA KEYUSAGE certsign RACDCERT ID START2 GENCERT SUBJECTSDN 017 OU RVS C DE WITHLABEL RO1 SIGNWITH CERTAUTH label RDZCA RACDCERT ID START2 CONNECT ID START2 LABEL R01 RING ATTLS_keyring2 USAGE personal RACDCERT ID START2 CONNECT ID START2 CERTAUTH LABEL RDZCA RING ATTLS_keyring2 USAGE certauth SETROPTS RACLIST DIGTCERT DIGTNMAP REFRESH Export root certificate To verify the chain of trust we export our root certificate racdcert export label RDZCA
224. ey If the the external feature security is not available in license key and if parameter SECURITY EXT is used in STATIONS this parameter is ignored error message is written If the user uses the parameter SECURITY EXT during create of send request this is also ignored error message is written The rvs stationtable parameter SECURITY EXT NO determines the default value for all transfers with this station This default becomes always effective if the user doesn t use the SECURITY parameter during create of send request SECURITYZzEXT this means external feature security is used SECUTITY NO this means no security Default value of the station parameter SECURITY NO The user can also control the use of the external security via the parameter SECURITY EXT NO in the program DF080A00 1 Only usable with a special software Output Writer distributed by VW rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset The table shows the combinations of the parameters and its results assume that the external security feature is enabled by license key Station Parameter SECURITY Parameter Result SECURITY DFO80A00 unspecified unspecified no Encryption unspecified SECURITY NO no Encryption unspecified SECURITY EXT no Encryption with hint at users SECURITY NO unspecified no Encryption SECURITY NO SECURITY NO no Encryption SECURITY NO SECURITY EXT no En
225. eyword is given QTM must be omitted in the same set of search arguments Synonyme to this keyword is QTOD TTM yydddhhmmsst Transmit date and time 1 12 numeric characters optional Transmit date and time of the transmissions to be queried The format and the rules are analog to the ones of QTM If this keyword is given TDATE TDAY or TTIME must be omitted in the same set of search arguments TDATE date1 date2 Transmit date s optional TDATE nrofdays One or two dates to limit the transmit time frame in days of the queried transmission s The format and the rules are analog to the ones of QDATE If this keyword is given TDAY must be omitted in the same set of search arguments rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Reference Utility program DF076A TDAYzdate nrofdays Transmit date s optional TDAY date nrofdays TDAY nrofdays One date and a number of days to limit the transmit time interval in days of the queried transmission s The format and the rules are analog to the ones of QDAY If this keyword is given TTM or TDATE must be omitted Keyword DAY is a synonyme to TDAY TTIME time1 time2 Transmit time s of day optional TTIME time2 1 TTIME hh mm One or two times of day to limit the transmit time frame of the queried transmission s The format and the rules are analog to the ones of QTIME If this keyword is given TTM must be omitted in the same set of sear
226. f complete transmissions PDF0009A procedure to delete old records from rvs Controldataset PDF0014A procedure to save rvs Controldataset PDF0015A procedure for recovery of rvs Controldataset PDF0015B procedure for recovery of rvs Controldataset SMS is used PROGPROF rvs Program Profile Table only necessary for spec profiles SESSIONS rvs Sessions Table START rvs commands to be executed automatically after start STATIONS rvs Stations Table PFKEYS RMOP PF Keys The other members of the Tables Dataset are used for optional functions for example rvs Statistics A detailed description of all members containing control information for the rvs Monitor may be found in chapter 6 of this manual 5 8 Installation of the rvs ISPF panels The rvs ISPF panels allows access to the control dataset of rvs in a convenient manner The rvs user may use the panels for Queuing of datasets for transmission Display of completed transmissions e Deletion of send requests e Creation update or deletion of resident receive entries A detailed description of the functionality of the panels may be found in the rvsMVS User s Manual rvsMVS Benutzerhandbuch At least ISPF Version 2 Release 3 is required There are three system files to install for using the ISPF panels A panel dataset RVS ISPF PANEL that contains the panel members DFSOOPOO to DF550P00 Member DFOOOPOO contains the primary panel member DF100P00 contains the pane
227. f the transmitted dataset 54 63 10 C Reserved blanks 64 83 20 Transmission date and time of day interval expressions 64 75 Transmission date interval 64 69 A from date yyddd bbddd xxxx bbbbb 70 75 A to date yyddd bbddd bbbbb bbddd bbbdd bbbbd 76 83 Transmission time of day interval 76 79 A from time hhmm bbbb xxx 80 83 A to time hhmm bbbb 64 71 Blanks if following item is given 72 83 12 A Transmission date and time yydddhhmmsst 84 103 20 A Queuing date and time of day interval expressions 84 93 12 Queuing date interval 84 89 6 from date yyddd bbddd xxxx bbbbb 90 95 6 A to date yyddd bbddd bbbbb bbddd bbbdd bbbbd 96 103 8 Queuing time of day interval 96 99 4 A from time hhmm bbbb xxx 100 103 4 A time hhmm bbbb 84 81 8 Blanks if following item is given 92 103 12 A Queuing date and time yydddhhmmsst 104 109 6 A Reference number 110 115 6 N Synonyme sequence number alphanumeric left justified padded with blanks numeric padded with zeros at the left Legend Type A N C character left justified Symbols X any character b blank yy year 00 99 ddd day number 001 366 number of days 0 999 hh hours 00 24 mm minutes 00 59 ss seconds 00 59 t tenths of a second 0 9 Using the program DF076A Batch Job Example Run the Reference Utility in batch using the following sample job JOB BR KKK KK HK KK KKK KKK KKK KK HK HK KI KK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKH KK KKK e eee je ee eee KKK K
228. files DSPTIR nn 600 Waittime in seconds after which the list of resident receive entries in the monitors address space will be refreshed Starting with version 4 02 a list of all resident receive entries is built during monitor start within the monitors address space This list is refreshed periodically in order to detect new or changed resident entries nn may be a value between 5 and 999 seconds the default value is 10 minutes 2 Parameters used only for the BSC component BSCUSE YES NO Indication for the use of the BSC component 3 Parameters used only for the SNA component SNAUSE YES Indication for the use of the SNA component APPLID name Application ID of the local own station 4 Parameters used only for the X25 component MAXSVC xx 1 n Max number of switched virtual circuits ODID xx name Odette identification of the own station PSIZE xx 128 nnn Packet size of the national X25 network WSIZE xx 2 Windowsize for packet layer XBFSIZE 2000 nnn Max exchange buffer size XNUMBER xx number calling number of the local multichannel link X25GROUP groupid n m Definition of X25 groups X25TOT 10 nn timeout interval X25USE NO YES Indication for the use of the X25 component Note If you want to support more than one X 25 multi channel links you have to extend some of these parameters by an index xx 1 32 For instance X25NUMBER 1 05361 123456 X25NUMBER 12 053616
229. files greater than 2 GByte for encryption compression is added Use CSVER 2 for station which supports files greater than 2 GByte for encryption compression DIALOPTS b tirt tit rt1 ti2 rt2 ti3 rt3 ti4 rt4 DOPTS J Options for automatic dial Optional parameter Dial will be initiated automatically if a dataset is queued for sending See also DIALOPT2 DIALOPT3 and ACTOPTS ti ti1 ti2 specifies the time intervals in which automatic dial will be active dialing starts only if a send request for the remote station is queued Start time and end time must be written in hours and minutes Syntax ti hh mm hh mm Default value is 00 00 24 00 rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset rtrt1 12 specifies the retry time The retry time is the duration the program waits for dialing again after the last try was performed Allowed values 1 255 min Default value is 60 minutes The parameters must be put in brackets separated by comma Maximal input are four combinations of intervall and retry time Examples DIALOPTS 11 15 12 00 5 DOPTS 11 15 12 00 5 14 02 17 00 10 Note Do not specify time interval beyond midnight seperate it Instead DOPTS 23 00 06 00 5 use DOPTS 23 00 24 00 5 00 00 06 00 5 DIALOPT2 b dt dt1 dt2 dt3 dt4 DOPT2 J Times for mandatory automatic dial Optional parameter Dial will be initiated automatically if a certain
230. finds keys for decryption automatically KEYSTORE BUILTIN RvsMVS pay attention to all keys which are stored in p15 keystore and to all certificates which are imported for the partner station VSAM dataset rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features If the CERINDEX is greather than 0 the certificate with this index is used for encryption to this partner station If CERINDEX is 0 or not given the certificate which is valid and has the longest validity is used for encryption to this partner station RvsMVS finds certificates for signed files check signing automatically If the KEYINDEX is greather than 0 the key with this index is used to sign files If KEYINDEX is 0 or not given the key which is valid and has the shortest validity is used to sign files RvsMVS finds keys for decryption automatically CEEOPTS MSGFILE RVSCMSG 121 0 ENQ RPTOPTS OFF RPTSTG OFF TERMTHDACT UAIMM TRAP ON NOSPIE The Values RPTOPTS and RPTSTG are reporting options If there is a problem you will switch it to ON Important is that the option POSIX OFF is removed rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features 10 4 Configuration of OFTP2 Features 10 4 1 rvs Start Parameter CNTL member The rvs Start Parameter member CNTL of the rvs Tables dataset allows the configuration of global OFTP2 values SECRPREF name SECFSET COMSEC OFT P2 MAXRPT 05
231. for this because IBM has made an incompatible change for this macro within MVS SP 2 2 0 DSPLEVEL LOW MEDIUM HIGH Dispatching level for parallel transmission of datasets with the same name Started with rvsMVS rel 1 2 07 the internal ENQ name is expanded by the string USD DUNUSD TUNUSED where USD name of the partner station DUNUSD datestamp TUNUSED timestamp This values will be substitute by actual values in the following manner USD if DSPLEVEL MEDIUM or HIGH DUNUSD TUNUSED if DSPLEVEL HIGH DSPTI 60 nn Abbreviation DTI Dispatcher time interval in seconds nn may be a value between 5 and 999 This value determines the time interval after which the rvs dispatcher task becomes active Every nn seconds this task looks e if a previous entered DIAL command is to be executed or e if the rvs control dataset contains send requests which are to be processed If there is a send request for a certain station and if the connection to this station is defined as a e VTAM connection or e X25 connection or e LUG2 connection or e BSC line connection using the automatic dial function see chapter 6 2 definition of stations table the dispatcher task initiates processing of the send requests if a send session or an autodial line is active and waiting for work For X25 connections an outgoing call is initiated in order to activate a switched virtual circuit If the SNA component the X25 component and no autodial is u
232. g on the kind of error error message the following things should be checked e definition of the line subchannel within the rvs stations table IODEVICE generation for this subchannel parameter UNIT BSC1 EP generation of the control unit physical path between CPU control unit and modem hardware The line may be stopped again by entering the command P sid Test of SNA connections Before SNA sessions can be activated between local and remote installation the rvs VTAM subtask must be started This must be done by entering the command A RVSVTAM If activation was successful message DF9005I RVS VTAM CONTROL TASK READY is displayed If activation is not successful error messages will be displayed which indicate the kind of error After activation of the rvs VTAM subtask sessions to the remote station may be activated by entering the command A sid In this case rvs tries to activate all sessions which are defined stations table session profile for the remote installation Message DF99021 F sid nm SESSION ESTABLISHED FOR LU luname CID address indicates successful activation of one session to the remote station In case of error conditions error messages will be displayed instead of the above message Activated sessions may be stopped by entering the command P sid Test of X25 connections Before X25 sessions can be activated between local and remote installation the rvs X25 control task must be star
233. he receiving station by creating a resident receive entry indicated by bit KDRESREC of field KDBITS3 or in the sending station if bit KDRESREC is set off If sysout parameters are specified in the sending station a resident receive entry in the receiving station will be ignored by RVS rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits 2 Remote options specified in the sending station indicated by bit KDRMTOPT in field KDBITS2 This group includes KDVOLNRR KDSUNIT KDDEVR KDDISPR and KDBITSR1 If remote options are specified in the sending station and this station is authorized for this see Installation Manual definition of the stations table a resident receive entry in the receiving station will be ignored by rvs 3 Specifications within a resident receive entry indicated by bit KDRESREC in field KDBITS3 This group includes KDDEVTYP KDSUNIT KDVOLNRD KDDISP KDJOBDSN KDJOB KDUSERID KDRUSER and all fields of group 1 Automatic jobstart after receiption of a dataset is indicated by a nonblank field KDJOB If the field KDJOBDSN does not contain the name of a PDS the name of the central rvs jobdataset is valid the central jobdataset is allocated to the rvs Monitor with the ddname RVSJOBS see Installation Manual description of the rvs Start Procedure Fields KDUSERID and KDRUSER contain the values which have been taken from the job TSO session during creation of the resident receive entry These fields may
234. he relais station only for indirect transmissions ADDRESS address of the remote station note address field is empty if dataset RVS GROUPS is not used DIRECTION direction of transmission received or sent RECEIVED data received from remote station SENT data sent to remote station TRANSM total number of transmissions breaks inclusive BRKS number of transmission breaks TIME H M S transmission time in hours minutes seconds LINEBYTES number of transmitted bytes compressed data DATABYTES number of bytes of the origin data COMPRESSN average compression in percent of origin size COMPRESSN LINEBYTES x 100 DATABYTES SPEED BPS average speed of transmission in bits per second SPEED LINEBYTES 8 TIME rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix D rvs statistics D 5 Line Activity Program Jobs Line Activity Starting of Line Activity is possible either by a TSO CLIST member LINECL of dataset RVS TABLES or by a batch job member LINEJOB of dataset RVS TABLES Batch Job RVS TABLES LINEJOB JOB BRK KKK e KKK KK HK HK KK KKK HH HK KI KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK RVS STATISTICS LINE ACTIVITY REQUIRED PARAMETERS DAY MONTH YEAR NUMERICS EACH IF MONTHLY CALCULATION REQUIRED SET DAY 00 REQUIRED PARAMETER SUBCHANL 3 CHARACTERS BR KKK e KKK KK HK HK e he KKK KKK KI KK KKK KKK LINEJOB EXEC PGM DF553A P
235. he same value must be specified for both parameters Parameter VWINDOW of the X25VCCPT macro corresponds with the rvs start parameter WSIZE The same value must be specified for both parameters Note that this value must be the same as the value which is generated by the national telephone company within the X25 network for the multichannel link Parameter GATE GENERAL must be coded within the X25MCH macro The LLCLIST parameter of the X25MCH macro must contain the value LLCA Parameter LUNAME of the X25MCH macro corresponds with the rvs start parameter XLUNAME The same value must be specified for both parameters Parameter LCN of the X25VC macro corresponds with the rvs start parameter MAXSVC see chapter 6 1 OUT for parameter CALL of the X25VC macro is inhibited Allowed are IN and INOUT Important The NCP Generation must contain a LUDRPOOL definition with NUMTYP1zn nis the number of control blocks conserved in your NCP necessary for establishing the lu lu sessions between rvs CTCP and NPSI You should code this value according to the number of SVCs 3 3 3 Definitions for using the ISDN network The use of an ISDN network will be able by using a special hardware box which is switching the X 25 protocol to the ISDN protocol Such a special hardware box may be delivered e g from the COMTES or the DATUS company The box works as a protocol converter for X 25 To transfer data through the ISDN network rvsMVS uses an X 25 component
236. his is very important in order to be able to reload the datasets correctly on the MVS host Using rvsWIN you have to choose the option for advanced users Menu Options Einstellungen User Level Benutzerebene Professional Fortgeschrittene at first For queuing the datasets it is important to specify fixed record format with record length 80 but NO Text Be sure to specify a valid first level qualifier for the MVS environment e g your USERID It may take some time to transfer all files by rvsWIN For IND FILE it might be necessary to allocate enough space for the datasets e g 5 cylinders for the load libraries This may be done in the emulation software when transferring the files For FTP the options may differ dependent on the FTP server on the host Anyhow record length of 80 and record format FB are mandatory Reloading the host datasets All datasets except RECEIVE are unloaded PDS datasets that have to be loaded with TSO command RECEIVE To do so copy the job RECEIVE into your JCL library as a member adjust the job and the dataset names according to your installation requirements and submit it When the job has finished you will find six partitioned datasets with following names RVS CLIST RVS LOAD RVS MSGS rvsMVS Installation Manual 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS 14 15 16 RVS PANEL RVS SOURCE RVS TABLES RVS JOBS RVS EXEC with first level qualifier RVS changed according t
237. his page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 4 Subset 4 valid for X 25 XOT Direct Entries definition ACCESMET access method LBLKSIZE line blocksize PAD1 modification of X 28 parameters TYPE type of connection XNUMCHCK checking of remote X25 number X25CUD X 25 call user data field X25FAC facility field e g for closed user group X25NUM X 25 call number of the remote station X25PSIZE X 25 packet size X25SESS Max number of parallel sessions to remote station X25WSIZE X 25 window size mandatory parameter Note The X 25 component uses the ODETTE FTP OFTP Additional to these parameters subset 0 and subset 3 must be specified If you want to support more than one X 25 multi channel links you have to extend some of this parameters by an index 1 32 For instance 25 1 05361123456 X25NUM 12 05361654321 All parameters with the same index specify one CTCP Mandatory parameters you have to define for each CTCP Optionally parameters without index are valid for all defined CTCPs optional parameters with an index are valid for the specified CTCP only Description of rvs Station Table Parameters in detail ACCESMET t X 25 ACME J Access method must be X25 Mandatory parameter LBLKSIZE 2 128 2000 LSIZE Line blocksize for transmission Optional parameter Allowed a
238. ibrary Default LOADLIB RVS LOADLIB DSNKD RVS KD dsname DSNLOG RVS LOG dsname DSNTBL RVS TABLES dsname DSNJOBS RVS JOBS dsname Dataset names of the rvs system files The default values are the same names as used within this manual PWKD password PWLOG password PWTBL password PWJOBS password Remarks If one ore more rvs system datasets shall be password protected these passwords must be specified here No problems will occur if passwords are specified and the datasets are not password protected The Jobs Dataset RVS JOBS is not necessary The reason for this is that any PDS may be used in conjunction with automatic jobstart after reception If the installation of rvs OS release 3 2 replaces an earlier release of rvs including extension of the rvs Control Dataset the specification of the job dataset name is necessary in view of compatibility The source library of the installation tape member JOBRDYN contains the following sample job for call of macro rvsDYN JOB RVSDYN EXEC PGM ASMA90 STEPLIB DD DSN SYS1 LINKLIB DISP SHR SYSLIN DD DSN RVS DYN DISP NEW CATLG DELETE UNIT SYSDA SPACE TRK 1 SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSPUNCH DD SYSOUT SYSLIB DD DSN RVS SOURCE DISP SHR SYSUT1 DD UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 1 SYSUT2 DD UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 1 SYSUT3 DD UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 1 SYSIN DD RVSDYN LOADLIB RVS LOADLIB PWKD RVSPASS END rvsMVS Insta
239. ibuted as well This distributed exit is adapted to RACF and may be adjusted if another security subsystem is used The exit is executed when an rvsWIN user wants to establish a session with rvsMVS A password record V record is exchanged between rvsWIN and rvsMVS and then checked in the exit DFUX002 Depending on the results returncode and the environment of the exit the access to rvsMVS is accepted or rejected return code RC An appropriate message is generated in DFUX002 and sent back to the rvsWIN user as further information Interface description of exit DFUX002 If the exit is entered e register 13 points to a 72 bytes savearea e register 14 contains the return address and e register 1 points to a fullword which contains the address of a parameter list with the following fields offset dec length description fullword Address of password record received by rvsWIN VRECORD layout see below Should not be modified fullword Address of remote station of the assigned station entry STNAME length 8 bytes first 3 bytes significant In case that no valid station entry is found a default entry W1 or W2 is provided In this case the access is to be rejected Should not be modified fullword Address of password STRECVPW 8 bytes specified in station entry STNAME May be blank if it is not specified Should not be modified fullword Address of userid STUSERID 8 Bytes specified in station entry STNAME May be blank if i
240. ice of a name server rvs uses the GETHOSTBYNAME macro for access to the name server and this macro requires a runtime library of a C compiler This library bust be assigned to the rvs monitor STEPLIB DD Statement or must be defined as a linklist library If symbolic names are used the start procedure of the rvs monitor should also include a SYSTCPD DD statement as used whithin the ip stack configuration No default value TCPIPCHK YES rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Check of incoming remote IP address If incoming IP address does not correspond with IP address in parameter TCPIPADR the transfer of file will be rejected with RC 12 Access Method Error TCPPORT 3305 nn Remote portnumber nn may be a value between 0 and 32767 The portnumber specifies the application which shall be connected to For applications using the Odette File Transfer Protocol portnumber 3305 is registered by IANA USA TCPSESS 1 nn Maximum number of TCP IP sessions to the remote station nn may be a value between 1 and 99 Default value TCPSESS 1 rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 7 Subset 7 valid for FTP stations definition ACCESMET TP access method FTPERESP end to end response FTPHFILE header File non MVS only host names 55 user id password FTPPORT port number FTPPREF Prefix FTP
241. ice type 3390 Data class None Organization PS Current Utilization Record format FB Used cylinders 1 Record length 80 Used extents 1 Block size 6080 lst extent cylinders 1 Secondary cylinders 2 Dates Data set name type Creation date 2011 05 16 SMS Compressible NO Referenced date 2011 05 19 Expiration date None The initialization of the keystore is done first time a new keypair is generated Key management It is strongly recommend creating a backup of the keystore before writing e g generating a keypair or importing a CA reply A write failure may destroy the keystore which cannot be recovered for security reason There are two ways to generate a new keypair The first method creates a private key and a self signed X 509 certificate The certificate is stored into the keystore automatically The second method creates a private key and a certificate request The certificate request is used by certificate authorities CA to create a signed X 509 certificate The CA reply the signed certificate must be imported into the keystore Using the private key without importing the CA reply leads into an error It s not allowed to overwrite an existing certificate but it is possible to import a renewed version For this purpose the certificate must contain the same serial number the same issuer name and a longer validity It is
242. ill be activated as defined within the stations table parameter ACTMODE the session will be activated stopped only if the command for activation stopping contains the NIGHT subparameter for example A sid NIGHT This definition may be useful if the SDLC connection between two stations consists of more than one virtual route used for different applications batch transmissions dialog traffic If one or more virtual routes are not used all the time of a day the session may be started with the above mentioned command A sid NIGHT in order to use other virtual routes in addition to the normal batch virtual route s controlled by a separate logmode see description of columns 53 60 Module name of the VTAM handler routine DF099A00 must always be specified Module name of the session protocol handler routine Module name for an operator session DF091C00 Module name for a send session DF092C00 Module name for a receive session DF093CO00 Specification of the session type in character format One ore more of the following values may be coded in any sequence rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Column Description Session for operator operator communication This type of session is used for sending messages M sid command display of send requests queued in the remote station for transmission to the local own station Q sid command and mofification of
243. ils for a certificate located in the certstore Required parameter OID INDEX Optional parameter DD names CERTS the certstore dataset The list of a single certificate can be done using the example job RVS JOBS LISTCERT A JOB UIST EXEC PGM DF053C REGION 4M STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR CERTS DD DSN RVS CERTS DISP SHR SYSIN DD COMMAND LIST OID 0 ODETTE ID INDEX 1 COMMAND LIST ALL This command LIST ALL lists details for all certificates located in the certstore Required parameter Optional parameter DD names CERTS the certstore dataset 10 2 3 Certificate management parameter INDEX nnnn nnnn value between 1 and 9999 The index is the unique certificate identifier for ODETTE ID Note A value of 0 is not allowed OID ODETTE ID max 25 characters The ODETTE ID of the partner station as specified in the station table rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features 10 3 Steps to configure RACF access RACF KEY CERTSTORE The following steps are only required if you want to use RACF as keystore and certificate store e rvsMVS must have OMVS segment defined in e rvsMVS requires read access on several resources CSFPKD in CLASS CSFSERV CSFDSG in CLASS CSFSERV IRR DIGTCERT GENCERT in CLASS FACILITY CONTROL ACCESS IRR DIGTCERT ADD in CLASS FACILITY IRR DIGTCERT LIST in CLASS FACILITY IRR DIGTCERT LISTRING in CLASS FACILITY e Private
244. in the receiving section reception of the file will be rejected If the exit returns control to rvs with returncode 12 outside the receiving section rvs will act in the same way as described for returncode 4 rvs will always display a nonzero returncode of exit DFUX001 by writing a message to the console Remarks about the use of different KDRECORD fields Fields of special interest if the exit is called within the send sections of the rvs monitor or if it is called during creation of a send request outside the address space of the monitor value of KDRECTYP see also Appendix B of this manual KDREMOTE same value as KDFINAL KDDSN dataset name used as reference between sender and receiver KDDSNNEW physical dataset name KDUSERID jobname or TSO userid which created this record send request KDRUSER RACF userid of the above job TSO session if RACF is installed else blank If the exit is called within the receive sections of the rvs monitor value of KDRECTYP C AR or if it is called during creation of a resident receive entry outside the address space of the monitor value of KDRECTYP C RR the following fields are important in each case KDREMOTE KDDSN and KDDSNNEW There are four groups of other fields which may be of interest 1 Sysout specifications indicated by a nonblank field KDSYSOUT This group includes KDSYSOUT KDPROG KDFORM KDCOPIES and KDDEST Sysout specifications may have been done in t
245. into a sysout queue This specification might have been done either during creation of a resident receive entry for this dataset or in the remote station during creation of a send request for this dataset In both cases the SYSOUT parameter has been specified For more details about resident receive entries or send request see rvsMVS User Manual rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset If the length of this jobname userid is less than 8 characters the character will be added to this name Member of the rvs Tables Dataset This member contains the following JCL statements which are used if a dataset shall be copied from disk to tape after receiption RECTAPE EXEC PGM DF024A00 PARM IN DD UNIT SYSDA DISP OLD DELETE KEEP VOL SER DSN E HEH H HH HH HH HH H HHH H OUT DD UNIT TAPE DEFER DISP CATLG WILL BE MODIFIED DSN HEHHEE HEHEHE STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR In this case rvs will generate and submit a job consisting of the modified content of members JOBCARD and rvs will modify all fields containing characters The position of these fields line number column should not be modified The DISP parameter within the OUT DD statement might be changed to KEEP by rvs if required Other parameters for example UNIT should be adapted to the corresponding installation Member STAPEJC of
246. ion 3 is selected the following screen will appear the valid rvs password must be supplied for this function kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk 0 0 00 eek ee ROW 1 TO 2 OF 2 RVS DISPLAY AUTHORIZATIONS OF RVS USERS x KKK de ehe eek ke ehe ee KK ke e hee He KK de He de He de He de ke e KKK He ke He de He ee ke He He He e He e He e He e He e He He He He He He He He He He He He ke He ke ke ke ke ke k ke COMMAND gt SCROLL gt PAGE USER SEND REQUESTS RESIDENT ENTRIES USERID1 X USERID2 x X KKKKKKKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEKKKKKKKEKK BOTTOM OF DATA x xk k k k k k k kk kk kkk kkk kkk ke ke ke kkk This panels displays all USERID that have any authorization for deletion of SEND or RESIDENT RECEIVE ENTRIES 5 9 Creation of rvs Key Data dataset Creation and Initialization of the rvs Key Data set if Security Feature will be used see chapter appendix 5 10 Installation of the Security Library Data dataset There are no additional installation steps because all modules necessary for Security Feature of rvsMVS are linked together with the new program Service Provider DF310A 5 11 Creation of USP datasets See chapter 9 5 for Creation and Initialization of the rvs USP datasets if USP User Separation Feature will be used rvsMVS Installation Manual 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Da
247. ion of the Tables Dataset 1 t pw pw 1 8 characters SPW J Send Password Mandatory parameter Password will be sent to the remote station The ODETTE protocol requires a password exchange No default value SFIDEXTR name Name of the SFID_Receive_User_Exit See appendix A 6 for more details of using the exit No default value SFIDEXTS name Name of the SFID Send User Exit See appendix A 6 for more details of using the exit No default value SPCLOGIC YES NO Special logic support Optional parameter Some stations asynchronous links need support of special logic like calculation of Block Sequence Number Block CheckSum etc YES means the remote station needs special logic NO means the remote station don t need special logic SSIDEXTRzname Name of the SSID Receive User Exit See appendix A 6 for more details of using the exit No default value TYPE MVS Specification of remote station This parameter must be coded if the function PDS Transfer or the function VDSN up to 44 characters shall be used with the remote station An additional requirement for the use of this function is the installation of rvsMVS 2 2 00 or a following version on both sides No default value Pay attention to parameter MVSEXT SSIDEXTSzname Name of the SSID Send User Exit See appendix A 6 for more details of using the exit No default value rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset T
248. is specified DIALNUM is not allowed not necessary because the number has to be specified within your VTAM generation The autodial function is activ between 0 00 am and 12 pm with a retry time of 5 minutes default values rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 3 Special Transmission Protocols rvs Program Profile Table only used for the BSC component The internal Program Profile Table contains a number of standard entries corresponding to the supported transmission protocols chosen by stations parameter In addition to these fixed profiles some special profiles can be added using the dataset RVS TABLES PROGPROF Special program profiles are necessary for example for BTAM leased lines Creating special program profiles is described rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix H rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 4 Definition of rvs Sessions Table only used for SNA component This table member SESSIONS of the rvs Tables file must be installed if the SNA component of rvs shall be used for transmissions to at least one remote station The use of a session profile is quite similar to the use of a program profile for BSC lines A session profile defines the number and type s of sessions to a remote station Additionally different t
249. is equal for a key pair consisting of a public and private key 1 3 Maintenance of the key management 1 3 1 O0verview There are some members in the dataset TABLES for maintenance of the key management For a description of parameters and DD statements see chapter 1 4 e KEYSDEF create VSAM key dataset KEYSINIT initialize VSAM key dataset e KEYSGEN generate a key pair e KEYIMPAL import key pair to the key management e KEYIMPPU import public key to the key management e KEYLIST list keys from the key management KEYEXPRT export keys from the key management to a sequential file e KEYIMPRT import keys from a sequential file to the key management e KEYDELET delete key s from the key management I 3 2 Creation of rvs Key Data dataset The jobs KEYDEF and KEYSINIT can be used to create and initialize the rvs Key Data dataset Examples A JOB SEEE H Ie e Te F Fe Te EERE EERE ERE EEE ER EERE EERE ERE EERE BEER EE ERR EER EERE EEE BEER EREEE CREATE KEY DATA SET J BRR ZE e de Fe Fe de ERE e de Fe Fe de He ERE RE EE Fe e Te Te Ze Fe de e RRR DEFINE EXEC PGM IDCAMS SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSIN DD DEFINE CLUSTER NAME P390A V2CS NEWOl KEYS 1 rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix I Key Data Utility Program DF054K VOLUME ELO103 FREESPACE 30 20 5 70 0 SHR 4 3 RECORDSIZE 550 5000 UNIQUE DATA NAME P390A V2CS NEWOl KEYS DATA CONT
250. ish a connection session Connection session requests from or to an inactive station will be rejected This parameter is not valid for BTAM BSC leased lines NORELAIS sid Suppression of routing to the final destination sid This parameter may be used to reject receiving of files which are sent by the remote station with the destination sid Receiving of files with other destination than sid will not be rejected Remark if sid specifies the station ID of the own local station receiving of all files from the remote station with this destination will be rejected In this case the remote station may only send files via the local station to other destinations ODETID 1 hz Odette id Odette id max 25 chars OID J Odette identification of remote station The Odette id must be put into quotes if it contains blanks No default value Mandatory parameter if you use VDA FTP 4914 1 ODETTE identifications will be defined and issued by the national automotive associations For the Federal Republic of Germany the following address should be consulted Verband der Automobilindustrie e V VDA WestendstraBe 61 Postfach 170563 Kennwort VDA AVKD 4914 60079 Frankfurt Tel 069 97507 283 Fax 069 97507 300 Mail habild vda de Registration and distribution of ODETTE ID is not free of charge OPTIONS RJOB RJE ROPT REPL ALL OPTS J rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Data
251. isk in place of date1 the dates are defaulted to the current machine date If the asterisk is followed by a minus sign nrofdays number of days one to three digits the date1 is replaced by the date given number of days before the current machine date Examples current machine date is 94 108 that is 18 05 94 expression equals to interval QDATE 18 05 94 18 05 94 QDATE 3 15 05 94 18 05 94 QDATE 240 11 08 93 18 05 94 If this keyword is given QTM or QDAY must be omitted in the same set of search arguments QDAYzdate nrofdays Queuing date s optional QDAY date nrofdays QDAY nrofdays One date and a number of days to limit the queuing time interval in days of the queried transmission s The explicitely given date has format yy ddd or simply ddd or even the more natural and self explanatory form of date dd mm yy The nrofdays number of days is separated by a minus or a plus to indicate the other limiting date nrofdays before or after the given date yy year 2 digits ddd day number within the year 3 digits mm month 2 digits dd day within the month 2 digits nrofdays number of days 1 3 digits If in ddd format the given day number is greater than the current machine day number the year is defaulted to the previous one Examples current machine date is 94 138 that is 18 05 94 expression equals to interval QDAY 065 06 03 94 06 03 94 140 365 20 05 93 19
252. iting of an event to a job sched system failed 1 byte Sysout Class 44 bytes Name of Job Dataset or Event Resource Name Dataset name of a PDS containing a job to be started by rvs after receiving or Resource name of an event which has been written indicated by an E in column 262 8 bytes Name of Job Dataset Member Name of the PDS member containing a job to be started by rvs after receiving 8 bytes Jobname name of the job to be started after receiving 1 byte Dataset could not be cataloged N dataset could not be cataloged R existing and cataloged dataset has been replaced and could not be cataloged a second time 8 bytes RACF userid for deleting entry If this record has been changed for example a send request has been deleted the rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix F Reference Utility program DF076A RACF userid of the user will be issued in this field Name of delete job If this record has been changed by a job for example a send request has been deleted the jobname will be issued in this field Number of restarts Number of attempts to restart the transmission RACF userid of user job who created this entry Jobname of job user who created this entry Line or subchannel name of BSC connection Autodial count number of automatic dial attempts that preceded this transmission Connection type A Automatic Dial Proce
253. ity program DF076A above CCCC counter 0001 9999 0000 counter not used Security feature set used for transmission BLANK security feature not used O OFTP2 security used C ComSecure used L Online Encryption used Compression BLANK security features not used or not available Y compression used N compression not used Encryption BLANK security features not used or not available Y encryption used N encryption not used Signature OFTP2 only BLANK security features not used or not available Y signature used N signature not used Signed EERP requested OFTP2 only BLANK security features not used or not available signed EERP requested N signed EERP not requested Reserved blank Legend A alphanumeric left justified N numeric right justified C character left justified Return codes reason codes Return code is returned in register 15 and reason code in register 0 to the caller Additionally they are printed with an explaining message in the SYSOUT dataset or in the output dataset if the output is in keyword format Return codes and their meanings 0 The search has been successfully executed the number of matching records is exactly one 4 The search has been successfully executed the number of matching records is two or more 8 The search has been successfully executed the number of matching records is zero 12 Logical error s in parameter input area or in some of input datase
254. ivated explicit or by an A ALL command Operator commands Activation of sessions see chapter 5 6 of rvsMVS Operation Manual ACTOPTS2 tw rt tw1 rt1 tw2 rt2 tw3 rt3 tw4 rt4 Options for automatic activation see AUTOACT of sessions Optional parameter tw tw1 tw2 specifies the time windows when AUTOACT is active Start time and end time must be written in hours and minutes Syntax tw hh mm hh mm Default value is 00 00 24 00 rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset rt rt1 rt2 specifies the AUTOACT retry time The retry time is a delay for the program to try the activation again The retry time is of no meaning if the last attempt was successful If last establishing of the session fails the next attempt starts after retry time has elapsed To avoid loops retry values less than 5 minutes are not allowed Allowed values 5 255 min Default value is 60 minutes The parameters must be put in brackets separated by comma Maximal input are four combinations of tw and rt Example ACTOPTS 11 15 12 00 5 14 02 17 00 10 AUTOACT ON OFF Autoactivation of SNA sessions Optional parameter Sessions will be automatically re activated after an abnormal or normal end The reactivation starts not immediately but after a specified delay time see ACTOPTS Autoactivation is suppressed after the operator has terminated the session by a stop command Autoact function works again
255. kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkxk MAPPING DSECTS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkxk CEECAA LE COMMON ANCHOR AREA CEEDSA LE DYNAMIC STORAGE AREA END DF053R rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits 11 Appendix A rvs User Exits A 1 Authorization Exit DFUX001 The exit DFUX001 may be used to check authorization for e updates of the rvs Control Dataset e transmission sending of datasets and or e the use of special processing options during or after receiption of datasets like automatic jobstart and others It may also be used to control which datasets are to be received and which datasets are not to be received receiving rejected The use of this exit allows for example an accommodation of rvs to RACF requirements the exit might check if a RACF user is authorized to transmit a dataset to another installation or if a RACF user is authorized to initiate a jobstart after receiption of a dataset The loadname DFUX001 of this exit is required For operating system MVS XA both addressing mode AMODE and residency mode RMODE must be set to 24 bit addressing The rvs loadlibrary on the installation tape contains this exit as a dummy exit This means the distributed exit consists of the following two instructions
256. l of option 1 sending a dataset member DFAOOPOO contains the panel of option A user authorization and member DFSOOPOO is for internal use only e Amessage dataset RVS ISPF MSGS that contains all ISPF error information messages Aclist dataset RVS ISPF CLIST that contains all clists for controlling the panels These datasets may be allocated to the DD names ISPPLIB ISPMLIB and SYSPROC or respectively copied into existing datasets which are already allocated to these DD names Another possibility is to use a dynamic allocation as layed out on the following page In this case you only have to specify the variables DFCLIST 4DFPANEL and DFMSGS with the appropriate names e g RVS ISPF CLIST etc For using the TSO command rvs the following member RVS ISPF CLIST rvs must be inserted in the installation 5 command procedure library rvsMVS Installation Manual 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS DEFINITION OF FIXED VARIABLES PLEASE INSERT YOUR OWN VARIABLES SET amp DFLOAD RVS LOADLIB SET amp DFCLIST RVS ISPF CLIST SET amp DFPANEL RVS ISPF PANEL SET amp DFMSGS RVS ISPF MSGS SET amp DFUNIT1 SYSDA UNIT FOR TEMP USE CLIST DF100COO 1 SET amp DFDAYKE 7 NUMBER OF DAYS THAT RECORDS ARE KEPT IN THE CONTROLDATASET REFER TO PARAMETER DAYS IN PROCEDURE PDF0009A INST MANUAL DELETING
257. llation The local rvs installation must be defined within VTAM as a separate VTAM application VBUILD TYPE APPL rvsA APPL AUTH ACQ PARSESS YES VPACING 7 MODETAB LMTrvs DLOGMOD rvs1 Remark The name of the APPL statement here RVSA must be the same as specified for the rvs Startparameter APPLID see chapter 6 1 Logmode table for rvs It may be useful to define a separate log mode table for RVS The use of log mode entries with different COS names allow the use of different Virtual Routes for different parallel sessions between the local and remote rvs installation application A special log mode entry will be used by rvs during activation of a session to the remote application rvs installation if e the name of the logmode to be used for this session is specified within the rvs Sessions Table see chapter 6 4 description of columns 53 60 e the activation of the session is a result of an activation command in the local rvs installation see rvs Operation Manual activation command A sid rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit The following is an example of a log mode table with three entries used by rvs kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk RVS1 BATCH VIRTUAL ROUTE LOW PRIORITY RVS3 DIALOG VIRTUAL ROUTE LOW PRIORITY RVS5 LOGMODE FOR A PU TYPE 2 COMPUTER KKK ke e hee e He He e hee ke hee ke he
258. llation Manual 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS Execution of this job results in creation of JCL stored in the dataset RVS DYN This JCL should be modified jobcard etc and executed For operating system MVS XA both addressing mode AMODE and residency mode RMODE must be set to 24 bit addressing 5 4 Change of dataset names within Tables file In order to adjust the sample jobs procedures of the Tables file to requirements of the installation the names of the following datasets unless the names of this manual shall be used should be changed wherever these names appear in the tables file rvs load library RVS LOAD rvs control dataset RVS KD rvs log dataset RVS LOG rvs tables dataset RVS TABLES rvs key dataset RVS KEY DS 5 5 Creation of rvs Control Dataset The following jobs members DEFKD and INITKD of rvs Tables Dataset may be used to create the control dataset JOB KDDEFINE EXEC PGM IDCAMS STEPLIB DD DSN SYS1 LINKLIB DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSIN DD DEFINE CLUSTER NAME RVS KD CYL 3 1 VOLUMES volume FREESPACE 40 30 KEYS 70 0 SHAREOPTIONS 4 3 RECORDSIZE 550 1000 UNIQUE DATA NAME RVS KD DATA CONTROLINTERVALSIZE 4096 INDEX NAME RVS KD INDEX CONTROLINTERVALSIZE 1024 JOB KDINIT EXEC PGM DF079B00 STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT KD DD DSN RVS KD DIS
259. lso chapter 6 1 1 of this manual In addition to the explicitly coded parameters following default values are valid ACTMODE NORMAL CREDIT 999 DIRECTN B LSIZE 2000 5 PWMOD YES SPCLOGIC NO Direct Station Entry LU6 2 Station LU6 is directly connected In addition to the explicitly coded parameters following default values are valid AUTODIAL YES LBLKSIZE 2000 SPCLOGIC NO ACTMODE NORMAL Direct Station Entry rvsWIN Station PC1 is directly connected to rvsMVS rvs uses a fixed password while esablishing the session No LUNAME is needed any LUNAME is accepted rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Direct Station Entry rvsWIN using RACF Station PC2 is directly connected to rvsMVS rvs checks the USERID and password of the user who wants to get access by rvsWIN see exit DFUX002 Appendix A No LUNAME is needed any LUNAME is accepted Direct Station Entry TCP IP Station TCP is directly connected In addition to the explicitly coded parameters the following default values are valid ISTATUS ACTIVE AUTODIAL YES DIALOPTS 00 00 24 00 60 DIRECTN BOTH PWMOD YES SPCLOGIC NO Direct Station Entry FTP Station FTP MVS station is directly connected In addition to the explicitly coded parameters the following default values are valid TYPE MVS FTPHFILE YES FTPREFN YES FTPPORT 21 ISTATUS ACTIVE AUTODIAL YES DIALOPTS 00 00 24 00 60 Direct Station Entry
260. ly in call parameter input The synonyme of this parameter is OUTF FMT format Output format 2 characters optional This keyword parameter defines if needed the format of the output The valid values of format are FX The output is written in fixed format records see below which are derived from the accessed rvs Control Dataset records KD The output is written as truncated rvs Control Dataset records with no editing If output goes to parameter output area the whole record is moved If output goes to a dataset the records may be truncated to the record length of the output file KW The output is written in keyword format records which edited from the accessed rvs Control Dataset records The data length of the records is 80 bytes This parameter may be given only in call parameter input STATUS status Status of transmission 1 character optional The status of the transmissions to be queried The value is a single nonblank character according to the list below This parameter must be given if TYPE is not defined but is exclusive with TYPE rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Reference Utility program DF076A Valid values S Dataset s sent successfully completed or not R Dataset s received successfully completed or not D Dataset s due to be sent or received NOTE This parameter is applicable only in keyword format input record This parameter may also be expressed by TYPE S
261. mber RVS TABLES TRNTABLE on the installation tape For translating ANSI files this table must be coded within a Resident Receive Entry CODETRNS ANSI2E ses User s Manual Benutzerhandbuch There are four standard tables that are used for code translation The table names STDE2A STDA2E ODTE2A and ODTA2E You can find these tables in the member TRNTABLE of the dataset RVS TABLES These tables are hard coded in the rvs programs and are used for code translation when CODETRNS YES or FORMAT TEXT is specified rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset table name direction CODETRNS YES Send CODETRNS YES Receive FORMAT TEXT Send FORMAT TEXT Receive FORMAT TEXT is a parameter used in the ODETTE File Transfer Protocol When both CODETRNS YES and FORMAT TEXT are coded the standard tables STDE2A and STDA2E are used instead of ODTE2A and 2 for further information see User Manual Benutzerhandbuch These four standard tables may be adapted to user s requirements when they are coded in the member TRNTABLE The hard coded tables are then overwritten by these tables Also any table be taken even for FORMAT TEXT by coding CODETRNS owntable The table owntable must be coded in the member TRNTABLE as well rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 7
262. med only if access to the internal reader and to member JFPJCL is possible Thus submit of this member cannot be performed in all situations when automatic jobstart fails but will be performed in most of these situations for example the jobmember which has been specified within the resident receive entry does not exist or the allocation of the jobdataset PDS failed rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 4 It is not possible to display the reason for the failing automatic jobstart within this function processing of the rvs start parameter JFP YES The reason for failing automatic jobstart must be obtained from the rvs error message which is displayed on console hardcopy at the time when the jobstart failed rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 11 Code Translation The member TRNTABLE of the rvs Tables Dataset may be used to perform code translation during file transmission This member contains code translation tables that are used when the parameter CODETRNS see User Manual Benutzerhandbuch for send requests or resident receive entries is coded For using the member TRNTABLE of tables data Set it is necessary to insert a DD statement named TRNTABLE into your rvs Start Procedure to make this member well known to rvs The following list is one example of a code translation table for EBCDIC to ANSI code translation The table is preceded by it s name and must con
263. mmediately by entering the command MSG REFRESH or MSG R The member itself is devided into groups subsets of message definitions each subset is assigned with a name The reason for this division into different subsets is a high flexibility when selecting different subsets of messages to be suppressed displayed on console rem operating The selection of a subset of messages for a certain function may be controlled by the following commands MSG CNSLSUPzname or MSG CS name suppression of console messages MSG CNSLDSPL name MSG CD name display of console messages MSG RMOPSUP name or MSG RS name suppression of rem op messages MSG RMOPDSPL name or MSG RD name display of rem op messages The assignments of message subsets to the different functions and the fact which of the function is active or not be displayed with the command MSG DISPLAY or MSG D After start of the rvs monitor and after entering of the REFRESH command the functions will be assigned with default subsets of messages if defaults are defined see below If there is no default assignment for a function this function remains inactive until the command MSG fktzname is entered fkt denotes one of the four functions see above rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Each function may be set inactive by entering the command MSG fkt NONE Additionally there is a command to reset all functions to
264. n Acrobat Reader format Installation Manual pdf Messages and Codes pdf User Manual pdf Benutzer Handbuch pdf Operation Manual pdf Operator Handbuch pdf 5 3 Creation of module DF067A Macro rvsDYN rvsMVS requires the generation of a module with name DF067A This module contains the installation dependent datasetnames and if used passwords of the rvs Systemfiles The dataset names and if present passwords will be scrambled and stored within the module This module is used by many rvs programs in order to perform dynamic allocation of one or more of the rvs Systemfiles if required Member rvsDYN of the Source Library second file of the rvs installation tape contains the macro rvsDYN which may be used to create the module This macro generates JCL statements Execution of these statements results in assembly and link of module DF067A Caution rvsMVS Installation Manual 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS For operating system MVS XA both addressing mode AMODE and residency mode RMODE must be set to 24 bit addressing Coding of macro RVSDYN RVSDYN LOADLIB RVS LOADLIB dsname DSNKD RVS KD dsname DSNLOG RVS LOG dsname DSNTBL RVS TABLES dsname DSNJOBS RVS JOBS dsname PWKD password PWLOG password PWTBL password PWJOBS password OR F HF X X END Significance of the parameters LOADLIB RVS LOADLIB dsname Dataset name of the rvs load l
265. n Compression Security temporary files nnnn may be a value from 1 up to 9999 YUNITC nn 10 This parameter is used for the security component only This parameter specifies the unit count for multivolume datasets used for allocation Compression Security temporary files may be a value from 1 up to 20 If not defined then the value of parameter UNTCOUNT is used If both parameters YUNITC and are not defined the default value is 10 YUNITNzname This parameter is used for the security component only This parameter specifies the symbolic name of a disk unit group which will be used for allocation Compression Security temporary files If not defined then the value of parameter UNIT is used If both parameters YUNITN and UNIT are not defined the default value is SYSDA rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 1 1 Example for definitions to support more X 25 multi channel links 1 Example Definition of three X 25 multi channel links using different networks lt 72 characters gt lt 8 gt Ek ke ke ke e ke e ke e KK KKK TOP OF DATA ck ehe che ke ce ke ec ke e e e e c e e e e e e e e e ek EET 2505 5 ODID 00013000001VW RVS 2 e e e ke ke ke ke ke KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK he ke he e he KKK ke e KEKE KK KEKE 1 Definition for CTCP 1 ISDN
266. n is a number between 01 and 09 or blank The value of nn must be the same within one pair of DD names Remark If you want to look to SYSWTOnn protocols during the run of the rvs monitor please use a pre allocated not empty file within the DD statement and allocate it with DISPZSHR As soon as the records have been written onto disk it is possible to look at them e g with ISPF BROWSE rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 2 The member of the rvs tables dataset which is allocated with DD name MSGIDnn to the rvs monitor must be created The layout of this member is as follows The first line columns 1 6 left justified may contain one of the values ONLY Only the messages with the following message identifiers will be printed to the protocol EXCEPT All messages except the messages with the following identifiers will be printed to the protocol If none of the above values is specified EXCEPT will be assumed In the first line between columns 8 and 72 and in the following lines of the member between columns 1 and 72 rvs message identifiers first 6 characters may be coded separated by at least one blank The following example of a message selection member is contained in member MSGID of the rvs tables dataset on the installation tape EXCEPT 6 6 3 Definition of non deletable messages Every rvs message may be defined as non deletable this means the message is written to
267. nd stops display of rvs messages on the screen If this command has been entered and processing of commands display of messages shall be reinitialized both commands OP ON and RMSG ON must be entered RMSG OFF Stops the function to display rvs messages on the screen To reinitiate this function the command RMSG ON must be entered RMSG ONP Same as command RMSG ON Additional all print only messages messages which are not displayed on console but only in the rvs job log will be displayed on the screen To stop display of print only messages but not display of others the commands RMSG OFF and RMSG ON must be entered rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Using the Remote Operating Function LOGOFF PF1 KEY PF2 PF11 and PF13 PF24 PF12 KEY PFxx PFL PFLxx PFLxxyy PFL PFL PFxx Terminates the remote operating session Pressing of PF1 on the 3270 keyboard results in stopping of message display on the screen same as command RMSG OFF But in difference to the RMSG OFF command reinitiating of the message display function will be done automatically if any input data are entered from the screen Pressing of PF2 PF11 or PF13 PF24 on the 3270 keyboard simulatet command entry The processing is the same as if you hat typed the character string in the command line and pressed the ENTER key attention commands are immediate commands Repeatedly entering PF12 causes the command
268. nd DDNAME key pair C PGM DF054K PARM KEYS DSN P390A V2CS NEW01 LOAD DISP SHR DSN P390A V2CS NEW01 KEYS DISP SHR DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEY PR DISP SHR DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEY PU DISP SHR SYSOUT DDNAME KEYPROOO NEW rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix I Key Data Utility Program DF054K DDNAME KEYPUOOO NEW Import a public key of your partner A JOB KEYIMPT EXEC PGM DFO54K PARM KEYS STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR KEYPUOO0 DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEY PU DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT KEYPARAM DD PID R11 DDNAME KEYPUOOO NEW 1 4 3 Function LIST List keys from the key management DD Statements KEYDATA key management dataset VSAM Dataset SYSPRINT program logfile JOB KEYLIST EXEC PGM DFO54K PARM LIST ALL STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT 1 4 4 Function EXPT Write keys from the key management to a sequential dataset DD Statements KEYDATA key management dataset VSAM Dataset KEYPRINT sequential Output file SYSPRINT program logfile JOB KEYEXPT EXEC PGM DFO54K PARM EXPT ALL STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT KEYPRINT DD DSN P390A KEYPRINT DISP SHR KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR 1 4 5 Function IM
269. nerale n eap uie 229 Start and 165 RIPE 234 s nen x REIR EN 172 Hne activity i eene EDU RUPEE 233 TRACE gn ee este eel on see DERE REESE 62 station activity eee cece cee csee cee ereeeeeeeeeeeeeees 230 Transmissions STEPEIB steer ERR REPE 141 Overview 292 143 STORA C euer RERE ORE 60 61 0 nsn ETE 142 SUBGITANTL net er Er eH 86 TSTAM PE ut eee es 62 SYNCLWVL entonces Ear i 102 zuo EH 91 95 98 109 SYSOUTJC see Tables Dataset SYSOUTJC Heo RED esos 87 115 SYSWTTO 135 141 PER 62 Tables Dataset 91 CNTEMSQ 4 ot sitet s 134 UNITA ite it eet Ga ee RN 62 63 8 iade 131 142 User Exits general esee 32 33 34 213 sioe mE eer e Uds 151 DEUXO OT ette 205 uso sc a 129 142 DEUXO002 zem ooo teens 211 JOBCARDDE 5 ec eor E eis 131 DEUXO0085 5 4 5 damos 214 JOBCARDS 3 55 5 x om is 129 Identfication a oriens 217 Modification iiin 40 OFTE Rite 221 MSGPERM nnne 136 USERTID ith ete ee ete HE 91 Program Profile Heys 86 259 MEA iet E vente Mute anes 111 117 Program Profile
270. network company for the multichannel link To support more than one X 25 multi channel links you have to define this parameter for each X 25 multi channel CTCP The parameter without Index extension is valid for all defined X 25 multi cannel links in your rvs Monitor X25GROUP groupid n m groupid max 8 characters n m list of CTCP numbers which should be comprised in this group This parameter is used to define an X 25 group to comprise several X 25 multi channel links Use this parameter another time to define more than one X 25 group It is possible to use the same CTCP number in various groups The groupid may be referred to by partner stations table entries in parameter X25NUM See also chapter 6 2 4 of this manual X25TOT 10 nn This parameter is used only components which use the ODETTE FTP It specifies the timeout interval in minutes which is used by the ODETTE file transfer protocol to control time out situations nn may be a value between 1 and 255 X25USE YES NO This parameter is used only for the X25 component It indicates that this component is to be used by rvs In this case during start of the monitor rvs will check if the other parameters related to the X 25 component are completely specified or if default values are available If one ore more of these parameters are not specified and if no defaults are available the X25 component cannot be used A list of all parameters for the X25 component may
271. ning steps will be done by rvsMVS automatically rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features 9 4 External Security The Security Feature of rvs uses both a symmetric cipher 3DES and a public private key cipher RSA The encryption works by using a public private key cipher to share a key for the symmetric cipher Because of the symmetric key sharing the used symmetric key is different for each file transmission The actual data set being sent then is encrypted using the session key and sent to the partner It is possible to create and use private and public keys with a size between 768 and 2048 bit In case of encryption of a data set rvs provides a document s digital signature which protects the transmitted data set against changes and check the ownership of the transmitted data The implementation of this feature uses a hash function The following defaults will be used by rvs for the encryption procedures e for encryption DES3 with RSA e for hash value determination SHA1 External Security Feature is based on an external program library run time version and this programs are linked with the new task Service Provider Therefore there is one additional installation steps only to the well known rvsMVS installation to use this security feature e creation of the Security Key Data Set Please refer to chapter 5 1 and 5 9 5 10 Additional the parameter SECURITY EXT has to inserted into the STATION entry to inform ab
272. nisation Load module library RVS LOAD Library PDS rvs Controldataset RVS KD VSAM KSDS rvs Logdataset RVS LOG BDAM dataset rvs Tables Dataset RVS TABLES Library PDS rvs Key Dataset RVS KEY DS VSAM KSDS rvs User Mapping Dataset USP RVS USERDATA VSAM KSDS rvs User Mapping Log USP RVS USERLOG BDAM dataset rvs User Log Dataset USP RVS LOGDATA VSAM KSDS rvs User Log Log USP RVS LOGLOG BDAM dataset rvs JOBS Dataset RVS JOBS rvs EXEC Dataset REXX RVS EXEC 4 1 rvs Load Library The rvs software is provided in load module form The load library contains all modules which are used for rvs operation and control Some modules within this library are dummy modules for example modules used as installation dependent exits These modules may be replaced by other programs A description of these exits is contained in the appendix of this manual Remarks The installation tape contains different load libraries depending on the fact which components of rvs are distributed BSC SNA X25 Message DF3046I INCLUDED COMPONENTS OF rvsMVS will be displayed after start of the rvs Monitor in order to indicate which components of rvs are available in the installation The rvs load library may contain an expiration date This date is used to distinguish between test installations of rvs and normal installations If an expiration date is included message DF30441 EXPIRATION DATE OF CUR
273. nit VOL SER volume SPACE 1000 501 1 Remarks e The space for the Log Dataset has been selected for approx 30 transmissions per day If more transmissions are planned or already executed the space specification number of blocks must be increased e The number of blocks within the rvsLOG DD statement must specify at least one block more than the RECORDS parameter within the EXEC statement e Log Dataset and control dataset should reside on different disk volumes data security in case of a failing disk volume 5 7 Modification of the rvs Tables file The Tables file is organized as a PDS It contains e different control information used by the rvs monitor e jobs used for maintenance of the rvs system e procedures All members of the rvs Tables Dataset should be treated as sample members general these members must be modified before they can be used by RVS As far as jobs procedures within this file are concerned most of the required changes are done when changing of dataset names see chapter 5 4 is complete The following members of the Tables Dataset should be checked modified one after the other CNTL rvs Start parameter rvsMVS Installation Manual 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS JOBCARD JCL for copy jobs RTAPEJC JCL for copy jobs STAPEJC JCL for copy jobs SYSOUTJC JCL for copy jobs MONITOR rvs Start Procedure MSGID no changes necessary PDF0002A procedure for display o
274. nn z BTAM subchannel address 3 digit UCB nnnn subchannel address 4 digit UCB This is a second way to define the BTAM subchannel address for switched lines Here you are able to define three or four digit subchannel addresses without rvs restrictions The value defined in parameter LINE will be used as alias name for this line Default value is the value defined in parameter LINE rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 10 Examples of a Stations Table 1 Example Different Entry Types lt 72 characters gt lt 8 gt 2 e e e ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke e ke e ke e ke e ke e ke KKK TOP OF DATA ck ke khe ke ke ke ec ke ec ke e e e ke e e e e e e e e ek 1 1 SID BST SCNL 001 0E2 FTP 4914 0 PHONE 34567 KUNZE ADDR BSC STATION WOB 2 SID SST ACME VTAM LU T32221 SPROF OS1 ADDR SNA STATION 3 SID XST ACME X25 ODETID ODCDE123XXX A 01 25 45536140856 SPW SENDPW RPW RECPW ADDR X25 STATION SID XIS ACME X25 ODETID ODCDE123XXX A 02 X25NUM 1 0536114222 ISDN X25PSIZE 1 512
275. not allowed to generate a certificate request from a self signed certificate rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features COMMAND GENSELFSIGNED This command generates a new private key and a self signed certificate Required parameter COMMONNAME COUNTRY ORGNAME Optional parameter INDEX KEYSIZE VALIDITY OU SP L DD names KEYSTORE the keystore dataset The generation of self signed certificate can be done using the example job RVS JOBS GENSELF A JOB GENSELF EXEC PGM DF053K REGION 4M STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR KEYSTORE DD DSN RVS KEYSTORE DISP SHR SYSIN DD COMMAND GENSELFSIGNED INDEX 0 KEYSIZE 1024 VALIDITY 365 COUNTRY DE ORGNAME TSI COMMONNAME RVS1 OU RVS SP BERLIN L BERLIN COMMAND GENCERTREQ This command generates a new private key and a certificate request Required parameter COMMONNAME COUNTRY ORGNAME Optional parameter INDEX KEYSIZE OU SP L DD names KEYSTORE the keystore dataset CERTREQ a new dataset for writing the certificate request The generation of a certificate request can be done using the example job RVS JOBS GENREQ The result is a dataset in format U It contains the certificate request DER coded JOB GENREQ EXEC PGM DF053K REGION 4M STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR KEYSTORE DD DSN RVS KEYSTORE DISP SHR CERTREQ DD DSN RVS CERTREQ DISP CATLG UNIT SYSDA 1 SPACE CYL 1 1
276. nt OFTP2 3 ALL ALL 1 portR2 RVS2MON START2 Inbound 253 gActl eActi CACt3 OFTP2 Server2 2 4 ALL ALL portR3 RVS2MON START2 Outbound 252 1 eAct2 CACt4 OFTP2 Client2 gActl rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features TTLSEnabled Trace TTLSEnvi ronmentAction HandshakeRole EnvironmentUserInstance TTLSKeyringParmsRef TTLSEnvi ronmentAction HandshakeRole EnvironmentUserInstance TTLSKeyringParmsRef TTLSConnectionAction HandshakeRole TTLSCipherParmsRef TTLSConnectionAdvancedParmsRef CtraceClearText Trace TTLSConnectionAction HandshakeRole TTLSCipherParmsRef TTLSConnectionAdvancedParmsRef CtraceClearText Trace TTLSConnectionAction HandshakeRole TTLSCipherParmsRef TTLSConnectionAdvancedParmsRef CtraceClearText Trace TTLSConnectionAction HandshakeRole TTLSCipherParmsRef TTLSConnectionAdvancedParmsRef CtraceClearText Trace TTLSConnectionAdvancedParms CertificateLabel SecondaryMap TTLSConnectionAdvancedParms CertificateLabel SecondaryMap TTLSConnectionAdvancedParms CertificateLabel SecondaryMap TTLSConnectionAdvancedParms CertificateLabel SecondaryMap TTLSKeyringParms 1 Keyring on 7 eActi Server 0 eAct2 Client 0 CACt1 OFTP2_Server Server cipher1 AT TLS__Gold cAdv1 OFTP2_Server off 7 CACt2 OFTP2 Client Client Ccipherl AT TLS Gold CAdv2 OFTP2 Client
277. nt caused by code translation Enable or disable this feature takes only effect on new transmissions IMPORTANT If rvsMVS is a relais station and there is a text file to be routed without code conversion it is not possible to downgrade to version 4 05 00 or previous You can list such files with program DF0145E Refer installation notes for more information REPLY rvs OC READY text Text of the rvs ready message on the console When specifying text the default message will be replaced by your text The text must be enclosed within quotes and must not exceed 50 characters rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset RJOBSUB YES NO This parameter indicates if the remote job feature 5 is enabled or not RMOPAPPL name This parameter is used only for the remote operating function This name must be specified in an APPL statement of the local VTAM If the SNA component is used this value must be different from the value specified within the rvs startparameter APPLID If this parameter is not coded the remote operating function cannot be used ROUT 08 nn Routing code for rvs messages Selectable between 1 and 15 The value of this parameter may be displayed changed with the rvs command ROUT see Operations Manual SCC ccc 1 Specification of system completion codes in hex for which an extended SNAP dump of the abended task will be taken
278. nt is included in the line driver modules for the different access methods In most cases the rvs traces are good enough for error detection However some situations may require additional information In these cases an external trace GTF trace or hardware trace datascope or similair utility or a similar trace must be used The rvs internal trace includes information about the internal rvs processing in most cases it does not include data concerning the line I O 8 2 1 Trace Output All output of the different internal traces is written to the file allocated with DD statement SYSWTO Output of the other rvs traces is written to SYSOUT class E by default This value may be changed by using the rvs startparameter TRACE see section 6 1 or by operator command TRACE see rvsMVS Operations Manual In this case another SYSOUT class can be defined by the statement TRACE x It is also possible to write trace output into a disk dataset In this case the statement TRACE pointer where pointer is a 2 8 character first level pointer of the dataset name may be used as rvs start parameter or as an operator command In this case a dataset with the name pointer LINExxx TRACE BSC or pointer sid nm TRACE SNA or pointer XMLU TRACE X25 or pointer SESnnnnn TRACE X25 or pointer sid SESnnnnn TRACE X25 or pointer sid SESnnnnn TRACE LU62 or pointer TCPIPnn TCPR TRACE TCP or pointer TCPIPnn sid SOCsssss TRACE TCP or pointer
279. ntial file 289 1 3 9 Import keys from a sequential file to the key management 290 1 3 10 Delete key from the key 290 1 4 Detailed description of function Key Data Utility Program DFO054K 290 1 4 1 Function GENKBEYS epar ouo nhau RT na nuo nn Kan RN ena a au Rea aa 291 1 4 2 Fonction KE YS it aset teu ctun teneamus tes PAREN AR 292 1 4 3 Function oT e MEM 293 1 4 4 TUO LIE EM 293 1 4 5 mE A ME 293 1 4 6 Funko MA DMN eee tisse d ie reece 294 1 5 Return codes of 5 295 1 6 DF054K 296 1 7 Key Data record description 300 rvsMVS Installation Manual 1 Introduction 1 Introduction rvsMVS is a file transfer system Datasets be interchanged between a computer where rvsMVS is installed and other computers where rvsMVS or other rvs compatible products are installed see below The rvs software allows to transmit a
280. nvironment flags bitstring exit is called to check access to the Control Dataset exit is called to check authorization for sending receiving files immediately at start of transmission If this bit is on the bytes at offset 8 and 9 are set to binary zeros reserved address of key of old kdrecord only if bit 2 at offset 9 is set on X 20 and update of record key is required else set to zero address of current kdrecord The layout of this record is described in Appendix B of this manual No field of this record should be modified by the exit The results may be unpredictable address of an area into which the exit may place a message text in case of a nonzero returncode Within the monitor this message will be displayed by rvs with one of the following message identifiers DF3526E or DF3736E if the exit is called in the receiving section DF5632E or DF1602E if the exit is called in the send section The layout of this message area is as follows Bytes 1 2 Halfword containing the length of following message buffer This length is at least 80 Bytes This field should not be changed by the exit Bytes 3 n Message buffer rvs always clears this buffer with blank characters before the exit is called After call of the exit rvs checks this buffer for blanks in order to decide whether a message is to be displayed or not The exit may set one of the following return codes in register 15 0 to indicate that
281. ny combination the following software is required additional For BSC component e OS VS BTAM this is part of the operating systems MVS and MVS XA or BTAM SP separate program product if operating system MVS XA is used e EP VS emulation of 2701 or 2703 within the control unit For SNA component e Version 2 or following releases e ACF NCP Version 2 or following releases For X25 component e Version 2 or following releases e ACF NCP Version 2 or following releases e X 25 NPSI any Release compatible with the Release of ACF NCP For X25 via XOT e IBM TCP IP for z OS For LU 6 2 component e ACF VTAM Version 3 2 or following releases e ACF NCP Version 4 1 or following releases For TCP IP component e TCP IP for MVS V3R2 or following releases e INTERLINK TCP IP Release 4 1 including CISCO IOS for S 390 Release 1 0 For FTP component e IBM TCP IP for MVS V3R2 2 2 Hardware Requirements rvs does not need special hardware except TP lines incl modems etc where rvs shall work with For access to files during data transfer any kind of disk drives may be used rvsMVS Installation Manual 2 Installation Requirements 2 3 Licensekey The following member named USER will be shipped in the RVS TABLES dataset This member contains installation depend values 9999999999 Customer Number rvsMVS Product 020100 RELEASE BXSL Included Components
282. ny sequential or partitioned dataset independent of record length block length and record format from one computer to another whilst the completeness and correctness of the transmission are monitored by the software Restrictions for the datasets to be transmitted may exist if the remote side has not installed rvsMVS rvsMVS includes seven components for support of different line procedures e BSC for switched or leased BSC lines e SNA using the normal SNA network Note that connections between two hosts require INN links this means a leased line connection e LU 6 2 using the normal SNA network This component works with the ODETTE File Transfer Protocol e X25 using the X25 network This component works with the ODETTE File Transfer Protocol e X25 using the X25 network via XOT This component works with the ODETTE File Transfer Protocol e TCP IP This component works with the ODETTE File Transfer Protocol e FTP using the TCP IP network This component allows transmissions to from any FTP servers clients There are different conditions for distribution of the different components of rvs rvs works as a monitor system in a separate MVS address space independent of other products subsystems like CICS IMS TSO JES2 or JESS The way how datasets are transmitted or received and a set of additional monitor functions like e automatic jobstart after transmission of a certain dataset automatic dial function for
283. o your installation requirements The next steps of installation are described in chapter 5 5 of this manual Note After submit of job RECEIVE the message FCO760W ALIAS DATUM2 IN INPUT DATASET HAS NO OWNER can occur This message can be ignored Authorization There are two reasons to define the rvs load library as an APF authorized library e Some status displays for transmissions using the FTP component may be incomplete e rvs User Exits see Appendix have been installed and at least one of these exits requires authorization If none of the installed User Exit requires APF authorization it is not necessary to define the rvs load library as an APF authorized library Independent of the definition of the rvs load library APF or not all rvs modules are linked with attribute AC 1 Creation of module DF067A described in chapter 5 3 Creation and Initialization of the rvs Control Dataset see chapter 5 5 Creation of the rvs Log Dataset see chapter 5 6 Modification of the rvs Tables Dataset see chapter 5 7 Installation of rvs ISPF panels see chapter 5 8 Creation and Initialization of the rvs Key Data data set if Security Feature will be used see chapter appendix 1 If you want to use OFTP2 Fileservices e g Encryption please also read the corresponding Addendum Inserting the Security Key of your own and of your partner s see chapter appendix optional Inserting the User und Permision entries in Permission
284. ocessing ect within the exit XXXX X reserved IXTCNTL control flags bitstring valid only if bit 6 value X 02 at offset 0 within this list is set to 1 IXTCBSND 1 call of exit before sending of the own identification to the remote station IXTCARCV 1 call of exit after receiption of the identification from the remote station IXTLDSOI lt the local station sends the own id before receiving the id from the remote station slave or initiator IXTLDMOR 1 the local station sends the own id after receiving the id from the remote station master or responder IXTNIDEX 1 the local station does not send the own id to the remote station no id exchange only receiption of the remote id IXTX4914 1 the format of the identification record address at offset 4 within this list is as follows the first two bytes contain the characterstring X followed by a variable number of 10 byte fields containing left justified a station identification or blanks for communication with DAKS Daimler Benz the second of these 10 byte fields is used IXTIDAVL 1 information id of the remote station is available XXXX X reserved rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits IXTRSVD1 reserved IXTRSVD2 reserved IXTIDREC address of the identification record zero if no record is available IXTIDRLN length of the identification record binary IXTRSVD3 reserved IXTRVSID address
285. of TEXTLREC the transmission is terminated abnormally the session is terminated with OFTP reason code 06 invalid data TIME 10 nn nn value between 1 and 99 Time interval in minutes after which the rvs command DS is issued automatically status display for all active BSC lines SNA X 25 and TCP IP sessions of the rvs monitor The value of this parameter be displayed changed with the rvs command TIME see Operations Manual TRACE E pointer Specification of a SYSOUT class or dataset name to which data created by the rvs internal trace will be written If only one character is specified rvs will treat this value as a SYSOUT class specification If more than one character max 8 is specified rvs treats this value as the first pointer of a dataset which will be e allocated dynamically if not existing or e extended DISP MOD if already existing at the time when the trace is started rvs command T sid see Operations Manual The complete name of this dataset is e pointer LINExxx TRACE if a BSC line is traced and xxx is the subchannel address of the line pointer sid nm TRACE if a SNA session to station sid is traced nm denotes the session type and number pointer XMLU TRACE if the X25 master LU session is traced pointer VCLUnnn TRACE if the nnn th virtual circuit LU SVC is traced X25 component only e pointer sid VCLUnnn TRACE if the nnn th virtual circuit LU SVC is tr
286. of User Log Dataset For detailed information see chapter 9 5 4 7 rvs Jobs Dataset The Jobs Dataset RVS JOBS is organized as a PDS Its members contain JCL for starting some usefull rvs tools 4 8 rvs EXEC Dataset The Exec Dataset RVS EXEC is organized as a PDS Its members contain REXX scripts for different tasks rvsMVS Installation Manual 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS The Distribution medium of rvsMVS is Distribution CD 5 1 Installation Guide from the Compact Disk The following steps must be performed when installing rvs 1 2 System I O Device generation for all used BSC lines see chapter Generation of all used BSC lines within the control unit for example IBM 37x5 see chapter 3 Definition of VTAM resources if SNA or X25 component or the remote operating function are used and generation of the NPSI if the X25 component is to be used see chapter 3 Transferring files to the MVS host All of the files except README TXT DOC RVSWIN EXE release info and rvsMVS documentation are datasets for the MVS environment These datasets have to be transferred from the workstation to the MVS host This may be done by various programs using different protocols e g rvsWIN rvsNT FTP or 3270 emulations like Extra Reflection PC3270 or Irma using the host program IND FILE In all cases it is important to use binary mode with recfm FB and Irecl 80 T
287. of a 3 byte field containing the remote station id as specified within the rvs stations table parameter SID this address is valid only if bit 1 value X 40 at offset 1 within this list is set to 1 IXTDNUM address of a 20 byte field containing the dial number for the remote station as specified within the rvs stations table parameter DIALNUM this address is set to zero if no dialnumber is specified or available IXTDBID address of a 10 byte field containing the value of parameter DBID as specified within the rvs stations table for the remote station This address is set to zero if no DBID parameter is specified or available IXTLINE address of a 3 byte field containing the subchannel number of the used line The exit may set one of the following return codes in register 15 0 4 8 1 to indicate that identification and following activities shall continue normally reserved reserved 2 to indicate that the identification phase is to be cancelled In this case the line connection will be broken All other returncodes will be handled in the same way as returncode 12 Rules for coding of the exit This exit should be coded reentrant linkage editor attributes reusable and reenterable If the exit is not coded reentrant the exit must be link edited without attributes reenterable and reusable Link attribute reusable may cause errors if more than one BSC line is used within
288. of this parameter may be useful when the local TCP IP stack includes more than one ip address If this parameter is not coded the default ip address of the local TCP IP stack will be used shown during initialization of the rvs TCP IP control task With release 2 5 11 the specified address will also be used for the listen task of the TCP IP control task Incoming connection requests will only be accepted if the connection request is sent to the specified ip address The ip address for this parameter may be specified as a dotted decimal number or as a symbolic name dns name Remark This parameter will be processed only in conjunction with parameter TCPPROD IBM TCPMAX xx 2 50 nnn nn value between 50 and 999 Maximum number of sessions for the specified TCP IP stack If the index xx for the stack is not coded the index value 1 will be automatically assigned TCPNAME xx name An 8 byte character field set to the name of the TCP IP address space used for this TCP IP stack For IBMs TCP IP the task s name of the address space is to be taken For the TCP IP product of Interlink the subsystem identifier 4 byte must be defined If this parameter is not specified and only one TCP IP stack is used the system derives a value from the configuration file of the TCP IP installation If the index xx for the stack is not coded the index value 1 will be automatically assigned TCPPORT xx 2 3305 nn nn value between 0 and 32767 Loc
289. ol parameter window size with the remote station E g Start parameter WSIZE is 7 but a remote station may only use a value of 2 In this case specify X25SIZE 2 for this station 4 To support more than one X 25 numbers for one partner station nn specifies the partner number index If there is no index defined the parameter will be used for all X 25 numbers within this station table entry To support more than one X 25 numbers for one partner station nn specifies the partner number index If there is no index defined the parameter will be used for all X 25 numbers within this station table entry rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 5 Subset 5 valid for LU 6 2 stations Definition ACCESMET access method CONVTYP conversation type mapped basic HOLDSESS option for session status if nothing to send LBLKSIZE line blocksize LUNAME logical unit name LU62MODE LOGMODE names for LU62 sessions SESSNUM limit of sessions SYNCLVL synchronization level transaction program name mandatory parameter Note The LU 6 2 component uses the ODETTE FTP OFTP Additional to these parameters subset 0 and subset 3 must be specified Description of rvs Station Table Parameters in detail 5 4 L U62 J Access method must be LU62 Mandatory parameter CONVTYP MAPPED BASIC Conversation type Optional parameter Th
290. oment up to 5 keypairs can be stored in the keystore Every keypair is accessed over a unique index The interface module for keystore access is DF053K which is controlled via SYSIN A command tells DFO53K the requested operation It has to be specified using the following syntax A JOB KEYST EXEC PGM DF053K REGION 4M STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR KEYSTORE DD RVS KEYSTORE DISP SHR SYSIN DD COMMAND The following commands are supported GENSELFSIGNED o Generates a private key with a self signed certificate GENCERTREQ o Generates a private key and a certificate request rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features IMPORTCERT o Imports a CA signed certificate DELETE Deletes a private key and its corresponding certificate EXPORTCERT o Writes a certificate to a new dataset LIST o List details for a single certificate LIST ALL o List details for all certificates Most commands need further options to work properly Please refer command description which options are required or optional and chapter 2 1 3 for parameter description Allocation of the Keystore The keystore has to be allocated in fixed block format record length 80 We suggest the following values Data Set Name RVS KEYSTORE General Data Current Allocation Management class MASWORK Allocated cylinders 1 Storage class SBATCH Allocated extents 1 Volume serial SM8008 Dev
291. oming calls will be routed by default to your rvs CTCP if CUD of the call packet is omitted But If the default values for CTCP selection within your NPSI generation have been overriden possible with NPSI Version 1 Rel 4 3 other values may be valid x25num x25num 15 characters X25NUM nn 4 x25group 8 characters x25num x25group J nn 1 99 3 X 25 number Germany Datex P Rufnummer If you want to support more than one 25 multi channel links in your rvs monitor it is possible to comprise several links to groups You can reach partners by more than one link automatically In this case you have to define such X 25 groups as rvs Start Parameter member CNTL of the rvs Tables file Each defined X 25 group consists of a group name up to eight characters a list of the numbers of the multi channel links which should be comprised in this group For instance X25GROUP ISDN 1 3 4 In the partner stations table entry this group may be refered to by specifying this group name additional in X25NUM parameter For instance X25NUM 0123456789 ISDN When dialing out rvsMVS looks for a not busy line among the specified links In case of receiving a CLEAR packet after dialing to a partner number rvs will dial to the next defined partner number automatically X25FAC nn cc cc z 1 128 characters nn 1 99 Facility fields of X 25 call request packet Optional paramet
292. on Manual Appendix I Key Data Utility Program DF054K DELETE A KEY FROM KEY DATASET Summary message above this message the error reason will be shown READ KEY DIRECT FOR DELETE The Key Data data set write module detects an error during delete processing Action terminated the record will not be deleted READ A KEY DIRECT The Key Data data set write module detects an error during read processing Action terminated KEYDS PROCESSING NO FLAG The Key Data data set read module detects Action terminated CSUTLAP KEY SUCESSFULLY CSUTL5P 1 The message finishes the xxxxxxxx action may be DED LETED AD DIRECT Um Protocol message only tener alicia SP ae Gee Protocol message only The space may contain one of the following error reasons KEY VALUE NO DDNAME DEFAULT USED Indication that the default DDNAME will be used CSUTL7P SID DDNAME XXXXXXXX CSUTL7P DSN Protocol message only The input parameter value will be written to the output CSUTL8P KEY DATASET SUCESSFULLY UPDATED Summary message Protocol message only CSUTL9I PROCESSING OF KEY MANAGEMENT ENDED kkk CSUTLAP 1 The message occurs during end processing Protocol message only Protocol message only The space may contain one of the following error or information reasons DELETE FU
293. on of member USER with license parameters Specification of member PFKEYS with definitions of RMOP PF keys optional rvs Security Key Data data set Code Translation Tables optional see chapter 6 11 USP Userseparation user mapping dataset USP Userseparation user mapping log USP Userseparation log event dataset USP Userseparation log event log Output results of the Y commands written by rvs optional Configuration dataset for extended tracing of XOT and online encryption rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Remarks USERDATA USERLOG LOGDATA LOGLOG is only necessary if USP User Separation is used Some allocations are not included within this start procedure They will be done dynamically after start of rvs if necessary Such allocations are ddname Resource rvs Control Dataset dynamic allocation will be done immediately after start of the rvs Monitor rvs Log Dataset dynamic allocation will be done immediately after start of the A detailed description of the datasets and members within this procedure is contained in prior sections of this manual The DD statement for member START is optional it may be omitted An example for an extended Start Procedure is contained in Appendix E of this manual 6 9 2 Overview on rvs Transmissions 6 9 2 1 PDF0002A obsolete PDFO0002A is not supported anymore You can use DF078B as a replacement see 6 9 2 2 The follo
294. onnected FTP station BBB destination station CCC The corresponding protocol file name is MVSPREF FTPHD AAABBB CCC F000123 Optional parameter it is only used for following protocol files information file response file end to end response file FTPUSE NO YES This parameter is used only for the rvsFTP component It indicates that this component is to be used by rvs All parameters for this component must be given and a list may be found at the beginning of this section GDGBASE YES This parameter is used for SNA only It indicates if GDG BASE should created automatically or not GDGTOR 20 Maximum number of ENQ requests for a target GDG after receiving a GDG file GDGTOT 1 nn Time to wait in seconds to get ENQ for a target after receiving a file HLDRESET NO t o 15 p This parameter is used for releasing dynamically send requests from hold status without involving any operating When an abnormal end of transmission occurred and a send request has been put into hold status this parameter provides for an automatic retry of transmission after an appropriate rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset time interval This does not work if the send request has been put into hold status by operator You may suppress this automation by specifying HLDRESETZNO HLDRESET t o t time interval 5 999 min o option e p e equal time interval prog
295. ote A BSC switched line needs an own entry within your Stations Table see Line Entry subset 9 LONGID long id same as ODETID PROGPROF 1 tz ppname ppname 3 chars PPROF J Name of the user defined program profile no default value For more information and an example please look for this manual into appendix H rvsMVS Tables RECVPW pw1 pw2 0 pw pw1 pw2 1 8 characters RPW J Receive passwords Optional parameter mandatory for FTP 4914 1 One or two passwords which will be compared with the password sent by the remote station No default value SENDPW t pw pw 1 8 characters SPW J Send Password Optional parameter mandatory for FTP 4914 1 Password will be sent to the remote station No default value SPEED LOW HIGH Transmission speed Mandatory for low speed lines 1200 bps SPEED LOW If switched lines with 1200 bps are used SPEED HIGH If lines with more than 1200 bps are used SUBCHANL b sc sc1 sc2 sc sc1 sc2 3 characters the first SCNL 1 character must be 0 Subchannel or line address Mandatory parameter One or more different alternative and parallel used addresses may be specified No default value see also parameter UCBNAME rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset UCBNAME nnn nnnn nnn BTAM subchannel address 3 digit UCB nnnn subchannel address 4 digit UCB This is a second way to define the s
296. out the partner capability Please refer to chapter 6 1 and 6 2 9 4 1 7 Steps to Prepare the Use of External Security Feature The following chapter gives a short description of How to prepare CO rvsMVS Ichapter5 1 5 1 aaa cS 1 Getavalidlicense with security code Y 2 Create the Security Key Data Set 2 3 Create your own Public and Private Security Key 7 chapter Appendix 4 insertthese keys into the Security Key Data Set 77 chapterAppendx 5 Getthe public security key of your partner 6 Insert this key into your Security Key Data Set chapter Appendix Add the parameter SECURITY EXT to partner s station entry chapter 6 2 0 __ Now the rvsMVS user is available to send data Create a send request see USER Manual All remaining steps will be done by rvsMVS automatically 9 5 User Separation USP step by step instructions 9 5 1 Introduction rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features rvsMVS receive files First the user who wants to send a file with rvs has to authenticate against the operating system When this user tries to send a file his user name and the file s name are transmitted by rvs before the actual file transfer is starting When the receiving rvsMVS gets this information it searches the mapping table for a corresponding entry If an entry is found rvsMVS retrieves the according RACF user If none was fo
297. outine SYSPRINT reference to DF076A output dataset SORTIN reference to DF076A output dataset SORTOUT the output dataset for sort routine ICEMAN e OUTFILE dataset which contains the formatted output e SYSTSIN start of the REXX Script please use the following format EXEC RVS EXEC DF078B OPTIONS EXEC DELTMP2 This step deletes the temporary datasets rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset The configuration dataset of the sort routine may be changed according to your environment Please refer manual for DFSORT for further information A detailed description of this procedure may be found in rvsMVS User Manual rvsMVS Benutzerhandbuch 6 9 3 Deleting old entries from the rvs Control Dataset The rvs Controldataset contains among others records with information about executed transmissions of the last time These records are not deleted automatically after some time So it is necessary in order to avoid space problems within the rvs Control Dataset to execute the following procedure from time to time for example once a week This procedure is contained in member PDFOOO9A of the rvs Tables Dataset on the installation tape PDF0009A PROC PAPIER R RESERVE DAYS 07 INTV 0 PDFO0O009A AI III III III III I He e A e DELETING OF OLD RECORDS FROM rvs CONTROL DATASET he e he e he e he He he He he He he He he He he He e He de He de He de He de He e He e He
298. phes Action terminated the key will not be written into the Key Data data set READ KEYID LENGTH ERROR The KEYID parameter has not exactly 8 characters Action terminated the key will not be written into the Key Data data set READ INPUT PARAMETER No valid parameter could detect in the input line Action terminated the key will not be written into the Key Data data set UPDATE OF KEY DATA SET Summary message above this message the error reason will be shown PREPARING UPDATE NOT ALL PARAMS The message could occur if a parameter set is not complete but end of data will be indicated Action terminated the key will not be written into the Key Data data set WRITE NEW KEY INTO KEY DATASET The Key Data data set write module detects an error Register 15 contains the write return code in byte 2 and 3 and the program return code in byte 0 and 1 Write return codes may be 0 normal end 4 record not found update 8 record not found read 12 no space new 16 duplicate key caused the message below 20 reserved 64 logical error 68 physical error during VSAM Action terminated the key will not be written into the Key Data data set WRITE DUPLICATE KEY The Key Data data set write module detects an error with return code 16 see above The xx may be PU fora public key PR fora private key Action terminated the key will not be written into the Key Data data set rvsMVS Installati
299. plits reduce performance when the control dataset is scanned for display of information For this a reorganization should be done if more than 5 8 CA splits have been done A reorganization should be done by execution of procedure PDF0015A for SMS use PDF0015B see chapter 6 9 4 within this manual 4 3 rvs Logdataset The rvs log dataset RVS LOG is a formatted sequential dataset BDAM All updates of the Controldataset will be logged within this file The only reason for introduction of this file is the following The content of the Controldataset changes with every transmission thus the requirements for a restore of this file in case of a catalog failure or disk error are different from those for other datasets The Logdataset allows to reconstruct a damaged Controldataset without loss of any information at any time A more detailed description may be found in chapter 6 9 4 section Saving and Recovery of the rvs Controldataset 4 4 rvs Tables Dataset The Tables Dataset RVS TABLES is organized as a PDS Its members contain different information e control information and tables which is used for operation of rvs e JCL and procedures which are used for maintanance and operation of rvs e other optional information for example CLISTS which may be used for rvs Statistics see Appendix D Look for further information chapter 0 6 10 and 6 11 too 4 5 rvs Key Data data set The rvsMVS Key data dataset RVS KEY DS is org
300. points to a 72 byte savearea e register 14 contains the return address and e register 1 points to a fullword which contains the address of a parameter list with the following fields offset dec length description characterstring RVSEXTO3 eye catcher flags from calling module bitstring first call of exit during submission of a job first card of JCL is passed to the exit next call of exit during submission of a job last call of exit during submission of a job no JCL card is passed to the exit during this last call type of job flags bitstring 1 the JCL to be submitted is a PDS member automatic jobstart specified within resident receive entry For obtaining names of PDS and member see remarks below the JCL to be submitted is the content of the received dataset remote job submit reserved reserved address of a workarea which may be used by the exit length of this workarea 8 bytes address of current kdrecord The layout of this record is described in Appendix B of this manual No field of this record should be modified by the exit The results may be unpredictable address of an area into which the exit may place a message text in case of returncodes 8 or 16 Within the monitor this message will be displayed by rvs with message identifier DF5803l The layout of this area byte 1 2 Halfword containing the length of a following message buffer This length is at least 70 bytes This field has to contain the l
301. ponent 50 nnn max number of TCP IP sessions TCPPORT xx 3305 nn Local port number for server function TCPLOCADJ xx ipaddress Own ip address of local TCP IP stack TCPNAME xx name Name of TCP IP address space TCPPRODJ xx INTERLINK Name of the product of the TCP IP stack to be used TCPSTKID xx name Reference name of the defined TCP IP stack ODID name Odette identification of the own station X25TOT 10 nn timeout interval for Odette FTP Note If you want to support more than one TCP IP stack you have to extend some of these parameters by an index xx 1 32 All parameters with the same index define one specific TCP IP stack If more than one TCP IP stacks are to be used the parameters TCPNAME and TCPSTKID are mandatory If only one TCP IP stack shall be used all parameters may be coded whithout index In this case index 1 is assigned automatically Additionally parameter TCPSTKID is not mandatory in this case 7 Parameters used only for the FTP component FTPUSE NO YES Indication for the use of the FTP component FTPMAX 50 nnn max number of parallel transmissions FTPPOLTI 60 nnn FTP polling task time interval in seconds FTPPREF name user prefix used for FTP file allocations optional ODID name Odette identification of the own station 8 Parameters used only for the remote operating function rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset RMOP
302. r Description of rvs Station Table Parameters in detail COMPRESS YES RVS NO OFTP compression Optional parameter The parameter indicates whether the compression method defined for the OFTP is to be used or not Default value COMPRESS YES Note e This parameter works together with the general compression parameter please refer to chapter 6 2 0 CREDIT 1 10 999 Data exchange buffer credits Optional parameter Allowed are values between 1 and 999 The specified number of exchange buffers can be sent consecutively by the sender without response of the receiver DIRECTN S Transmission direction Optional parameter This attribute specifies whether the local station wants only to SEND S files RECEIVE R files or do BOTH B functions during one session P stands for PAY ONLY FOR SEND and implicits the value BOTH if the local station is responder and the value SEND if the local station is initiator of the session EERPEXTR name Name of the EERP_Receive_User_Exit See appendix A 6 for more details of using the exit rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset No default value MVSEXT RETAINU IEBCOPY Extension for station type MVS The features are negotiated during session begin SSID RETAINU retains the record structure of U datasets allows transmission of PDS E and PDS using IEBCOPY
303. r NPSI stage 1 output shows the rvs SVCs on position 5 6 7 8 you have to code the idnums 0000 0000 0000 00010 in your switched major node kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk MODETAB FOR NPSI GATE SESSIONS ODETTE kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk LMTRVSX MODETAB LOGMODE BATCH1 COS BATCH1 FMPROF X 03 TSPROF X 03 PRIPROT X 90 SECPROT X 90 COMPROT X 0040 RUSIZES X 8888 PSNDPAC X 01 PSERVIC X 010000000000000000000000 EJECT MODEEND END FF 0X rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit Generation of the X 25 NPSI The following code is an example for the definition of a multi channel link within the NPSI Note that rvs uses only switched virtual circuits SVC s The number of SVC s defined within the NPSI must be at least the same as specified for the rvs start parameter MAXSVC nn see chapter 6 1 e eee e ee e ce de ce ce e ce ce ee ce ee e ce e ce ce e ce ce e ce ce e ce ce e ce ee ce ec v e x kv kx x PART OF NPSI GENERATION USED FOR rvs X25 MULTI CHANNEL LINK X30A0 LU NAME X30A0A 15 svc s X25BUILD IDNUMH 00 USED FOR NON SNA SWITCHED JOBCARD NO STAGE 2 JOB MAXPIU 3850 LONGEST PIU THAT ALLOWED MCHCNT 4 NUMBER PHYSICAL LINKS MODEL 3725 COMM CONTROLER SNAP NO DIAGNOSIS SNAP NOT I
304. r may be dialed german Freizeichen abwarten The characters C3 must be added to the number as well as for Datex L lines Examples The number of Datex L line 5361829 must be specified by DIALNUM 5361829C3 the telephone number 05361 123456 must be specified by DIALNUM D05361123456C3 Remark If the remote station has more than one line which may be used for transmissions specification of a second or third dialnumber might be useful In this case a second third stations entry should be coded The only difference between the additional station entries for one remote station should be the different dialnumbers FTP ftpname Name of File Transfer Protocol Mandatory Parameter If you use switched lines the FTP parameter will substitute the old PROGPROF parameter for leased line the PROGPROF parameter is valid further on rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Following FTP s are supported by rvsMVS BSC 4914 0 VDA File Transfer Protocol April 85 no blocking no restart no password exchange 4914 1 VDA File Transfer Protocol March 88 no blocking no restart with password exchange autodial mandatory rvsMVS rvs Internal Protocol of VOLKSWAGEN AG for exclusive use with rvsMVS stations with blocking restart and password exchange rvsDOS rvs Internal Protocol of VOLKSWAGEN AG for exclusive use with rvs DOS stations rvsRPG rvs Internal Protocol of VOLKSWAGEN AQ for ex
305. ransmission protocols may be defined for different sessions A session profile is assigned to each entry of the stations table which is defined to use VTAM SDLC line s This assignment is done during start of the rvs monitor Each session profile consists of a group of one ore more statements lines within this table which are summarized to the session profile name in columns 1 3 of the first line Each line within a session profile defines one session In general several parallel sessions are defined between two stations One session profile may be used for different remote stations The first line of a session profile must contain a nonblank character string in columns 1 3 the end of a session profile will be indicated if e the end of the table is reached or e the next line contains in columns 1 3 a character string different from the previous session profile name Lines with a in column 1 are treated as comment The following fields are included within one line definition of one session of a session profile Name of the session profile alphanumeric free selectable This name is used only for reference to the rvs Stations Table see parameter SESPROF The names of session profiles must be unique within this table Session profile names starting with character are reserved for rvs internal use Specification for activation of this session The following values are valid within this field blank the session w
306. ransmissions SMF 0 indicates that no User SMF records are to be written by the rvs monitor An example of a SVC used for writing SMF records and the layout of the SMF records created by the rvs monitor are included in the source library of the installations tape members ACTSVC SMFREC SMSMNGCL name Name of the SMS management class For more informations see description of MGMTCLAS parameter in DD statement JCL Reference If the parameter MGMTCLAS is specified within a resident receive entry this value will be taken With NONE the management class is not used for dataset allocation SMSSTOCL name Name of the SMS storage class For more informations see description of STORCLAS parameter in DD statement JCL Reference If the parameter STORCLAS is specified within a resident receive entry this value will be taken With NONE the storage class is not used for dataset allocation SMSDATCL name Name of the SMS data class For more informations see description of DATACLAS parameter in DD statement UCL Reference If the parameter DATACLAS is specified within a resident receive entry this value will be taken With NONE the data class is not used for dataset allocation SNAUSE YES Specification whether the SNA component is to be used or not If SNAUSE NO is specified all commands related to the SNA component for example commands for activation of the SNA subtask or for SNA stations will be rejected STATION sid
307. ration is a standard feature of rvsMVS 9 5 3 Configuration You have to modify the rvsMVS CNTL Member and the station table to activate user separation RVS Start parameter CNTL Member USERSEP YES NO Enables user separation for the own rvsMVS station RVS Stationtable STATIONS Member USERSEP YES NO Enables the user separation for the remote station Create Data Sets Create datasets rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features Description Dataset name Job in tables rvs User Mapping Dataset USP RVS USERDATA DEFUSER INITUSER rvs User Mapping Log USP RVS USERLOG DEFLOG L rvs User Log Dataset USP RVS LOGDATA DEFLOGL INITLOGL rvs User Log RVS LOGLOG DEFLOG L Remark If you use SMS to allocate datasets use the jobs DEFLLSMS and DEFUSSMS to create the VSAM datasets Modify the DF080A00 Job Add the following DD Statements to the DFO80A00 Job USERDATA DD DSN RVS USERDATA DISP SHR USERLOG DD DSN RVS USERLOG DISP SHR ILOGDATA DD DSN RVS LOGDATA DISP SHR ILOGLOG DD DSN RVS LOGLOG DISP SHR 9 5 4 Work with USP Panels Start Panel DF000U01 VW RECHNER VERBUND SYSTEM d LIII vede Ko ex ved ew WX Ww ow qx SELECT OPTION gt SEND A DATASET DISPLAY TRANSMISSTONS DELETE SEND REQUESTS CREATE RESIDENT RECEIVE ENTRY DISPLAY DELETE RESIDENT ENTRY DISPLAY TRANSMISSIONS EXTENDED CREATE USER SEPARATION ENT
308. re values from 128 up to 2000 bytes Note The LSIZE value may be reduced to the max exchange buffersize value see rvs startparameter XBFSIZE rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset PAD1 b XXIZZ Xx X 28 parameter number PAD2 J zz X 28 parameter value Optional parameters You can modify the international X 28 parameters by using these fields PAD1 defines the X 28 parameters from 1 to 12 and PAD2 defines the X 28 parameters from 13 to 22 If you want to change any X 28 parameter please define it in the following way PAD1 1 1 for X 28 parameter 1 PAD1 1 1 2 1 for X 28 parameter 1 and 2 PAD2 1 3 1 21 1 for X 28 parameters 13 and 21 X 28 parameters correspond to ODETTE Revision 1 3 If you have specified TYPE PAD for your partner these parameters are defined as default TYPE PAD type of X 25 connection This parameter must be coded if the communication with the remote station is done via an X 25 PAD No default value XNUMCHCK YES Checking of remote X 25 number in case of an incoming call Optional parameter If XNUMCHCK YES is coded and an incoming call is received the X 25 number of the received call indication packet is compared with the value of parameter X25NUM of this station In case of different values activation of the session will be rejected this means the received ODETTE data unit SSID will be responded by an ESID data unit end of se
309. received compression restart code translation selection of storage device volume unit group SMS control parameter after transmission Jobstart write event routing to other destinations GDG processing add date timestamp to dataset name Interface programs Batch SPF subroutines rvs rvs control tables dataset dataset file interface Address space of rvsMVS monitor Operator Interface control information for rvsMVS monitor rvs start parameter CNTL member control information for various monitor functions and definitions for own station characteristics of connected stations STATIONS member autodial options and many others profiles A 35 _ MVS XA MVS ESA OS 390 Remote Operator Interface Jeujo JO SALE received XOT VTAM 5 NPSI 318 g 5 18 ca commands for activate stop cancel of control tasks for different components activate stop cancel single sessions activate stop cancel BSC lines display modify rvs start parameters display modify rvs station parameters refresh stations table display control of send requests display of active complete transmissions send receive display of transmission rates start
310. rent lines the keyword and the left delimiter of the parameter value apostroph or parenthesis must be coded within one line rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 0 Subset 0 general parameters valid for all stations The following table shows general parameters which are needed by nearly all station table entries Definition ACCOUNT station account ACTCLASS Accounting classification ALIASSID alias identification AUTODIAL automatic dial BACKUP backup station identification COMPRESS Type of Compression Feature for this station CSVER Header version of external Compression Security Feature for this station DIALOPTS options for automatic dial DIALOPT2 times for mandatory automatic dial DIALOPT3 polling function for automatic dial DOPTS options for automatic spec day EERPAD EERP active dial EERPIN Handling of incoming EERPs EERPOUT Handling of outgoing EERPs ISTATUS initial status of stations entry NORELAIS suppression of routing ODETID ODETTE identification OPTIONS authorization for remote job proc PHONE telephone number only comment SECURITY Usage of Security Feature for this station SID rvs station identification TYPE Type of the station e g if the station is a virtual station Usage of User Separation lt lt lt m
311. response file e the FTP job created by rvs e the FTP commands to be executed within the FTP job e the FTP output return messages while execution of FTP commands A dashed line separates the individual entries An example of a complete trace is printed on the next pages An example shows the complete contents of an rvsMVS FTP trace file send direction kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkk TRACE STARTED DATE 97 133 TIME 11 21 2396 KKK KKK KKK KKK KIKI KK ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke Sk Sk Sk de de kk kk kk ke ke e e e e eee hehehe he he ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke e He ke ke kk e e He ke e ke de ke ke ke ke TRACE DATA BLOCK FTP HEADER FILE gt SEND REMOTE STATION FA4 DATASET NAME FIX0004 TESTX33 QUEUEING TIME 97 133 11 19 50 HF IDCMD H HFIDDSN FIX0004 TESTX33 FA4 F000019 HFIDDATE 1997 05 13 HFIDTIME 11 19 50 HFIDUSER HFIDSIDC FD2 HFIDSIDS FA4 HFIDDEST 00013000001VW FA4 HFIDORIG 00013000001VW FD2 HFIDFMT HFIDLREC 00138 HFIDFSIZ 0000013 HF IDRESP Y HFIDEERP Y TRACE DATA BLOCK FTP JOB FILE SEND REMOTE STATION FA4 DATASET NAME FIX0004 TESTX33 QUEUEING TIME 97 133 11 19 50 JOBNAME JDFA4001 FIX00031 JOB ABCDEFG 000 00 XXXXXXXX NOTIFY x CLASS A MSGCLASS B PRTY 9 TIME 0030 RRR RR IKK e e h e RVS JOBCARD rvsMVS Installation
312. ressing time interval When e equal time interval is specified a send request remains in hold status for t minutes before a next attempt of transmission may be done When p progressing time interval is chosen the request remains in hold status for t times n minutes where n denotes to the number of unsuccessfull attempts that have already been made Examples o e t 15 After an abnormal end the send request remains in hold status for fifteen minutes before a new attempt may be done regardless of the number of attempts o p t 10 After the 1 unsuccessful attempt the send request remains in hold status for ten minutes before a new attempt may be done After the 2 try the entry remains in hold status for 20 minutes then for 30 minutes etc IDEXIT name Name of an user provided identification exit routine If no identification exit routine is installed this parameter must be omitted This exit routine may be used to control modify the identification phase exchange of station identifications on switched BSC lines The interface for this exit is described in appendix A of this manual JFP YES NO Creation of a jobprotocol in case of failing automatic jobstart The parameter JFP YES provides a notification function if the rvs monitor cannot submit a specified job after reception of a file for example a specified jobdataset member does not exist or the jobdataset cannot be allocated If JFP YES is specified rvs submits the content
313. ression feature is enabled by license key Station Parameter GZIP Parameter in Result COMPRESS DF080A00 unspecified unspecified OFTP Compression unspecified GZIPZNO OFTP Compression rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset unspecified GZIP YES OFTP Compression with message COMPRESS OFTP unspecified OFTP Compression COMPRESS OFTP GZIP NO OFTP Compression COMPRESS OFTP GZIP YES OFTP Compression with message COMPRESS NO unspecified no Compression COMPRESS NO GZIP NO no Compression COMPRESS NO GZIP YES no Compression with message COMPRESS GZIP unspecified GZIP Compression COMPRESS GZIP GZIP NO OFTP Compression COMPRESS GZIP GZIP YES GZIP Compression Note GZIP compression is used as end to end file transfer That means compressed files are not influenced by routing station If COMPRESS NO is specified the Compression Feature will be rejected for all send requests to this station If COMPRESS GZIP is specified the OFTP compression procedure will be replaced by the External Compression procedure based on the GZIP rfc1952 algorithm This feature will be called rvs External Compression and works with routing inside of an OFTP network Both end partners with rvs have to select this offline feature CSVER 1 2 Header version of external Compression Security Feature Since rvsMVS 3 00 the support for
314. rt parameter rvs Tables dataset member CNIL parameter IDEXIT loadname e the exit is used by the line control program DF055A00 only check the rvs Program Profile Table col 5 12 rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits Example for coding the IDEXIT An example of the IDEXIT is found on the rvsMVS installation tape in the rvs source library 2 file member IDEXIT Please refer to this example in case of need of adaption to your environment A 6 ODETTE FTP User Exits Starting with rvsMVS 1 2 06 there are OFTP aided user exits in different layers of the ODETTE file transfer protocol These user exits are e SSID User Exit send and receive e SFID User Exit send and receive EERP User Exit receive Starting with rvsMVS 2 2 00 the user fields of SSID and SFID are used for the PDS transfer function If SSID and or SFID user exits are installed for certain stations the PDS transfer function is not supported for these stations In the flow of an ODETTE protocol session the user exits are available for the following protocol elements sender receiver OFTP OFTP SSRM lt SSID send SSID d SSID exit exit SSID SSID SSID send _ exit exit _ SFID send SFID __ SFID exit exit EERP recv EERP exit When the user exit gets control register 1 points to a list of two words which point
315. rvs RJE PROTOCOL PP8 DF055A00 DF034MOO DF035MOO DF057B00 DF059COO R0062 PROFILE9 MASTER STATION FOR SWITCHED LINE rvs DOS REL 3 PP9 DF055A00 DF034K00 DF035K00 DF057B00 DF059COO E0062 PROFILEO LEASED LINE TO rvsMVS OR rvs DOS REL 2 PPO DF056B00 DF034K00 DF035K00 DF057B00 059 00 000E2 ke ke ke ke kk kk kk k kk END OF TABLE xx k k k k d k kkk k ke e e k kk e ke e e kkk kkk e ke e ke e e e ke kkk rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix I Key Data Utility Program DF054K Il Key Data Utility Program DF054K 1 1 Introduction This document describes the changes for security referred to release level 02 05 05 rvsMVS 1 2 rvs Key Data dataset The rvsMVS Key Data dataset RVS KEY DS is organized as a VSAM KSDS This is a mandatory data set if the rvs installation wants to use the Security Feature All private and public keys used in a rvs installation have to be stored in the Key Data dataset This data set is the central information data base for the Security Feature It works as an interface between the rvs Monitor and rvs Security Administrator which maintains the key management Security keys are identified by KEYTYPE SID and KEYID KEYTYPE may be PU for public keys or PR for private keys SID is identical with the rvs parameter SID and KEYID is a hexadecimal character string which makes the key unique in a rvs installation The key identification KEYID will be generated by the key generation program and
316. ry The values of SID ODETID and X25NUM must be identical to the values you coded for the local station member CNTL of the TABLES dataset Furthermore SENDPW and RECVPW must be equal and the parameter DIRECTN B must be active specified or by default for both station definitions If you want to send data you have to take care of different names on sender and receiver side gt work with the rename function when queuing the dataset Test of TCP connections Before TCP IP sessions can be activated between local and remote installation the rvs TCP IP control task must be started This must be done by entering the command A RVSTCP If activation was successful message DF83011 TCP IP INITIALIZATION COMPLETE LV is displayed If activation is not successful error messages will be displayed which indicate the kind of error After activation of the TCP IP control task sessions to the remote station may be activated by entering the command A sid In this case rvs tries to establish a connection to the remote installation Message DF8301I F sid CONNECT COMPLETE 5 indicates successful activation of a TCP IP connection to the remote station In case of error conditions error messages will be displayed instead of the above message The TCP IP connection will be closed automatically if there is nothing more to send or receive or if any error occurs loop test For the loop test you don t need a partner
317. s rvs external Features are located at this level between the application layer and rvs It works as a part of the application layer controlled by rvs Monitor In the past there are some features comparable with this e to control output for SYSOUT e to send data to RJE e to handle PDS data sets which are located at the same external feature level The new External Compression and External Security Feature enhances this interface layer to prepare and to finish data transfer with more DDF TEST DB rvsMVS Transmission complete activate sid R11 1 file sending listing Application level rvs Application interface Controlling Supervision File transfer protocol Driver for network access public network Network tvsMV Special automatic File transfer User Application area Gen Receive Entry lt gt DB Data Base service The following picture shows the structure of rvs Abb Structure of of rvsMVS wit rvs Features To handle this features inside rvs some special information will be transferred in front of the data with which the receiving rvs is able to call the services necessary to create the file Because of the layer architecture rvs handles this on top of the file transfer protocol Therefore such a file may be routed through other stations without any influence over or from this stations Especially in rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features case of using OFT
318. s e to the data portion of the OFTP buffer e tothe current station entry On this way you can address all fields of an ODETTE FPDU and you have access to all informations of the station entry The first byte of an ODETTE FPDU is the OFTP command code rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits e SSID send and receive user exit EXSSID DSECT SFIDCMD DS CL1 SFIDDSN DS CL51 SSIDUSER DS CL8 e SFID send and receive user exit EXSFID DSECT SFIDCMD DS CL1 SFIDDSN DS CL26 DS CL21 SFIDUSER DS CL8 EERP receive user exit EXEERP DSECT EERPCMD DS CL1 EERPDSN DS CL26 DS CL21 EERPUSER DS CL8 This exit may be used to inform an application of the reception of the receipt EERP which is the only valid indication for a complete and safe file transfer The virtual file name of the transmitted dastaset may be found in the 26 bytes field starting at offset 1 of the EERP ODETTE FPDU Look to the ODETTE SPECIFICATIONS FOR FILE TRANSFER for more informations about ODETTE FPDU s The actual edition is OFTP Revision 1 3 Dec 1992 Programming rules e the AMODE and RMODE of this exits are not restricted you can use AMODE 24 or AMODE 31 modules e the exit must be reentrant e the exit gets control via a branch instruction the exit must fulfill the MVS linkage convention he must restore the registers 2 13 in returning to OFTP and e register 15 may contain a returncode a nonzero returncode will c
319. s component nn may be a value between 1 and 99 MAXSVCL xx 1 This parameter is used only for the X25 component It specifies the max number of switched virtual circuits SVC to be used by this component n may be a value between 1 and 99 The specified value must not be greater than the number of SVC s which are defined for the multichannel link SVC s are normally defined within the X25VC macro parameter LCN To support more than one X 25 multi channel links you have to define this parameter for each X 25 multi channel CTCP MSGIDzxx This parameter specifies the first two characters of the message id ODID xx value value This parameter is used only components which use the ODETTE FTP It specifies the identification of the own station Remark ODETTE identifications will be defined and issued by the national automotive associations Up to now it is not completely clear which organizations will do this work in the different countries For the Federal Republic of Germany the following address should be consulted Verband der Automobilindustrie e V VDA WestendstraBe 61 Postfach 170563 Kennwort VDA AVKD 4914 60079 Frankfurt Tel 069 97507 283 Fax 069 97507 300 Mail habild vda de Registration and distribution of ODETTE ID is not free of charge If you want to support more than one X 25 multi channel links it is possible to define different own ODETTE identifications for various X 25 multi ch
320. s most recently entered from the command field to be displayed on the command line The commands are displayed one at time in reverse sequence to which they were entered last in first out This allows you to eaisily recall a command for resubmission from command field You can edit the command before entering it if you wish Changing the default PFK settings PFKEYS member in TABLES file temporary Permanent changes you must do by EDIT command of TSO or ISPF Display all PF keys settings Display setting of PF key xx Display settings of PF keys xx to yy Display settings all commands indirect commands Display settings all commands direct commands Reset setting of PF key xx rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Using the Remote Operating Function This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix H rvsMVS Tables rvsMVS Tables H 1 rvsMVS Program Profile Table only used for the BSC component The internal Program Profile Table contains a number of standard entries corresponding to the supported FTP s In addition to these fixed profiles some special profiles can be added using the dataset RVS TABLES PROGPROF Special program profiles are necessary for example for BTAM leased lines The name of the user defined profile must be defined within the rvs Stations Table by the parameter PPROF PPROF ppnamewith ppname 3 char The name of the program profile is free
321. sed in the installation the maximum value DSPTINTV 999 should be specified in order to avoid overhead access to control dataset The value of this parameter may be displayed changed with the rvs command DSPTI see Operations Manual EERPAD YES NO automatic send of EERP rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset It AN Record send is controlled by parameter DIALOPT and station parameter EERPAD If it is set to NO default rvsMVS will never do an active dial to send an EERP If it is configured to YES the active dial behaviour depends on the station configuration EERPAD and DIALOPT See also new command DD EERP EXPDT yyyyddd nnnn NONE With this parameter the expiration date of received datasets is determined year e g 1998 day e g 365 this means 31 12 1998 or nnnn number of days from the current day on e g 30 current date 1 12 1998 expiration date 31 12 1998 If the parameter EXPDT is specified within a resident receive entry this value will be taken With NONE no expiration date is used for dataset allocation FIRSTLVL name name 1 8 characters first must be alpha This parameter is mandatory and is used as first level qualifier for temporary files and indirect file transfer using a relais station Blueprint for temporary dataset names name T Mxx Dyyddd Thhmmss Cxxxx Cyyyy Related transmission can be found using referen
322. set Authorization for remote job processing Optional parameter Single and combined values are allowed OPTS NO No authorization for remote job processing OPTS RJOB Remote job processing is allowed OPTS RJE RJE output may be requeued OPTS ROPT Remote options DISPR DEVR UNITR VOLR will be processed OPTS REPL Replace function is authorized OPTS ALL Full authorisation Example for combined values OPTS RJOB RJE Remote job processing and requeuing is possible PHONE text string text string z max 16 chars Telephone number of the final station Optional parameter The text string must be put into quotes Within the quotes all characters blanks commas etc are allowed and will not be recognized as delimiters The maximal length of the string is 16 characters The telephone number is only comment and can be shown on the console by the operator command X sid No default value SECURITY EXT NO The external feature security can be enabled diabled by 1 License key 2 rvs Stationstabellen Parameter SECURITY EXT NO 3 parameter during create of send request DF080A00 SECURITY EXT NO At first the external feature security is controlled by the rvsMVS license key A rvs Startparameter that this function switches on off is not necessary Because of compatibility the rvs Startparameter SECURITY is accepted but ignored in function It is set rvs intern to corresponding value of the license k
323. sets BUILTIN KEY CERTSTORE 190 TOPE 190 10 22 SLOP vis deren tort e ete 196 10 2 3 Certificate management parameter 2 200 10 3 Steps to configure RACF access RACF 201 10 3 1 Examples i xe da 201 10 4 Configuration of OFTP2 rnnt nn nnn 206 10 4 1 rvs Start Parameter CNTL 206 10 4 2 OFTP2 enabled station STATIONS member 208 10 4 3 Language environment option file 212 10 5 Configuration of the rvSMVS start procedure eese 213 10 6 System messages and error codes eese eeeneeen nennt tnter 213 10 7 PT ES eec DP 214 pur PEECII CHER 214 10 7 2 Sample Configuartion Step by 214 10 8 Annex User exit DF053R for implementation of randomizing 220 T1 coded Ea Fic RR i E DER EV DOCE EN FUE CR VON 227 2001 dci
324. sist of 16 lines with 32 characters Each character stands for one halfbyte in hexadecimal notation Always two halfbytes are used to replace respective byte in the dataset TABNAME E2ANSI 20202020202020202020202020202020 00 0F 20202020202020202020202020202020 10 1F 20202020202020202020202020202020 20 2F 20202020202020202020202020202020 30 3F 20202020202020202020C42E3C282B21 40 4F 26202020202020202020DC242A293B5E 50 5F 2D2FC220202020202020F62C255F3ES3F 60 6F 202020202020202020273A23A7273D22 70 7 20616263646566676869202020202020 80 8F 206A6B6C6D6E6F707172202020202020 90 9 20DF737475767778797A202020202020 A0 AF 20202020202020202020202020202020 BO BF E4414243444546474849202020202020 CO CF FC4A4B4C4D4E4F505152202020202020 DO DF D620535455565758595A202020202020 EO EF 30313233343536373839202020202020 FO FF Assume the dataset consists of the following string EBCDIC rvsMVS Rel 1 4 04 Hexadec 99A5A2D4E5E240D985934BA40F14BFA44BFOF4 The first byte has a hexdecimal value of 99 x On position 99 x in the table the value 72 x is found which stands for an r in ANSI character notation So this value is taken to replace 99 in the dataset As result of the code translation the string would then be replaced by the following Hexadec 7276734D56532052656C2E20312E342E3034 ANSI rvsMVS Rel 1 4 04 For receiving an ANSI file the data must be translated from ANSI to EBCDIC You can find the respective table ANSI2E in the me
325. sk has not been started see rvs command A RMOP within the Operation Manual remote operating function is not defined within rvs this means the rvs start parameter RMOPAPPL has not been specified e The maximum number of parallel remote operating sessions is exceeded Starting with release 2 5 the maximum number of parallel remote operator sessions has been extended from 1 to 8 sessions Entering rvs commands from the screen If the logon procedure to the rvs monitor is complete all rvs commands may be entered from the screen except commands of the form f rvs for example P rvs The syntax of the rvs commands is the same as described within the rvs Operations Manual but all commands must be preceeded by the character for example A 094 must be entered if the BSC line subchannel 094 shall be activated There are some special commands which are valid only in conjunction with the remote operating function if entered from the screen OP ON Initiates the function to process rvs commands this command is executed automatically after logon processing it must be entered only if the command OP OFF has been entered before RMSG ON Initiates the function to display rvs messages on the screen this command is executed automatically after logon processing it must be entered only if the command RMSG OFF has been entered before OP OFF Stops the function to process rvs commands which are entered from the screen a
326. smitted Bytes compressed For values bigger than 9999999999 use extended format below 205 1 byte Reserved rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Reference Utility program DF076A 10 bytes Number of Transmitted Bytes uncompressed For values bigger than 9999999999 use extended format below 1 byte Multi Volume Dataset M Dataset is a multi volume dataset 6 bytes Volume Number Disk Number of first volume if multi volume dataset 6 bytes Volume Number Tape 1 byte Kind of Error U User Abend Code 5 System Abend Code A Allocation Error 8 bytes Error Code 5 bytes Logical Record Length in bytes 5 bytes Blocksize in bytes 1 byte Record Format F fixed record length V variable record length U undefined record length 1 byte Resident Receive Entry or Remote Options R Resident Receive Entry found and used Resident Receive Entry ignored because of exit DFUX001 O Remote Options of sender used Reserved Dataset Organization P partitioned Dataset S sequential Dataset Accounting Number Disposition K keep catalog uncatalog delete Action after Receiving E write event to a job scheduling system specified F a job submit failed after reception of a data set J job submit after reception of a data set specified T copy job disk tape has been started S copy job disk sysoutqueue has been started X the wr
327. sneeeenseeeeneenas 11 2 2 Hardware Requirements 11 2 3 2 ed due duin 12 2 3 1 Extended Licensekey cite ter t eti n perta rdv de tuat 12 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit 14 3 1 Definition for BSC component nnna 14 3 1 1 BSC lines without autodial 14 3 1 2 lines with autodial function Interface 25 15 3 1 8 lines with autodial function Interface 256 17 3 2 Definitions for SNA component of FVS 18 3 3 Definitions for X25 component of IVS 20 3 3 1 Definitions for using the X 25 network via 20 3 3 2 Definitions for using the X 25 network via 20 3 3 3 Definitions for using the ISDN 24 3 4 Definitions for the SNA LU6 2 component of rvs eese nnns 26 3 5 Definitions for TCP IP component of IVS eese enne nnn nnne nnns 27 3 6 Definitions for component of rvs and rvsLight eere 27 3 7 Definitions for rvsWIN
328. specifies the state or province used in the distinguished name of a self signed certificate or a certificate request Please refer X 509 and X 500 RFC for more information rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features L locality name max 64 characters This parameter specifies the locality used in the distinguished name of a self signed certificate or a certificate request Please refer X 509 and X 500 RFC for more information COMMONNAME common name max 64 characters This parameter specifies the name of the certificate owner used in the distinguished name of a self signed certificate or a certificate request Please refer X 509 and X 500 RFC for more information 10 2 2 Certificate store The certificate store holds the partners certificates It s designed as VSAM dataset The certificates are saved in X 509 format They are referenced by the ODETTE ID of the partner station Multiple certificates can be stored for one ODETTE ID They are distinguished by a unique index number The interface module for certstore access is DF053C which is controlled via SYSIN command tells DF053C the requested operation It has to be specified using the following syntax A JOB KEYST EXEC PGM DF053C REGION 4M STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR CERTS DD RVS CERTS DISP SHR SYSIN DD COMMAND The following commands are supported IMPORT o Imports an X 509 certificate EXPORT o Exports an X 509 certificate D
329. ss Mandatory parameter Must be the first parameter of each Line Entry is used for Line Entries like SID for Station Entries No default value LINETYPE S LLT J Linetype Optional parameter Linetype must be S switched Parameter may be omitted because default value is S PHONE text string text string max 16 chars Telephone number of the final station Optional parameter The text string must be put into quotes Within the quotes all characters blanks commas etc are allowed and will not be recognized as delimiters The maximal length of the string is 16 characters The telephone number is only comment and can be shown on the console by the operator command X sid No default value SLAVE YES Definition of the behaviour of the line SLAVE substitutes the old PPROF parameter If you act like a master station e g car manufacturer you must specify SLAVE NO else you are a slave station e g supplier and must specify SLAVE YES If SLAVE YES secondary is coded rvs sets a WRITE macro and is able to send out the station identification SLAVE NO master primary rvs sets up READ macro is able to receive the identification of a remote station SPEED LOW HIGH Transmission speed Mandatory for low speed lines 1200 bps SPEED LOW If lines with 1200 bps are used SPEED HIGH If lines with more than 1200 bps are used UCBNAME nnn nnnn n
330. ssing options in RR entry GDG processing B date and timestamp processing T timestamp processing D datestamp processing R REPLACE of dataset 14 bytes High Level Response Time Date and time of reception at the final receiver Format YYYYDDDHHMMSST see Queuing Time 1 byte Indication for code translation Blank no code translation requested R code translation rejected code table not found T code translation successfully executed 8 bytes Name of code translation table 8 bytes Name of symbolic disk unit group 7 bytes Expiration Date Format dd dd number of days or fixed date YYYYDDD year date 8 bytes SMS management class 8 bytes SMS storage class 8 bytes SMS data class 7 bytes Earliest transmission date Format YYYYDDD YYYY year DDD day 7 bytes Earliest transmission time Format HHMMSST HH daytime hours MM daytime minutes SS daytime seconds T 1 10 seconds 16 bytes Number of Transmitted Bytes compressed Extended format up to 15 digits 16 bytes Number of Transmitted Bytes uncompressed Extended format up to 15 digits 1 byte DSNTYPE used for allocation L Large 1 byte Virtual record format used by ODETTE protocol T text U unstructured F fixed V variable Queuing Time extension used by ODETTE protocol 1 4 and rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Reference Util
331. ssion with reason code 03 user code not known or invalid If XNUMCHCKZNO is coded no checking will be performed Default If parameter XNUMCHCK is not coded the value specified for the rvs start parameter XNUMCHCK will be used 1 1 16 characters X25CUD nn 1 16 bytes hex notation J nn 1 99 Call User Data of X 25 call request packet Optional parameter This field could be useful to select the remote CTCP e if there is more than one CTCP assigned to the same multichannel link e or if subaddressing is not used Care should be taken when using this field because the first byte of the Call User Data are commonly interpreted as protocol identifier For example is used to select SNA QLLC services X 01 is the identifier for PAD connections and X CC is for TCP IP running over X 25 X C4 is reserved for SNA ELLC protocol connections To support more than one X 25 numbers for one partner station nn specifies the partner number index If there is no index defined the parameter will be used for all X 25 numbers within this station table entry rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Function of the X25CUD parameter Qutgoing calls will be provided with a Call User Data field within the X 25 call request packet So you have to know the value expected by the remote station If X25CUD is not coded the CUD field of the call packet will be omitted Inc
332. t available This parameter is exclusive with the VOLUME parameter This unit group is also used when a partitioned organized dataset is queued for sending with means of the program DFO80A00 The unloaded temporary dataset is allocated on a volume of this unit group UNTCOUNT 1 nn Unitcount for multivolume datasets Starting with version 2 2 05 rvs supports multivolume datasets when files are to be received The unitcount specifies the maximum number of volumes to be used for files which are to be received nn may be a value from 1 up to 20 This parameter is only used for files to be received on work volumes It is ignored when files are to be received on special volumes or when existing files are to be replaced The default value UNTCOUNT 1 is set because of compatibility with elder rvs versions but it is recommended to specify the maximum value UNTCOUNT 20 USERSEP YES NO Enables user separation for the own rvsMVS station VOLUME volume Name of a disk volume which will be used by the rvs monitor to allocate datasets during receiption if other specifications resident receive entries see User Manual are not available This parameter is exclusive with the UNIT parameter If both the VOLUME and UNIT parameter are specified the UNIT parameter will be ignored Specification of this parameter causes the rvs monitor to receive all datasets on the specified disk volume with following exceptions A resident receive en
333. t defined the value of the parameter SMSSTOCL will be used If both parameters YSTORCL and SMSSTOCL are not defined the default value is NONE With value no storage class is used YMAGMCL name rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This parameter is used for the security component only This parameter specifies the name of the SMS management class used for the allocation compression security temporary files If not defined the value of the parameter SMSMNGCL will be used If both parameters YMAGMCL and SMSMNGCL not defined the default value is NONE With value no management class is used YDATACL name This parameter is used for the security component only This parameter specifies the name of the SMS data class used for the allocation Compression Security temporary files If not defined the value of parameter SMSDATCL is used If both parameters YDATACL and SMSDATCL are not defined the default value is NONE With value no data class is used YPALLOC nnnn 20 This parameter is used for the security component only This parameter specifies the primary allocation in cylinders for allocation Compression Security temporary files nnnn may be a value from 1 up to 9999 YSALLOC nnnn 50 This parameter is used for the security component only This parameter specifies the secondary allocation in cylinders for allocatio
334. t is not specified Should not be modified fullword Address of message area MSGAREA 30 Bytes sent back to rvsWIN as a result of DFUX002 fullword Address of return code RC 2 Bytes sent back to rvsWIN as a result of DFUX002 The following record is sent by rvsWIN to rvsMVS directly prior to call of exit DFUX002 V RECORD PASSWORD RECORD rvsWIN gt rvsMVS VRECORD DS oc VRTYPE DS constant C V VRMODE DS direction SEND C S or RECEIVE VRNULL DS C constant 0 VRSID DS CL3 remote station id VRPWRD DS CL8 password may be blank VRUSERID DS CL8 userid may be blank VRNPWRD DS CL8 new password in case of password change VRLEN EQU VRECORD At least one of both fields VRPWRD and VRUSERID must be specified by the rvsWIN user otherwise the access is to be rejected by DFUX002 rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits The exit may set one of the following return codes in field RC 0 to indicate that access to rvsMVS is accepted All other returncodes indicating that the access is rejected All return codes must be accompanied by a message in field MSGAREA This message is sent back to rvsWIN and displayed on the screen Rules for coding of exit DFUX002 This exit must be coded reusable or reentrant The exit must restore the contents of registers 2 13 when returning control to the calling rvs program Example of exit DFUX002 An example of DFUX
335. t name and default assignments the messages of this subset may be defined in the following lines Definition of an empty subset is syntyctically accepted but makes no sense The end of a message subset will be recognized by end of file or by the definition of a new subset The messages itself must be defined generic this means that always the first characters of the message have to be specified Especially each message has to start with the characters Modification of the message prefix rvs start parameter MSGIDzxx does not affect processing of the suppression display functions All messages which match the same specified prefix will be processed suppressed displayed The definition of a message must comprise at least 3 characters e g DF5 the length of the definition is only restricted by the length of a line 80 characters One line may contain several message definitions Message definitions within a line must be separated by one or more blanks If a message definition itself contains blanks it must be enclosed by the characters gt and lt Example rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Sa a A oe eet ee a ee ee eS x CNTLMSG MEMBER SU a ee START MESSAGES OF SNA COMPONENT SUBSET COMPSNA1 DF3601 DF3713 START AND TERMINATION MESSAGE OF X
336. t search argument s The execution of the program has been continued at the next set of search arguments 16 Severe errors The execution of the program has been terminated rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Reference Utility program DF076A Reason codes 00 Parameter record missing in the Control Dataset 04 Read error in the Control Dataset 08 Invalid set of search arguments no start found 12 Unidentified keyword 16 Illegal search argument value 20 Invalid search argument value length 24 Conflicting search arguments 28 Syntax error in search arguments Abend codes 760 Invalid length of parameter input area 761 Parameter output area defined no parameter input area 762 Input output dataset needed but could not be opened 769 Illegal output dataset DCB parameters rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Reference Utility program DF076A This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix G Using the Remote Operating Function G Using the Remote Operating Function The Remote Operating Function allows to perform rvs operating from any 3270 screen After logon to the rvs monitor all rvs commands may be entered from the screen except commands of the form f rvs for example P rvs Additional all rvs messages which are displayed on console will be sent to the screen The following sections describe all details for the use of this function
337. tallation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 rvs Stations Table Different Types of Stations Table Entries The Stations Table contains Station Entries and Line Entries only if BTAM BSC switched lines are used Station Entries Each remote station must have a Station Entry Depending on the kind of connection different subsets of parameters are valid e Direct Station Entry The remote station is directly connected Parameters subsets BSC station subset 0 chapt 6 2 0 subset 1 chapt 6 2 1 SNA station subset 0 chapt 6 2 0 subset 2 chapt 6 2 2 stations using ODETTE FTP subset 3 chapt 6 2 3 X 25 station subset 0 chapt 6 2 0 subset 4 chapt 6 2 4 LU6 2 station subset 0 chapt 6 2 0 subset 5 chapt 6 2 5 TCP IP station subset 0 chapt 6 2 0 subset 6 chapt 6 2 6 FTP station subset 0 chapt 6 2 0 subset 7 chapt 6 2 7 e Indirect Station Entry The remote station is indirectly connected transfer runs via a relais station The relais station itself must exist as a Direct Station Entry Parameter subset VIA station subset 0 chapt 6 2 0 subset 8 chapt 6 2 8 Line Entries Each BSC switched line needs its own entry within the Stations Table Parameter subset BSC switched line subset 9 chapter 6 2 9 If you want to define more than one accessmethod for one station for example X25 ISTATUS INACTIVE and BSC ISTATUS ACTIVE you have to code one complete entry for each a
338. taset 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 1 rvs Start Parameter The rvs Start Parameters member CNTL of the rvs Tables file must be coded with keywords Most of the parameters have default values The parameters are separated by comma or one or more blanks A continuation character is not necessary but every parameter is to be coded completely in the range of column 1 to 72 Some of these parameters are mandatory others are optional But some of the optional parameters may be useful in order to adjust rvs to installation dependent names for example the name for a disk unit group Changes in Security Compression Parameters from version rvsMVS 2 5 11 For OFTP2 Security Parameter refer document Addendum OFTP2 Features e Parameter COMPRESS EXT YES NO and SECURIT Y EXT YES NO are not longer necessary The SECR COMP module is active if it is allowed by licence key Y 2 e Use COMPRESS NO and or SECURITY NO to switch off security and or compression although it is allowed by licence key e the parameters GPUKID GPUKNM GPRKID und GPRKNM are removed e There are new parameters to control the allocation of temporary datasets for security compression SECRPREF YPREFIX YSTORCL YMAGMCL YDATACL YPALLOC YSALLOC YUNITC und YUNITN Overview of the parameters 1 General parameters ACTOFST 49 nn ACTREL RVS ACC account BFPOOLRL BFPOOLSZ CHAPSDS N N CHAPRDS N
339. taset and processes the file like required in the Resident Receive Entry FTP Client TCP IP ahe partner station MVS UNIX Win95 WinNT TCP IP V3 R1 or higher Filetransfer with the FTP component of rvsMVS receive direction The requirement for the use of this component is the installation of IBMs TCP IP for MVS Version 3 Release 2 or following version There are no restrictions in view of the equipment used for the connection of the host with the IP network rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit 3 7 Definitions for rvsWIN stations This section contents special hints for using rvsWIN Creating rvsWIN installation disks rvsMVS installation tape contains the file RVS RVSWIN EXE After copying this file to disk on MVS host you have to transfer this file to your PC You should use the file transfer function of the 3270 terminal emulation on your PC options without including CR LF without code translation This dataset is a self extracting file and it will create the directory RVSSETUP on your PC This directory contains all rvsWIN installation files Defining rvsWIN stations You can find the definitions for rvsWIN stations in chapter 6 2 2 and 6 2 10 of this manual Running rvsWIN To run rvsWIN the rvsWIN user needs following information and authorization rvsWIN Stations ID defined in rvsMVS Stations Table see ch
340. ted This must be done by entering the command A RVSX25 If activation was successful message DF95011 RVS X 25 CTCP INITIALIZATION COMPLETE is displayed If activation is not successful error messages will be displayed which indicate the kind of error After activation of the rvs X25 control task sessions to the remote station may be activated by entering the command A sid In this case rvs tries to establish a switched virtual circuit SVC to the remote installation Message rvsMVS Installation Manual 7 Running Installation Tests DF9401I F sid ODETTE TASK STARTED TYPE type indicates successful activation of the SVC to the remote station In case of error conditions error messages will be displayed instead of the above message The SVC will be stopped automatically if there is nothing more to send or receive or if any error occurs X25 loop test In order to verify your VTAM and NPSI generation you can start a simple loop test For the loop test you don t need a partner station because you call your own station The call packet is set up on one of your SVCs routed back by the first switching node of the X 25 network and received by a second SVC of your multichannel link This implies that the multichannel link must have at least 2 SVC s and the rvs start parameter MAXSVC must specify a value of at least 2 SVC s The station you call is to be defined within STATIONS TABLE in the usual way see chapter 6 X25 ent
341. ted reference dataset may be used as a base for your own application programs listing or dialog programs or in some cases printed as it is The reference dataset contains either complete images or two different edited records of the selected Control dataset records The output may be also in a ouput parameter area with data from one Control Dataset record at a time The program receives search arguments for a group of transmission s to be obtained The rvs Control Dataset is searched for transmissions which satisfy the search arguments and the results are presented for the caller Input Input may be given in either of the two ways e As an call parameter input area originating from JCL EXEC statement command processor CALL or call from another application program according to the convention of JCL EXEC statement or command processor execution parameter area expression presenting exactly one set of search arguments The length if this parameter area may be zero no input via input INPARM or 2 256 The existence length and contents of area are checked and when it defines a set of search arguments it will be used rather than the dataset input even even though an input dataset would be available e As an input from a dataset containing one or more sets of search arguments Even in this case parameter input area may be present to define input and output dataset names and output format Dataset input may also include comment records pla
342. tes the last two characters of the MVS address for this line as specified in the IODEVICE macro yyy denotes the address of the control unit for the V 24 or X 21bis interface zzz denotes the address of the control unit for the V 25 interface used for dialing e The only difference between generation of a switched line with autodial function and generation of a switched line without autodial function is the coding of the AUTO parameter 3 1 3 BSC lines with autodial function Interface V 25bis The interface V 25bis is nowadays the standard for the autodial function and it is more comfortable in view of installation than V 25 This interface requires at least NCP V5R3 EP V1R8 Two things must be done to define a BSC line with autodial function based on V 25bis which is to be used by rvs e definition of the line within the IODEVICE generation MVS and e generation of the line within the control unit EP generation The IODEVICE generation for a switched BSC line with autodial function for V 25bis interface is exactly the same as for V 25 interface see chapter 3 1 2 EP generation for BSC lines with autodial function V 25bis The connection between control unit and automatic calling unit ACU is simply a one cable connection between control unit and modem with V 25bis support control V 25bis dial data network unit modem The following is an example of an EP generation concerning the LI
343. the OFTP2 Security Implementation DESCRIPTION RNDMVS C MODULE OUR CONTROL FF F 009 R1 PARM ADDRESS 2 000 000 4 ADDRESS OF BUFFER TO PLACE THE RANDOM DATA FF HF OUTPUT R15 RETURN CODE 0 SUCCESSFUL 1 PARAMETER LIST ERROR 2 0 5 MACRO ERROR FF ENVIRONMENT ENVIRONMENT LANGUAGE ENVIRONMENT AUTHORIZATION PROBLEM STATE CROSS MEMORY MODE PASN HASN SASN AMODE 31 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkkxkxk THIS MODULE GATHERS DATA TO PROVIDE ENTROPY FOR THE CRYPTLIB ENTROPY IS GATHERED BY OBTAINING THE TOD VALUE INTERMIXED WITH TASKS THAT PASS CONTROL BACK TO MVS TO PROCESS ENTROPY IS INTRODUCED FROM THE FACT THAT THE AMOUNT OF TIME MVS TAKES TO PROCESS THE REQUESTS IS UNKNOWN AND DEPENDENT ON FACTORS NOT IN 0 LENGTH OF INPUT BUFFER MUST IN THE RANGE 1 rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features RMODE 31 INTERUPT STATUS EXTERNAL INTERUPTS LOCKS NONE kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkxk DF053R CEEENTRY MAIN NO AUTO LDSSZ USING LDS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk LOAD INPUT PARAMETERS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkxkxk L R3 0 R1 LOAD LENGTH LTR R3 R3 ZERO BNH 01 5 R3 F 20000
344. the installation The exit must restore the contents of registers 2 18 when returning control to the calling rvs program The exit should not modify e field within the parameter list described above e any field pointed to by the parameter list except the identification record Environment of the exit The exit is loaded after activation of the line start of the line control program DF055A00 If more than one BSC line is used by rvs the exit is loaded for each line after line activation this means the exit checks and controls the identification phases only for one line rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits After loading the exit rvs passes control to the exit first call of exit in order to allow initialization of the exit open processing etc The next calls of the exit are performed in order to check and control the identification phases which are executed on the line If the line line control program is stopped rvs command P Ill or P ALL the exit is given control a last time which may be used for close processing etc Example Use of this exit for identification to DAKS s stations Communication with Daimler Benz Understanding for use The exit can work successfully only if rvsMVS is calling with automatic dial in this case the partner station of Daimler Benz is known Or e the partner station sends their own identification first If first rvsMVS sends the identific
345. the status of send request s queued in the remote station for transmission to the local own station R sid command Send session used only to send datasets Receive session used only to receive datasets Transmission protocol for 3270 interface Change Direction Indicator within request header of a VTAM RU will be sent only in case of a change direction Normally rvs does not care about the Change Direction Indicator and will send it within each VTAM RU This specification may be useful in conjunction with sessions to PU type 2 computers where the rvs transmission protocol is half duplex flip flop Change Direction Indicator within request header of a VTAM RU will never be sent Normally rvs does not care about the Change Direction Indicator and will send it within each VTAM RU This specification may be useful in conjunction with sessions to PU type 2 computers where the rvs transmission protocol is half duplex flip flop specification for example necessary for NCR computers Each session to the remote station uses a different Logical Unit name no parallel sessions to the remote application This specification is used for communication between rvs and PU Type 2 clusters Such a communication may be established if the remote computer supports one of transmission protocols VW FTP V1 0 or VW FTP V2 0 Remarks The values O S R exclude each other The value M defines the use of VW FTP V1 0 the values M and 7
346. the valid transmission data are represented by extra records CANCELLED Atransmission has been cancelled by operator DELETED The send request of a transmission has been deleted by the operator RETRANSMITS A retransmission has been started by operator rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix D rvs statistics This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix E Example for an extended rvs Start Procedure E Example for an extended rvs Start Procedure The following JCL is an example how the procedures PDFOOO9A and PDF0014A can be executed in conjunction with the rvs Startprocedure PDFOO01A This example ist designed for a JES3 environment and uses condition codes JOB KKK e HK HK KKK KK HK HK KKK KK HK IKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK TEST IF RVS KDSAVE TEMP IS STILL EXISTING ec KKK e e ke ee KKK e ke HK KKK KK HK IKK HK e e He he hee e He He He he ke e e ee He eee e ee e He e e ke He ke KKK TEST EXEC PGM IDCAMS SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSIN DD LISTC ENTRY RVS KDSAVE TEMP J BERRI RI RIK IK IKI He e KK KK KKK KKK IR IK IK IK IKI KKK KKK KKK KK He e He He He de e He e ke e Ke BACKUP COPY OF CONTROL AND LOG DATASET e e ke HK KKK KKK KKK KK HK HK IKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK HK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK SAVE EXEC PGM DF072A00 PARM RESERVE NOSAVE 30 COND 0 EQ TEST STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOU
347. tion Therefore the OFTP Protocol will be enhanced by e use of the SSID USER field e use of the SFID USER field e creation of the new protocol record SFX1 This enhancement will be used only if the station parameter TYPE MVS is given This means that in preparing the connection both partners have to make an agreement about the use of this feature and to inform rvsMVS about it by setting this parameter It serves to avoid connections to a partner which needs a blank USER field On the SSID level the USER field serves to inform the partner about the intended availabled process of PDS Transfer Therfore it contains the eyecatcher described above RF or RF and the value 8 in the fourth byte Additional combinations of this value with the values 4 2 and 1 are possible and inform about more additional properties On the SFID level the USER field serves to inform the partner about the use of the feature for this transmission The construction of the field is equal to the SSID USER field Value 8 or a combination with it shows the start of a PDS transfer Instead of the first data buffer rvsMVS sends a special protocol record This record contains all data set attributes of the unloaded PDS data set The structure of this protocol record follows rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features Field Name Definition Type Field Description SFX DS Eye chatcher SFX1CMD EQU X 42 character SFX1VER DS C Version Num
348. tion that all components functions of the protocol are specified in columns 73 76 of the program profile see below The rvs standard procedure with restart see rvs Interface Description protocol VW FTP B2 0 must be specified in this way in this case columns 73 76 must contain the value C EO60 Restrictions If communication with rvs DOS is defined and the local station is defined as a slave station the value C 1 must be specified in column 72 see below rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix H rvsMVS Tables The rvs RJE protocol value is supported only in conjunction with the definition of the local station as a master station see below Only for development and test This field must contain the constant value C 00 Specification for line and SMF recording The following values are valid within this field C 4 switched line with SMF data C 6 switched line without SMF data leased line with SMF data leased line without SMF data Remark rvs creates SMF records if the rvs Start Parameter SMF nn is specified with nn not equal zero see chapter 6 1 of this manual If SMF 0 is specified no SME recording is done independent of the value in this column Specification for identification phase of the transmission The following values are valid C O definition of the local own station as a slave station the own station identification will be sent in one string together with
349. tion with a remote station The local rvs installation must include the X 25 component The local control unit must include the IBM TCP IP program product TCP IP connection to an XOT capable hardware e g CISCO or BINTEC Router The remote installation must support the ODETTE File Transfer Protocol Both installations must have an X 25 multi channel link For further information about router configuration see router manuals 3 3 2 Definitions for using the X 25 network via NPSI This section describes VTAM definitions and NPSI definitions which are necessary for a X 25 connection between the local and a remote installation rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit The following requirements must be satisfied in order to establish an X 25 connection with a remote installation The local rvs installation must include the X 25 component The local control unit must include the X 25 NPSI program product The remote installation must support the ODETTE File Transfer Protocol Both installations must have an X 25 multi channel link VTAM definitions for the local rvs installation The local rvs installation must be defined within VTAM as a separate VTAM application VBUILD TYPE APPL RVSX APPL AUTH ACQ PARSESS YES VPACING 7 Remarks The name of the APPL statement here RVSX must be the same as specified for the rvs Startparameter XAPPLID see chapter 6
350. to the specified sysout queue Member JOBCARD of the rvs Tables Dataset This member must contain a valid jobcard consisting of one or more lines This jobcard is used exception see description of member JOBCARDS for the above mentioned copyjobs To avoid double jobnames one part of the jobname may be replaced by up to three question marks character The rvs Monitor replaces this question marks by an ascending number Example The jobname RVS CPY will be replaced by RVS05CPY if this is the fifth copyjob started by rvs since last monitor start If VWJOBC YES is specified see section rvs Start Parameter within this chapter rvs generates a jobname in the following manner J d sid nnn L ascending number 001 up to 999 rvs name of the remote station to from which the dataset is to be sent received direction of transmission R for receive S for send constant character Member JOBCARDS of the rvs Tables Dataset The use of this member is optional If it does not exist or if it is not allocated to the rvs Monitor with DD statement JOBCARDS member JOBCARD will be used instead of it The only reason for the use of this alternate jobcard is the following If received data shall be copied into a sysout queue it may be very useful to assign a special jobname with these data rvs replaces the question marks by the jobname userid of the job userid which has specified to copy the received data
351. tranfer product for PC under MS WINDOWS using SNA 3270 protocol E g SID PC1 ADDR PC Nr 1 or SID PC2 ADDR PC Nr 2 TYPE WIN 3270 TYPE WIN 3270 RECVPW PSW PC1 USERID USER PC2 It is not necessary to define an LUNAME any LUNAME is accepted The entry is used for both directions SEND and RECEIVE The access to rvsMVS is controlled by either checking the password RECVPW only example PC1 or checking the RACF userid USERID in combination with a valid RACF password PC2 The type of checking depends on whether RECVPW or USERID is specified and is done in exit DFUX002 see appendix A USERID 1 userid userid 1 8 characters UID J Userid of rvsWIN station user see above rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 3 Subset 3 valid for station entries using ODETTE FTP Definition COMPRESS Indication for use of OFTP compression CREDIT credit of data exchange buffer DIRECTN transmission direction EERPEXTR name of EERP receive user exit ODETID ODETTE identification OWNOID ODETTE identification of own station RECVPW receive password s SENDPW send password SFIDEXTR name of SFID receive user exit SFIDEXTS name of SFID send user exit SPCLOGIC special logic SSIDEXTR name of SSID receive user exit SSIDEXTS name of SSID send user exit TYPE MVS mandatory paramete
352. transmission or receiption of the dataset shall continue normally 4 to indicate an abnormal condition Depending on the environment in which the exit is executed this may result in e rejection of an update of the controldataset e rejection of sending of a file e suppression of processing options when receiving a file 12 to indicate that reception of a file is to be rejected This returncode is meaningless if the exit is executed outside the address space of the rvs monitor or if it is executed within the send section of the rvs monitor All other returncodes will be handled in the same way as returncode 4 Rules for coding of exit DFUX001 rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits This exit must be coded reusable or reentrant The exit must restore the contents of registers 2 13 when returning control to the calling rvs program The exit should not modify e any field of the current record of the rvs Control Dataset KDRECORD e the length field of the message buffer The following logic send or receive section applies to e each active send session rvs SNA session e each active leased line BTAM BSC e each active switched line BTAM BSC after establishing line connection to a remote rvs station e each active switched virtual circuit SVC to a remote rvs station Active here always means that the line or session has been activated within the rvs monitor rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix
353. try see User Manual is available and a different receive volume is specified within this entry The sending station has specified a different receive volume remote options see User Manual and the local own station has authorized the sending remote station for this for authorizations see description of the rvs Stations Table within this manual VWACC NO YES Accounting information within VW conventions VWJOBC NO YES VWJOBC YES generated jobnames are within VW conventions Jobnames are generated if e areceived dataset shall be copied from disk to tape e areceived dataset shall be copied to a SYSOUT class atape dataset queued for sending shall be copied from tape to disk before transmission rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset VWJOBC NO the jobname specified in member JOBCARD of the rvs Tables dataset used for the above mentioned copy jobs see chapter 6 will not be changed WSIZE xx 2 n This parameter is used only for the X25 component It specifies the windowsize to be used on packet layer If LLC4 GATE is used the X25 component of rvs uses this function the values for parameters MAXPKTL and VWINDOW of macro X25VCCPT are not used Thus the value for this startparameter of rvs must be the same as the value which is specified for the VWINDOW parameter of the X25VCCPT macro NPSI generation Remark This value must be the same as defined by the national X 25
354. ts to an entry of a directly connected station which works as a relais station Due to this it is necessary that the chosen relais station must have an own Direct Entry within your station table This Direct Entry describes all technical parameter to send a data set to this direct connected station The logical parameter agreed with the final station must be defined in this VIA Entry Such logical paramer may be ODETID see chapter 6 2 3 SECURITY see chapter 6 2 0 COMPRESS rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 9 Subset 9 valid for BSC Line Entries definition ACCESMET TP access method ACTMODE Activation mode ACTOPTS options for automatic activation AUTOACT automatic line activation observation ADDEVICE line prepared for autodial ADDRESS address of line only comment SLAVE line profile master slave LINE BTAM switched line identification LINETYPE Linetype PHONE telephone number only comment SPEED speed of transmission UCBNAME BTAM line address mandatory parameter Description of rvs Station Table Parameters in detail ACCESMET t BITAM J TP access method Must be BTAM This parameter may be omitted because it is the default ACTMODE 4 t N ORMAL S PECIAL ACTM J Activ
355. ubchannel or line address for leased lines Here you are able to define three or four digit line addresses without rvs restrictions The value defined in parameter SUBCHANL will be used as alias name for this line or subchannel Default value is the value defined in parameter SUBCHANL rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 2 Subset 2 valid for SNA Entries Definition ACCESMET access method ACTMODE activation mode ACTOPTS opts for auto activation AUTOACT automatic session activation observation AUTODIAL Removed JSUBRESP Removed LBLKSIZE line blocksize LUNAME logical unit name for RECVPW receive password s SENDPW send password SESPROF name of VTAM session profile TYPE partner characterization USERID USERID of rvsWIN user mandatory parameter Note Additional to these parameters subset 0 must be specified Description of rvs Station Table Parameters in detail 5 t V TAM ACME J TP access method must be VTAM Mandatory parameter ACTMODE s NIORMAL A LL ACTM J Activation mode of session control Optional parameter ACTMODE NORMAL sessions can be activated by every activation command except A ALL NORMAL is default ACTMODE ALL sessions can be act
356. ue should be followed by a dash otherwise the given sid of one or two characters will be considered as generic generic sid may also be an expression with an asterisk at the end of the sid indicating the wildcard character s Synonyme of this keyword is ORT DSNAME dsname Dataset name with or without member name optional DSNAME dsname member Name of the searched dataset If the given dataset name is shorter than the maximum of 44 characters it will be considered as a generic one A generic dataset name may also be indicated by an asterisk at the end of the dsname part of the value to indicate the wildcard character s If the searched dataset name should be of the same length as the given dsname part of the value of 43 characters or shorter a dash should follow the dsname If the dataset is partitioned and a member name is given it must be enclosed in parentheses and follow immediately the dataset name as described above The maximum length of the member name is 8 characters and the maximum length of the entire value is 54 characters Generic member names are not recognized QTM yydddhhmmsst Queuing date and time 1 12 numeric characters optional Queuing date and time of the transmissions to be queried yy is year ddd day number hh hours mm minutes ss seconds and t tenths of second The value may also be truncated to the right to define a time interval when only the given digits are considered as part of search
357. ulate the age nnn may be a value between 3 and 365 Default value ARDAYS 90 This parameter specifies the number of days which deleting of records will not be performed more than one time This means deleting of records will only be done if this procedure has not been executed within the last mm days Default value INTV 0 rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset INTRPT YES This parameter allows interrupt processing Execution of this program will be interrupted every 2 seconds followed by a wait time of 7 seconds This kind of processing avoids long time periods in which the controldataset is in exclusive control of only one job Default value INTRPT NO Remark The rvs Controldataset will be allocated dynamically if this procedure is executed The used ddname is KD 6 9 4 Saving and Recovery of the rvs Controldataset The rvs controldataset is the central information file within rvs The content of this file changes with every transmission thus the requirements for a restore of this file in case of a catalog failure or disk error are different from those for other datasets rvs has its own method to reconstruct a damaged controldataset without loss f any information at any time The concept for this is as follows e All modifications of the rvs controldataset are recorded within the rvs logdataset If this logdataset is full any update of the controldataset is terminate
358. und in the mapping table rvsMVS assumes that the user is directly known in RACF Next rvsMVS checks with RACF whether the RACF user has the right permissions to record the given file If the permissions inside RACF allow recording the file rvsMVS signals that the file transmission can start Otherwise it denies the file transmission to the sending station In both cases an appropriate entry is written to a user permission log The mapping table of rvsMVS is also useful for mapping user names with more than eight characters to RACF user names generally up to seven characters In case of starting a post transmission processing rvsMVS assures that the process is started under the name of the RACF user who was responsible for sending the file This action is recorded in the user permission log too The result of submitting the job is written to the log rvsMVS send files Today rvsMVS already checks the user s read permission to the file the user wants to send In general the user has the possibility to create a script which can be started when a send job fails This script name has to be given as parameter to the send job When this script will be started it will be started under the permissions of the RACF user who originally started the send job For each sending operation and for every script start an entry is written to the user permission log Appendix 9 5 2 Installation There are no additional installation steps necessary since user sepa
359. unication with rvsRPG DF035L00 Module name for all other communications DF035MOO Module name of the transmission control routine DF057B00 must always be specified Module name of the termination routine DF059C00 must always be specified Definition of the transmission protocol The following values may be specified 0 rvs internal protocol used if the remote station has installed rvsMVS or rvs DOS Rel 2 C 6 rvs standard procedure specifications of this protocol are described in the rvs Interface Description protocol VW FTP B1 0 This protocol does not support restart each data record is transmitted separate on the line no blocking Transmission protocol used for a special software on Siemens 330 computers only VW internal use rvs internal protocol used if the remote station has installed rvs RPG Same as but transmissions are performed blocked transmission mode see rvs Interface Description protocol VW FTP B1 1 Same as additional the restart function is included see rvs Interface Description protocol VW FTP B2 1 rvs internal protocol used if the remote station has installed rvs DOS Rel 3 File Transfer Protocol as described in recommendation 4914 of VDA Verband der Automobilindustrie e V rvs RJE procedure see rvs Interface Description protocol VW FTP B3 0 This protocol is quite similar but not identcally with the 2780 procedure Indica
360. used The Name may be any alphanumeric string with a length of max 8 bytes If the index xx for the stack is not coded the index value 1 will be automatically assigned XOTREMAD xx ipaddress Remote ip address of the XOT capable hardware e g XOT Router used by the XOT communication task to establish a connection The ip address for this parameter may be specified as a dotted decimal number or as a symbolic name dns name XOTRPORT xx 1998 nn nn value between 0 and 32767 Remote port number of the XOT capable hardware e g XOT Router used by the XOT communication task to establish a connection The default value of 1998 is the port number recommended by the XOT RFC 1613 If the index xx is not coded the index value 1 will be automatically assigned XOTUSE YES NO This parameter is used for the X25 component only It indicates the use of X 25 via XOT in case of YES or X 25 via NPSI in case of NO as X 25 network YPREFIX name TSO USERID This parameter is used for the compression security component only This parameter specifies the user prefix name 1 7 characters All compression security temporary files to be created by rvsMVS have to start with this prefix Alike with the parameter SECRPREF YSTORCL name This parameter is used for the security component only This parameter specifies the name of the SMS storage class used for the allocation of the compression security temporary files If no
361. ut of the area passed to the accounting user exit routine if the rvs start parameter ACEXIT name is coded in terms of an assembler space description This description is part of the installation tape member ACXTAREA of the rvs source library and be used as a DSECT if an accounting user exit shall be installed kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk rvs ACCOUNTING RECORD USED FOR USER ACCOUNTING EXIT kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkxk DS ACSTART EQU ACLENGTH DS H LENGTH OF RECORD INCL FIELD ACLENGTH DS H RESERVED oe ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e ce e cec ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce eee e ce e e ee ee e ecce ce e e e e e e A x x GENERAL DATA oe ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e ce ce e e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce RRR ee ce e e ce ecce ee ccce cce e A A x ACMODEL DS CL4 SYSTEM ID SAME AS FIELD SMCASID OF SMCA ACJOBNM DS CL8 JOB NAME ke ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK e e e e A 333 DATA OF TRANSMISSION oe ce ce ce ce ce ce e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e e oe KKK KKK KKK RRR e e e 333 ACREADYD DS F QUEUING DATE OF THE DATASET
362. vsMVS RACF admin rvsMVS Installation Manual 10 OFTP 2 Features ALTUSER TESTUSR OMVS HOME u testusr PROGRAM bin sh Activate the needed resource classes in RACF and let them reside in storage RACF admin SETROPTS RACLIST CSFSERV CLASSACT CSFSERV SETROPTS RACLIST FACILITY CLASSACT FACILITY Define the needed resource profiles in RACF RACF admin RDEFINE CSFSERV CSFPKD UACC NONE RDEFINE CSFSERV CSFDSG UACC NONE RDEFINE FACILITY IRR DIGTCERT RDEFINE FACILITY IRR DIGTCERT ADD RDEFINE FACILITY IRR DIGTCERT CONNECT RDEFINE FACILITY IRR DIGTCERT GENCERT Give permission to use needed resource profiles to user who runs rvsMVS RACF admin PERMIT CSFPKD CLASS CSFSERV ID TESTUSR ACC READ PERMIT CSFPKI CLASS CSFSERV ID TESTUSR ACC READ PERMIT CSFDSG CLASS CSFSERV ID TESTUSR ACC READ PERMIT IRR DIGTCERT CLASS FACILITY ID TESTUSR ACC READ PERMIT IRR DIGTCERT CONNECT CLASS FACILITY ID TESTUSR ACC UPDATE PERMIT IRR DIGTCERT GENCERT CLASS FACILITY ID TESTUSR ACC CONTROL Refresh the in storage RACF profiles RACF admin SETROPTS RACLIST CSFSERV REFRESH SETROPTS RACLIST FACILITY REFRESH Create a keyring for your rvsMVS RACF admin RACDCERT ADDRING TESTRING ID TESTUSR Create a selfsigned key for CERTAUTH with the purpose to sign your testkey RACF admin RACDCERT GENCERT CERTAUTH WITHLABEL TESTCA SUBJECTSDN CN TESTCA SIZE 1024 NOTAFTER DATE 2015 01 15
363. wing commands are entered P ill stopping the line subchannel if active F sid PP ppp changing the program profile for the line activating the line subchannel 2 Restrictions for backup operation rvs is not designed to support transmissions between two installations using BSC and SNA at the same time A restart of an abended transmission is possible only if the restart is done with the same access method BTAM or VTAM which was used when the transmission abended Therefore the command S sid R must be entered on both sides to suppress any restart if the access method for transmissions between both installations is changed from BTAM to VTAM or from VTAM to BTAM 8 2 rvs Trace rvs allows starting a line trace BSC lines a session trace SNA sessions LU62 sessions TCP sessions FTP transmissions or X25 sessions or an internal trace in order to e get further information in fault situations rvsMVS Installation Manual 8 Special Functions Procedures e be able to check correct execution of the rvs protocol when connecting non IBM computers to rvs if the VDA File Transfer Protocol or the ODETTE File Transfer Protocol is used For each BSC line resp each SNA LU62 TCP FTP or X25 session a trace can be started command see rvsMVS Operation Manual for more details The rvs trace displays data which are available at the application program interface of the different access methods The trace poi
364. wing example of a Procedure for display of executed transmissions is contained in member PDF0002A of the rvs Tables Dataset on the installation tape PDF0002A PROC PAPIER TAG DSN ORT SID ZZ 60 LVL L1 DAY PDF0OOO02A kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk OVERVIEW ON rvs TRANSMISSIONS KKK HK HH KI KK KH KK IKK HK HK HK IKK HK KKK KKK HK KK KKK KKK KK KEK HK KKK KKK KKK SDF078A EXEC PGM DF078AO00 PARM DSN amp DSN SID amp ORT amp SID TAG amp TAG amp DAY ZZ amp ZZ LVL amp LVL STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSOUT DD DUMMY SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT amp PAPIER KD DD DSN dsname DISP SHR RVSLOG DD DSN dsname DISP SHR TABLES DD DSN dsname DISP SHR STATIONS DD DSN dsname DISP SHR A detailed description of this procedure may be found in rvsMVS User Manual rvsMVS Benutzerhandbuch 6 9 2 2 DF078B The following example of a JCL for display of executed transmissions is contained in member DF078B of the rvs Jobs Dataset JOB rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset STEP FOR DELETING TEMP FILES IF IT IS NECESSARY DELTMP1 EXEC PGM IDCAMS SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSIN DD DELETE RVS DF078B ICEMAN DELETE RVS DF078B DF076A DELETE RVS DF078B RESULT STEP FOR ALLOCATING NEW TEMP DATASET SO IT CAN BE REFERENCED IN NEXT STEP BY 2 DDNAMES 7 ALCTMP EXEC PGM IEFBR14 SXSPRI
365. xt text 1 20 characters FTP password for the partner station No default value FTPPORT FPT 21 nnnnn X xxxx port 1 65534 Remote portnumber nn may be a value between 0 and 65534 hexadecimal X FFFE The portnumber specifies the application which shall be connected to FTPPREF FPR name name 1 18 characters Specifies the prefix which should be used for construction of dataset names for additional control file Optional parameter The names of such protocol files look as follows prefix FTPxx sSid iginSidgrpserver Sidgestination re fnumber prefix value of FTPPREF parameter FTPxx constant Sidorigin origin station id SidErP server sid of next FTP station Siddestination destination station id refnumber an unique number stamp to avoid conflicts with duplicate control file names The prefix has to correspond to MVS DSName conventions on MVS hosts PC file name conventions on PC stations or UNIX file name conventions on UNIX like stations Examples of control file name information file 1 MVS FTPPREF MVSPREF origin station AAA next FTP station BBB destination station CCC control file name MVSPREF FTPHD AAABBB CCC F000123 2 PC FTPPREF ftprvs origin station XXX next FTP server station YYY rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset destination station YYY control file name ftprvs ftphd xxxyyy yyy f000123 FTPREFN
366. y empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 6 Subset 6 valid for TCP IP Direct Entries definition ACCESMET access method LBLKSIZE LSIZE line blocksize TCPIPADR remote IP address TCPIPCHK check remote IP address TCPPORT remote port number TCPSESS max number of parallel sessions mandatory parameter Note The TCP IP component uses the ODETTE FTP OFTP Additional to these parameters subset 0 and subset 3 must be specified Description of rvs Station Table Parameters in detail ACCESMET t Access method must be TCP Mandatory parameter LBLKSIZE 4128 2000 32760 LSIZE 1 exchange buffer size used for transmissions Optional parameter Allowed are values from 128 up to 32760 bytes TCPIPADR ipaddr ipaddr stackname Remote IP address This address may be specified either in dotted decimal notation for example TCPIPADR 10 211 036 20 or as a symbolic name length up to 60 bytes for example TCPIPADR RVSSRV10 If the TCP IP stack to be used for this connection is defined with an index other than 1 the reference name for the stack to be used must also be coded The reference name corresponds with the rvs start parameter TCPSTKID defined for this stack Example TCPIPADR 10 211 36 5 NET20 or TCPIPADR RVSSRV10 NET20 Caution Specification of a symbolic name requires the serv
367. ystem and Control Unit For data transmission the partner has to be defined in rvsMVS first For this you need to know the partner s IP Address as well as a User ID and a Password for the FTP session setup Sending data to an FTP partner You can queue datasets either using the ISPF user interface or using the BATCH TSO interfaces which means you tell rvsMVS to send the specified dataset to the desired partner station rvsMVS generates a Batch Job out of these information which invokes the FTP Session setup dataset transmission and session shutdown are executed within this FTP Job The processing of the FTP commands is logged in an output dataset which is checked after transmission by rvsMVS In this way it is ensured that the dataset has been correctly transmitted to the partner or if not the transmission is restarted automatically by rvsMVS To give the partner information regarding the transfer sender dataset format queuing time etc there is the possibility to send an information file along with the data itself This information file will be generated automatically by rvsMVS if desired Receiving data from an FTP partner rvsMVS as receiver first of all has no influence on receiving the dataset This is done only by the FTP To support the partner in sending the dataset s rvsLight is used a shell script which enables the FTP access and which creates and transmits the information file for the dataset to be transmitted

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Jabra BIZ 2400 User's Manual  Marantz PD5020D User's Manual  取扱説明書 - オークセール  ex5162/ex5161 executive leather chair ex5162/ex5161 fauteuil  Montageanleitung SPRINT 824    Guide d`installation de Cubase LE/ Mode d`emploi comme  使用者による保守点検  ー2 月 ー 日 - 福生市立図書館  NetLogo 2.1.0 User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file